berks county intermediate unit - Balton Construction Inc. About Us
berks county intermediate unit - Balton Construction Inc. About Us
berks county intermediate unit - Balton Construction Inc. About Us
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
BERKS COUNTYINTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE & TRANSPORTATION CENTER61 BERKLEY ROADREADING, PA 19605PROFESSIONALWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDP.O. BOX 41229 W. MAIN ST.FLEETWOOD, PA 19522PH: 610-944-5536 FAX: 610-944-5539CONSULTING M.E.P.PROFESSIONALN.E. FISHER & ASSOCIATES329 EAST SECOND STREETBOYERTOWN, PA 19512PH: 610-369-3190CONSULTING STRUCTURALPROFESSIONALRUFF ENGINEERING COMPANY6140 BOYERTOWN PIKEDOUGLASSVILLE, PA 19518PH: 610-689-9004ISSUED FOR:C O N S T R U C T I O NJUNE 4, 2010
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERDivision..........Section Title ..........................................................................................………………..……………PagesSERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS00000..............ADVERTISEMENT ............................................................................. ................................................. 100010..............INVITATION TO BID ......................................................................... ................................................. 100100..............INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.......................................................... ................................................. 300300..............BID FORM ........................................................................................... ................................................. 500310..............NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ........................................................ ................................................. 100320..............STATEMENT OF BIDDERS QUALIFICATION ............................... ................................................. 200700..............SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT........... 900800..............SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTS............................................... ................................................. 5DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01100..............SUMMARY .......................................................................................... ................................................. 101200..............PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES........................................... ................................................. 301300..............ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ............................................. ................................................. 201400..............QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. ................................................. 201500..............TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS................................. ................................................. 201600..............PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS............................................................. ................................................. 201700..............EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ ................................................. 3........................REGULATIONS FOR PREVAILING WAGE ACT............................ ................................................. 10........................PREVAILING WAGE ACT ................................................................. ................................................. 7........................PREVAILING WAGE RATES ............................................................ ................................................. 8........................WEEKLY PAYROLL CERTIFICATION FOR PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS................................... 2DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION02222..............SELECTIVE DEMOLITION................................................................ ................................................. 102230..............SITE CLEARING ................................................................................. ................................................. 102741..............HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING........................................................... ................................................. 202821..............CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES................................................. ................................................. 3DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE03300..............CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ........................................................... ................................................. 2DIVISION 4 - MASONRY04810..............UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES ....................................................... .................................................3DIVISION 5 - METALS05120..............STRUCTURAL STEEL........................................................................ ................................................. 205310..............STEEL DECK....................................................................................... ................................................. 205500..............METAL FABRICATIONS ................................................................... ................................................. 205520..............HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS........................................................... ................................................. 2DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS06100..............ROUGH CARPENTRY........................................................................ ................................................. 206200..............FINISH CARPENTRY ......................................................................... ................................................. 106402..............INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK................................. ................................................. 3DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION07210..............BUILDING INSULATION................................................................... ................................................. 107311..............ASPHALT SHINGLES......................................................................... ................................................. 207531..............EPDM ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING ............................ ................................................. 207610..............SHEET METAL ROOFING AND SIDING ......................................... ................................................. 1WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 – TOCTABLE OF CONTENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER07710..............MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES......................................... ................................................. 107720..............ROOF ACCESSORIES......................................................................... ................................................. 107920..............JOINT SEALANTS .............................................................................. ................................................. 2DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS081113............HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES...................................... ................................................. 6081416............FLUSH WOOD DOORS ...................................................................... ................................................. 608361..............SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS (ADD ALT #G10)..................... ................................................. 208411..............ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ........ ................................................. 208710..............DOOR HARDWARE ........................................................................... ................................................. 1808710b............CARD ACCESS (By Owner & Coordinated by the GC/EC)................ ................................................. 408800..............GLAZING............................................................................................. ................................................. 2DIVISION 9 - FINISHES09260..............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ...................................................... ................................................. 209310..............CERAMIC TILE................................................................................... ................................................. 309511..............ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS..................................................... ................................................. 109651..............RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ............................................................ ................................................. 209653..............RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES .............................. ................................................. 209674a ............EPOXY FLOORING -1/8” DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR ......... ................................................. 209674b............EPOXY FLOORING -1/8” EPOXY BROADCAST SYSTEM (ADD ALT #G4)................................. 209674c ............RESINOUS FLOORING -1/4” EPOXY TOPPING (ADD ALT #G5). ................................................. 209680..............CARPET ............................................................................................... ................................................. 109910..............PAINTING............................................................................................ ................................................. 2DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES10265..............IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION................................... ................................................. 110431..............SIGNS ................................................................................................... ................................................. 110520..............FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES.................................................. ................................................. 110801..............TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ................................................ ................................................. 1DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENTNOT APPLICABLEDIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS12481..............FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ........................................................... ................................................. 112491..............HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS..................................................... ................................................. 1DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION13038..............BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM (ADD ALT #G3/ E2).................. ................................................. 2DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMSNOT APPLICABLEDIVISION 15 - MECHANICALHVAC15000 .............GENERAL ............................................................................................ ................................................. 1615100..............MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT....................................................... ................................................. 515200..............DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES................................................... ................................................. 315400..............INSULATION....................................................................................... ................................................. 315500 .............ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ......... ................................................. 415600 .............COMPLETION, TESTING AND BALANCING................................. ................................................. 3WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 – TOCTABLE OF CONTENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPLUMBING15700..............GENERAL ............................................................................................ ................................................. 1515750..............VEHICLE MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT ........................................... 715800..............MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT....................................................... ................................................. 1315850..............SEWER CLEANING AND INSPECTION .......................................... ................................................. 215900..............EARTHWORK, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ........................... ................................................. 215975..............COMPLETION, TESTING AND BALANCING................................. ................................................. 4DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL16000..............GENERAL ............................................................................................ ................................................. 1716100..............INTERIOR ELECTRICAL WORK...................................................... ................................................. 2616200..............SERVICES AND UNDERGROUND WORK...................................... ................................................. 516300..............EQUIPMENT WIRING........................................................................ ................................................. 116400..............LIGHTING FIXTURES........................................................................ ................................................. 516450..............EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEMS .................................................... ................................................. 716500..............FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ...................................................................... ................................................. 816600..............AUXILIARY SYSTEMS...................................................................... ................................................. 316700..............COMPLETION AND TESTING .......................................................... ................................................. 3END OF TOCWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 – TOCTABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00000 --ADVERTISEMENTBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSealed bids for the Maintenance and Transportation Center will be received by, Berks County Intermediate Unit, PurchasingOffice, 1111 Commons Boulevard, P.O. Box 16050, Reading, PA 19612 on Tuesday, August 3, 2010.The project consists of renovations to the existing 10,400 s.f. building including an interior 3,000 s.f. office / break area expansionand miscellaneous site work as described in the contract documents.Bids received after the time specified above will not be accepted. Properly received bids will be opened publicly and read aloudimmediately following the specified deadline for receiving bids. A pre-bid conference is mandatory and will be held at 1pm onTuesday, July 13, 2010, at the project site of 61 Berkley Road, Reading, PA 19605. Bids will be accepted for the followingseparate primes: General <strong>Construction</strong>, HVAC <strong>Construction</strong>, Electrical <strong>Construction</strong> and Plumbing <strong>Construction</strong>.Bid documents may be examined without charge or purchased at the office of Watkins Architect LTD, 29 W. Main Street, P.O.Box 412, Fleetwood, PA, 19522. A non-refundable fee of $150.00 is required for the purchase of each set of BID DOCUMENTS.Single copies of drawings and specifications are available for a reproduction cost of $4.00 per drawing sheet, and $0.15 perspecification sheet. First class mail delivery is available for an additional $15.00 per set to cover postage and handling. Checksshould be made payable to “Watkins Architect LTD”.Bids shall be accompanied by bid Security in the form of cash, bank cashier’s check, certified check, treasurer’s check or bid bondas provided in the bidding documents, with corporate rate surety satisfactorily in the form of not less than 10% of the base bid,naming as oblige Berks County Intermediate Unit, to be retained and applied by the undersigned as provided in contractdocuments in case bidder would default in executing the agreement or furnishing the required bonds and insurance certificatesrequired by the contract documents.Perspective bidders are advised that this project is subject to and will be governed by provisions of the Pennsylvania PrevailingWage Act including amendments and supplements there-to. Bidders shall submit their bids after giving consideration to theapplicability of said Pennsylvania Wage Act to the work involved, and to all other laws and regulations, state or federal, applicableto this project.No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 120 days after the date set for the opening of bids. Bids may not be withdrawn by thebidder for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date of bid opening. The successful bidder will be required to furnishspecified performance bond and payment bond in a final sum equal to 100% of the proposed contract amount. Bonds shall beissued by a surety authorized and licensed to do business in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.The undersigned reserves the right to waive informalities, or irregularities, defects, errors or omissions in bids, or to reject all bidsor parts thereof.Berks County Intermediate UnitEND OF DOCUMENTWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 00000ADVERTISEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 00010 -- INVITATION TO BID1. The Owner, Berks County Intermediate Unit, will accept bids for the construction of the Maintenance and TransportationCenter located at 61 Berkley Road, Reading, PA 19605.2. The bid will be for all work as shown in Drawings and Specifications and related work required for project completion.3. All bidders must examine the Drawings, read the Specifications, and visit the site of this project to fully investigate theextent and quality of the work required. Bidders shall be familiar with the location and access to construction site,availability of utilities, the condition of the site and any existing construction, and governing regulatory agencies and permitprocesses.4. The successful bidder shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance in amounts listed in the SupplementaryGeneral Conditions, Article 11 - Insurance, included herewith in Division 0000, or other amounts as required by law,whichever is greater:5. Submit bids on the forms provided, signed, with all items complete.6. Address bids to the Owners and deliver to the address on the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS on or before the day stated.7. No bid shall be withdrawn for a period of one hundred twenty (120) days subsequent to the opening of bids without thewritten consent of the Owner.8. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to reject any part of any bid, and to waive any bid informalities._____________________________________________________________________Owner(s) (name and title) (date)END OF DOCUMENTWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 00010- INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 00100 -- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Project name and Owner's name:Project: BCIU – Maintenance and Transportation Center61 Berkley RoadReading, PA 19605Owner: Berks County Intermediate Unit1111 Commons BoulevardP.O. Box 16050Reading, PA 196122. This document contains Instructions to Bidders for the project named above.3. To obtain bid documents, contact:John C. WatkinsWatkins Architect, LTDP.O. Box 412, 29 W. Main St.Fleetwood, PA 19522Ph: (610) 944-5536Fax: (610) 944-5539e-mail: yourteam@watkinsarchitect.com4. One copy of bidding documents will be provided to each contractor at $150 per set. Additional copies of drawings andspecifications may be obtained at $150 per set. First class mail delivery is available for an additional $15 per set to coverpostage and handling. Documents may be reviewed without charge at the office of Watkins Architect. Individual copies ofdrawings may be obtained at $4.00/ ‘E’ size sheet and $0.15 per specification sheet.5. Submit Document 00300 -- Bid Form by: 1pm on Tuesday, August 3, 2010Submit signed original and one copy of bid proposal in a sealed envelope labeled with project name and bidder's name. Markthe envelope: "Bid Enclosed. Do Not Open before Bid Time and Date." Late submissions will not be considered.All signatures of the proposal shall be by the legal owner/s of the company, corporation or partnership.Submit bid to:Berks County Intermediate UnitPurchasing DepartmentAttn: Purchasing Department1111 Commons BoulevardP.O. Box 16050Reading, PA 19612Ph.: 610-987-2248The Bidder shall assume responsibility for successful delivery to BCIU prior to the due date and time specified. Deliveriesnot made by the due date and time specified, and to the location specified, will be considered non responsive and will bereturned unopened.6. Bid Security is required equal to (10%) of the bidBid Security must be as per AIA bid bond, paid as a certified or cashier's check made payable to the Owner.Bid security will be forfeited if a bidder is awarded the contract and fails to complete the Owner-Contractor Agreementwithin 10 days of notification by Owner.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 00100INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERBid Security for unsuccessful bidders will be returned within 14 calendar days after the contract is awarded.7. Each bidder shall submit proof of bonding for the entire cost of the work. Bond form shall be as per AIA bid bond. Bondsmust be by a surety company acceptable to the Owner and licensed in the locale of the work.8. No modifications to bids will be considered except as included in the sealed bid envelope.9. The Owner reserves the right to select or reject bids on the basis of price considered along with contractor's experience,location, reputation, status with contractor licensing regulators, and other qualifications. The Owner reserves the right toenter negotiations with any bidder after the bid opening date.10. The Owner reserves the right to modify the Contract Documents and restart the bid process as necessary to meet theconstruction budget.11. The bidder must review all documents with care to fully understand all the conditions of the project.12. Questions may be submitted during the bidding period. Questions will be answered in writing in a timely manner andcopies will be distributed simultaneously to all bidders. Submit questions to:John C. WatkinsWatkins Architect LTDP.O. Box 412, 29 W. Main St.Fleetwood, PA 19522Ph: (610) 944-5536Fax: (610) 944-5539e-mail: yourteam@watkinsarchitect.com13. A site visit for review of existing conditions is required. The bidder will be assumed to have full knowledge of siteconditions that might affect the bid and subsequent construction costs. The Project will be open for a mandatory walk thruon Tuesday, July 13 at 1pm.14. Refer to the work schedule specified under Supplementary Conditions. Contract work shall be started within ten (10)days after written notification by Owner to start work. If work is not completed on time as specified, subject to extensions asprovided in Contract Documents, the Liquidated Damages Clause specified will be enforced at the rate established. Allcontract work shall be fully and finally completed on or before Friday, December 17, 2010, if authorization to startwork is given by Friday, August 20, 2010. Liquidated damages shall be $1,000 per day starting on Saturday, August21, 2010 and continuing each calendar day to the completion of the project.15. The building will not be occupied during <strong>Construction</strong>.16. Bidders shall use the materials and equipment specified by manufacturer, model number and/or trade name in preparingtheir proposals for this project. Approval for material substitutions must be obtained from the Architect during the bid period(obtain approval prior to being included in bid), all requests submitted by Prime Contractors only not later than seven (7) daysbefore Bid Due Date.17. The following AIA Documents shall be included in the Contract Documents. These Documents have not been includedin this Specification, but are available upon request from the Architect. These Documents are listed in the index as follows:General Conditions of the Contract for <strong>Construction</strong>AIA Document A201-1997Form of Agreement AIA Document A101-1997Change Order AIA Document G701Application & Certificate for PaymentAIA Document G702 and G70344 pages07 pages01 pages02 pages18. Each of the documents is required to be delivered to the Owner by the successful bidder shall be delivered in at leastthree (3) counterparts.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 00100INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER19. The Owner will not consider, for any purpose, any claim of the bidder of any mistake or omission in his proposal.Negligence of the bidder in preparing his proposal shall not confer or be deemed to confer any right in the bidder to withdrawsuch proposal after the time fixed in the Notice to Contractors bound herewith as the time for receiving, opening, and readingproposals has passed.END OF DOCUMENTWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 - 00100INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00300 --BID FORMBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Submit bids in compliance with Document 00100 - Instructions to Bidders. The Owner reserves the right to rejectincomplete bid forms.2. Name and Address of Bidder:The Bidder will perform all Work required by the Contract Documents for the amount of:GENERAL CONSTRUCTION (G)G.C. Base Bid:<strong>Construction</strong> of the entire project as described on the project drawings and specifications excluding only thefollowing add alternates:(Base Numerical Bid) $_________________WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 00300BID FORM(Base Written Bid)___________________________________________________dollarsGC ALTERNATES: All bidders must refer to Division 01200 Price and Payment Procedures, Section 1.1 Alternates,included herewith for alternate details/scope of work.Add Alternate #G1 – FENCE ON 3 SIDES AND GATES(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G2 – – FENCE ALONG ROUTE 61(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G3 – – BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G4 – – 1/8” THICK EPOXY FLOOR IN GARAGE(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G5 – – 1/4” THICK EPOXY FLOOR IN GARAGE(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G6 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G7 – – PREP AND PAINT GARAGE #116(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollars
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERAdd Alternate #G8 – – STEEL STAIR TO MEZZANINE(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G9 – – PREP AND PAINT EXTERIOR STEEL FRAMING(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #G10 – – OVERHEAD DOOR UPGRADES(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION (E)Electrical Base Bid:<strong>Construction</strong> of the entire electrical system as described on the project drawing and specifications excluding only thefollowing add alternates:(Base Numerical Bid) $_________________(Base Written Bid)___________________________________________________dollarsEC ALTERNATES: All bidders must refer to Division 01200 Price and Payment Procedures, Section 1.1 Alternates,included herewith, and any addendums, for alternate details/scope of work.Add Alternate # E1 – POWER FOR MOTORIZED FENCE GATE(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E2 – – BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E3 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E4 – – HOTSY SYSTEM UPGRADE(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E5 – – NEW SITE LIGHTS(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E6 – – REPLACE SITE LIGHTS AND WALL PACK LIGHTS(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 - 00300BID FORM
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERAdd Alternate #E7 – – REPLACE INTERIOR LIGHTS IN GARAGE #110 AND #116(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E8 – – NEW WASTE OIL HEATERS(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E9 – – NEW 270 GALLON OIL TANK, NEW WASTE OIL TANK AND NEW OIL,GREASE AND AIR LINES(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #E10 – – NEW GENERATOR, CONCRETE PAD AND RELATED ITEMS(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsHVAC CONSTRUCTION (M)HVAC Base bid:<strong>Construction</strong> of the entire HVAC system as described on the project drawings and specifications excluding only thefollowing add alternates:(Base Numerical Bid) $_________________(Base Written Bid)___________________________________________________dollarsMC ALTERNATES: All bidders must refer to Division 01200 Price and Payment Procedures, Section 1.1 Alternates,included herewith, and any addendums, for alternate details/scope of work.Add Alternate #M1 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #M2 – – NEW WASTE OIL HEATERS(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsPLUMBING CONSTRUCTION (P)Plumbing Base Bid:<strong>Construction</strong> of the entire plumbing system as described on the project drawings and specifications excluding onlythe following add alternates:(Base Numerical Bid) $_________________(Base Written Bid)___________________________________________________dollarsPC ALTERNATES: All bidders must refer to Division 01200 Price and Payment Procedures, Section 1.1 Alternates,WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 3 - 00300BID FORM
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERincluded herewith, and any addendums, for alternate details/scope of work.Add Alternate #P1 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #P2 – – HOTSY SYSTEM UPGRADE ((Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #P3 – – NEW WASTE OIL HEATERS(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #P4 – – NEW 270 GALLON OIL TANK, NEW WASTE OIL TANK AND NEW OIL,GREASE AND AIR LINES(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollarsAdd Alternate #P5 – – PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW OIL INTERCEPTOR(Numerical Bid) $_________________(Written bid)___________________________________________________dollars3. The Bidder will start and complete the work as follows.Starting Date:Date of Substantial Completion:4. By this Bid Form submittal, the Bidder affirms having visited the project site and has full knowledge of existing conditionswhich affect the work.5. By this Bid Form submittal, the Bidder affirms having reviewed all the Contract Documents including the followingAddenda:ADDENDA #___________________________________________________Date_____________________6. Submit a completed Non-Collusion Affidavit and a completed Statement of Bidders Qualifications with this Bid Form.Additional bid qualification submissions may include: Proposed subcontractors, cash flow requirements, access to the work,assumptions for staging the work, assumptions for protecting existing and adjacent work, and proposed modifications toGeneral and Supplementary Conditions. The following items MUST be included in the submitted Bid Proposal for theGeneral Contractor, HVAC Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, and Electrical Contractor:a. <strong>Construction</strong> Firm history and background information.b. Key people who will be assigned to this project.c. Three (3) projects of similar cost and scope as a reference, including address of projects, Owner (contact)name and phone #, and Architects name and phone #.d. A letter from the Contractors insurance carrier stating that the Contractors insurance meets or exceeds therequired coverage as stated in the bid specifications.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 4 - 00300BID FORM
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER7. Signed and sealed (Enter date, Bidder's signature and legal business address.)INDIVIDUALThe undersigned hereby certifies that this Proposal is genuine and not sham, collusive or fraudulent or made in theinterest of or in behalf of any person, firm or corporation not herein named; and that the undersigned has not, directlyor indirectly induced or solicited any bidder to submit a sham bid, or any other person, firm or corporation frombidding, and that the undersigned has not, in any manner, sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantageover any other bidder.Trading and doing business as__________________________________________________witness________________________________________________SEALPARTNERSHIPwitness____________________witness____________________witness________________________________________________SEAL____________________________SEAL____________________________SEALCORPORATIONAttest:Secretary__________________ ByPresident ________________________________SEALCORPORATE SEAL<strong>Inc</strong>orporated under the laws of State of ________________________FORM OF PROPOSALEND OF DOCUMENTWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 5 - 00300BID FORM
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 00310NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITState OfCounty ofI state that I am(title) of(name of firm) and that I am authorized to make this affidavit on behalf of my firm, and its owners, directors, and officers. I amthe person responsible in my firm for the price(s) and the amount of this bid.I state that:(1) The price(s) and amount of this bid have been arrived at independently and without consultation, communication oragreement with any other contractor, bidder or potential bidder.(2) Neither the price(s) nor the amount of this bid, and neither the approximate price(s) nor approximate amount of thisbid, have been disclosed to any other firm or person who is a bidder or potential bidder, and they will not be disclosed before bidopening.(3) No attempt has been made or will be made to induce any firm or person to refrain from bidding on this contract, or tosubmit a bid higher than this bid, or to submit any intentionally high or noncompetitive bid or other form of complementary bid.(4) The bid of my firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or discussion with, or inducement from,and firm or person to submit a complementary or other noncompetitive bid.(5) (name of my firm), its affiliates, subsidiaries, officers, directorsand employees are not currently under investigation by any governmental agency and have not in the last four years beenconvicted or found liable for any act prohibited by State or Federal law in any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusionwith respect to bidding on any public contract, except as follows:I state that(name of firm) understands and acknowledges that the aboverepresentations are material and important, and will be relied on by(name of public entity) inawarding the contract(s) for which this bid is submitted. I understand and my firm understands that any misstatement in thisaffidavit is and shall be treated as fraudulent concealment from(name ofpublic entity) of the true facts relating to the submission of bids for this contract.(Name of Company Position)SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME THISDAY OF , 20 .(Notary Public)My Commission Expires .WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 00310NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 00320 - STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONSThe following questions are to be answered in a clear and comprehensive manner. If necessary, questions may be answered onseparate attached sheets. The Supplier may submit such additional information as the Supplier may desire.1. NAME OF SUPPLIER:2. OFFICE ADDRESS:3. HOW LONG HAS THIS COMPANY BEEN AT THIS ADDRESS?4. WHEN WAS THIS BUSINESS ORGANIZED?5. IF A CORPORATION, WHERE IS THE CORPORATION INCORPORATED?6. HOW LONG HAS THIS COMPANY BEEN INVOLVED IN THE SERVICE DESIRED IN SPECIFICATIONS?7. LIST ALL CURRENT CONTRACTS WHICH ARE CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS IN PENNSYLVANIA:8. HAS THE SUPPLIER EVER FAILED TO COMPLETE ANY CONTRACT WHICH WAS AWARDED TO THESUPPLIER? IF THIS IS ANSWERED IN THE AFFIRMATIVE, PLEASE GIVE FULL EXPLANATION:9. HAS THE SUPPLIER EVER DEFAULTED UPON ANY CONTRACT GIVEN TO THE SUPPLIER? IF THIS ISANSWERED IN THE AFFIRMATIVE, PLEASE EXPLAIN:STATEMENT OF BIDDER’ QUALIFICATIONSWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 – 00320STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPage 210. LIST THE NAMES AND PHONE NUMBER OF AT LEAST FIVE (5) REFERENCES FOR WHICH YOU HAVECOMPLETED WORK IN THE PAST FIVE (5) YEARS. REFERENCES ARE PREFERRED FROM THE DESIGNPROFESSINAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE AND OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE:1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/THIS STATEMENT IS DATED ON THE DAY OF , 20 .NAME OF BIDDER:BY:WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 – 00320STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 00700 -- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENTSUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONSINTRODUCTIONThe following supplements are additional general conditions of the contract and may modify, change, delete from or add tothe “General Conditions of the Contract for <strong>Construction</strong>”, AIA Document A 201 1997. Where any Article of the GeneralConditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, theunaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.The decimal numbering system is intended to coincide with like articles in the General Conditions to provide cross-referencethereto.Any discrepancies or contradictions between the General and Supplementary Conditions shall be brought to the attention ofthe Architect. See Paragraph 1.2.6 herein.Drawings, specifications, reports and addendums are available on the Watkins Architect FTP site, watkinsarchitect.com.<strong>Us</strong>er name will be provided at the first meeting.The Phase 1 report is available o the project FTP site. This report shall be part of the contract. You can rely on the report forbidding; however, all/ any asbestos abatement will be the responsibility of the GC and their selected abatement contractor.Any additional asbestos, if encountered, will be by change order through the GC. MEP contractors shall coordinate this workwith the GC.ARTICLE 1 - THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS1.1.1. In addition to the parts listed in paragraph 1.1.1 of the General Conditions, the Contract Documents shall include theAdvertisement and/or Invitation to Bid, Notice to Contractors, Form of Proposal, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond, andContract Documents.1.2.4. In case of disagreement, discrepancies, or contradiction between any parts of the Contract Documents or within anypart of the Contract Documents, only the Architect may interpret the intent and requirements of the documents and hisdecision shall be final and no additional cost will be allowed on this account if the matter is brought to the Architect'sattention after seven (7) days prior to the receipt of bids. If brought to the Architect's attention before seven (7) days prior tothe receipt of bids, the matter will be clarified by Bulletin or Addenda.1.2.5. The drawings and specifications, as a part of the Contract Documents, are for the purpose of illustrating and describingthe general character and extent of the work; and they are intended to agree and be mutually explanatory. Further, it is theintention that these instruments of the Contract shall be complete in their meaning, and shall represent completeness in designas well as any fragments thereof.It is the intent and purpose of these Specifications and the accompanying Drawings to cover and include each item ofmaterials, machinery, apparatus, equipment, labor and services necessary to properly install, equip, adjust and put into perfectoperation the respective portions of the installation specified, and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the workas to form a complete and operating whole, and deliver the work in the specified time. Any apparatus, machinery, material,equipment, labor and services not hereinafter specifically mentioned which may be bound necessary to complete or perfectany portion of the construction in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied or intendedin these specifications, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. This shall include all materials, devices or methodspeculiar to the type of construction furnished and installed by this Contractor.1.2.6. If the Contractor, in the course of the Work, finds any discrepancy between the plans and the physical conditions of thelocality or any errors, in plans or in the layout as given by the points and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform theArchitect in writing and the Architect, with reasonable promptness, shall verify the same. Any work done after suchdiscovery, until authorized, shall be done at the Contractor's risk.1.2.7. Drawings may show work fully drawn out or only portions thereof, the remainder being outline. The drawn outportion must be understood as applying to other like or similar places. Ornament, carving, materials, or other similar items,where indicated on drawings by starting only of the detail, shall be considered as being repeated or continued through theareas, courses or parts in which they apply.When a profile or other finished condition is shown on the drawings, furring or other approved methods of obtaining suchfinished surface shall be provided.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1.2.8 The mandatory walk-through is intended to give all contractors a visual understanding of the building type,conditions and work environment. All related work that is reasonably visible and able to be identified by visual inspectionshall be considered as part of the scope of the project. Contractors may re-visit the site by contacting the owner to ensurethey and all of their subs are familiar with the project prior to bidding.ARTICLE 2 - OWNER2.2.3. Add following: The Owner will furnish all land and right-of-way necessary for the carrying out of the Agreement andthe completion of the work therein contemplated.ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR3.2.1.1 All drawing dimensions and measurements shall be checked and verified by the Contractor at Site of the project. Heshall also, in all cases, check the drawings with existing conditions and with work in place.Variations, if any, shall be immediately reported to the Architect for adjustments as the Contractor shall be held responsiblefor the true fit of all work. No extras will be allowed for differences between actual measurements and dimension shown.3.2.2.1 Any RFI’s that are submitted where the information is provided on the contract drawings and specifications will benoted as such and the Contractor specifically agrees to pay $250.00 per request to the Architect. It is recommended theContractor call the Architect prior to making formal requests if there is any question; to avoid fees and related duplication ofpaperwork.3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES3.3.4. The General Contractor shall employ a competent Registered Civil Engineer to determine all building lines, grades andlevels, locate all footings, levels, etc., and to verify same from time to time during construction- He shall established andmaintain bench marks for the use of all trades within the building areas in permanent positions. This engineer shall certifyover his seal that the buildings located Properly in relation to the property lines. Each Contractor shall provide competentengineering services to lay out his own work according to lines, grades and levels established by the General Contractor.3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS3.4.2.1. After award of Contract only those materials may be used in construction that are specified or were approved byBulletin or alternate acceptance. Within the specified period, or if not specified, thirty (30) days of contract award theContractor shall submit a complete list of subcontractors and material for approval and within thirty (30) days of date of suchapproval shall place his order for same.3.4.2.2. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol or title of a specific standard, such as a CommercialStandard, a Federal Specification a trade association standard or other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements inthe latest revision thereof, and shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and amendment orsupplement thereto in effect on the date of Invitation for Bids, except as limited to type, class or grade, modified in suchreference. The standards referred to except as modified in the Specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printedin the Specifications.3.4.2.3. The specific mention of a manufacturer's name, brand of material, equipment, etc. shall be considered as indicating astandard of quality, grade or type desired. Materials of manufacturers other than those mentioned throughout thesespecifications may be accepted if they are equal in quality and performance to those specified and approval is given by theArchitect as outlined hereinafter.3.4.2.4 SUBSTITUTIONS3.4.2.4.1 The intent of this Specification is to encourage and permit competition on qualified products by all reputable andqualified contractors, suppliers and manufactures whose products, reputations and performances warrant approval for theconditions, intent or design and performance considerations.3.4.2.4.2. Whenever any product is specified or shown by describing proprietary items, model numbers, catalogue numbers,manufacturer, trade name or similar reference, the bidder obligates himself to submit proposals and accept award of contractbased on the use of such products. <strong>Us</strong>e of such reference is intended to establish the measure of quality which theArchitect/Engineer has determined as requisite and necessary for the Project. Where two or more products are shown orspecified, the bidder has his option of which to use, provided the product used meets all requirements or specification anddesign criteria. The right is reserved to approve or disapprove proposed deviations in design, function, construction or similardifferences that will affect the design intent.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER3.4.2.4.3. If any prospective bidder shall wish to substitute equipment or materials, which he believes to be equal to thosespecified, he shall make a request, in writing, to the Architect for approval of such substitute equipment or materials at leastseven (7) days prior to the date hereafter. If the Architect shall approve of such substitute equipment or materials, a bulletin oraddenda evidencing such approval will be promulgated by the Architect to all prospective bidders of whom the Architectshall have a record. Any requested substitution which affects any other Contractor shall be noted on the request.3.4.2.4.4 Any requests for substitution must be accompanied by Manufacturer's literature specifications r drawings, cuts,performance data, list of work completed In area of project, or other references or information necessary to completelydescribe the item. Substitution requests must have a detailed comparison to those items specified. Requests not meeting allthese requirements may be rejected without evaluation. If, in the opinion of the Architect, insufficient information and dataaccompanied the request, or for any other reason, the Architect may approve a manufacturer only as a source of supplyreserving evaluation of the product or material until after award of contract. If after further subsequent evaluation, theArchitect finds the substitute Product or material not equal to or exceeding the specifications, the Contractor shall not use thematerial or product and such action shall not be cause to change the contract price.3.4.4. The equipment or procedure used on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to adjacent property orhighways will result from its use. No work of any kind may be installed or stored in a manner which may endanger thestructure of the building.3.4.5 The Contractor shall furnish and erect all necessary hoisting equipment required to raise and lower materials required toperform his work. Hoists must be operated by qualified and experienced operators. All hoisting equipment, guard gates,shaftways, etc., shall conform with the applicable regulations of the Dept. of Labor and Industry of the Commonwealth ofPennsylvania. Temporary landing platforms, railings, ramps, guard gates, hoist shaftways, etc. shall be provided as requiredto construct the work in this Contract. All such temporary work shall be furnished and erected by the Contractor and shall beremoved by him when no longer needed.3.4.6 Any work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, on Sundays or Legal Holidays, who shall beperformed without additional expense to the Owner.3.9 SUPERINTENDENT3.9.2. The Architect may demand the dismissal of any person employed by the Contractor, in, about or upon the work, shallbe guilty of misconduct or who neglects or refused to comply with directions given, and such person shall not be employedagain thereon without the written consent of the Architect or Owner. Should the Contractor continue to employ or againemploy such person, the Owner may withhold all estimates which are or may be due, or may suspend the work until suchorders are complied with.3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES3.10.4 The GC shall prepare a Ghant chart schedule (Microsoft Project or similar) describing at a minimum all items in theapproved schedule of values and all permit inspections including rough and finish. The GC’s schedule shall include all MEPwork, so the GC shall coordinate the schedule with the MEP prime contractors. All prime contractors shall confirm orindicate any necessary modifications during the construction meetings. The GC shall provide an updated schedule for everyconstruction meeting.3.10.5 A representative from each prime contractor shall be present at every project meeting. The representative shall beauthorized to make critical decisions, including but not limited to scheduling changes for the project.3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES3.12.8.1. Under no circumstances shall the Architect's review of any shop drawing be construed as an approval of extra costto the Owner for any work shown thereon. Any claim for extra cost must be made as specified before or at the time ofsubmitting shop drawings.3.15 CLEAN UP3.15.3. The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material, including food items, soda cansand rubbish caused by his employees during the work operations of his Contract. Refuse and waste material shall be promptlyremoved by each Contractor as it forms in each area of work operations, and the material removed from the Site.3.15.4. In addition to general broom cleaning, the General Contractor shall provide the following special cleaning for alltrades before final inspection: Remove putty stains and paint from all glass and wash and polish same; clean and polish allfinish hardware, remove all spots, soil, paint drops from all exposed to view-in-place material surfaces; clean up and polish alltile, terrazzo and other finish floors; and clean up the building spaces and site of all debris and dirt as a final operation.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 3-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERVacuum cleaners shall be used to clean up interior spaces when conditions require this form of final cleaning, or the Architectcalls for its use.3.19 PROTECTION3.19.1. During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall provide lights, fences, and barriers, danger, warning and detoursigns and take such other precautions as may be necessary to protect life and property.3.19.2. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's property, all surroundings public and private properties, all his work in place,and all work of other Contractors in place against damage, injury or loss arising in connection with the work of his Contract.He shall make good any such damage, injury, or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the Contract Documentsor caused by agents or employees of the Owner.3.19.3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain proper protection at all times for all exposed floors, walls, ceilings, fittings,fixtures, pipe, glass, equipment and all other finished and/or unfinished parts of the structure or construction work that may besubject to damage or theft or injury of any kind during the progress of the work. Any items damaged or injured shall bereplaced or repaired by the Contractor at his own expense, and in a manner entirely satisfactory to the Architect. The workshall be protected by means of heavy oiled paper, canvas, wood or approved materials.3.19.4. It is intended that the General Contractor shall protect all trees, shrubs, and landscape work from damage by providingguards and coverings as herein specified. All areas that are damaged shall be repaired or replaced by the Prime Contractorwho caused the damage and his expense. Commonly disturbed areas such as construction drives, walkways, materials stagingareas, etc. shall be repaired by the General Contractor at his sole expense.3.19.5. The Contractor shall at all times provide substantial and adequate protection against all kinds of whatever so as tomaintain all work, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. At the end of each day’s work, all new work subject todamage shall be completely covered.3.19.6 The Contractor shall maintain and enforce regulations covering all fire hazards, including smoking, and he shallprovide approved fire extinguishes at proper locations. (In the case of separate contracts, this requirement shall be fulfilled bythe General Contractor).3.19.7 The Contractor shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights, watchmen and other facilities forprotection required by public authority or local conditions.3.19.8 After the building has been fully enclosed and permanent or temporary doors are installed, the Contractor shallsuitably lock the building to prevent access of unauthorized persons.3.19.9 All temporary shoring and bracing, sheet piling, etc. necessary for underpinning and for the installation of new workshall be included in this contract without further cost to the Owner, and must be done in accordance with good practice. TheContractor must assume all responsibility for this work and make good any damage caused by improper supports or failure ofshoring in any respect. He shall remove same at completion and be responsible for all damage.3.19.10 The Contractor shall furnish, at his own cost and expense, all scaffolding, trestles, ladders and platforms and all otherequipment that is required for the execution of the work under his contract.3.19.11 The Contractor must replace, to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner any damage resulting to curbs,sidewalks, roadways, lawns, drain pipes, etc., as a result of this building operation, even though they be outside the limits ofthis contract as shown on Drawings. Any existing facilities that have been marred or disturbed by the construction in any wayshall be restored to the condition existent prior to construction to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect.ARTICLE 4 – ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT4.5 Delete this section (Mediation) in its entirety4.6 Delete this section (Arbitration) in its entirety4.7 All unresolved disputes shall be settled by a court in Berks County.ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS5.3.2. In all cases, subcontractors shall take their own measurements at the Site and verify same with the Contractor and thedrawings as they shall be held responsible for the true fit of all their work.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 4-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERARTICLE 6 –CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTS6.1. OWNER'S RIGHT TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS6.1.4.1 Wherever work being done by other contractors or forces is continuous to work covered by the Agreement, therespective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Owner to secure the completion of the variousportions of the work in general harmony.ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK7.1.1.1 The Unit Prices submitted by a Contractor in his Proposal for this project are subject to approval and acceptance bythe Owner. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Unit Price which unreasonable or unbalanced, as compared withprevailing costs, or as compared with the Unit Prices submitted by other Bidders for this project, and the Owner reserves theright to ask for a revised Unit Price before or after the Contracts are signed.7.1.1.2 Approved Unit Prices, when accepted by the Architect and Owner shall be used where they apply to determine anequitable adjustment of the Contract Sum in connection with extra work or changes ordered under the Contract. ApprovedUnit Prices shall apply to both additions to and/or deductions from the Contract Sum.7.1.1.3 Unit Prices submitted by a Contractor in his Proposal for this project shall include all profit, overhead, insurance,taxes, labor, materials, plans, equipment and tools necessary and required to fully complete the work item, as specified indetail for the work item under the Project Specifications.ARTICLE 8 --TIME8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME8.3.4. No extension of the time of completion will be granted by the Owner if the act or occurrence constituting the basis ofthe request or claim therefore by the Contractor shall be the nondelivery of materials due to any act or neglect of theContractor, or the breakdown of equipment in use or intended to be used by the Contractor, or the failure of the Contractor toemploy, furnish or obtain, as necessary in the timely prosecution of work, sufficient labor, materials or equipment, or othermatters which shall be within the control of the Contractor. The Owner shall consider any delay which shall result because ofany of the foregoing causes to be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.8.3.5. No extension of the time of completion which shall be granted by the Owner shall be or shall be deemed to be a waiverby the Owner of any rights accruing to it under the General Conditions bound herewith; and no extension of the time ofcompletion which shall he granted by the Owner shall relieve or shall be deemed to relieve the Contractor from fullresponsibility for performance of his obligations under the contract.8.3.6 The Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor for any expenses, damages, loss of profits, (anticipated or otherwise) orcharges of any nature whatsoever which shall result because of any extension of the time of completion which shall begranted by the Owner to the Contractor or to any other Contractor employed by the Owner to perform any other branch ofwork, or which shall result because of any delay or hindrance of any nature whatsoever in the progress of the work, whethersuch delay or hindrance shall be avoidable or unavoidable.ARTICLE 9 –PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS9.3.1 Modify the original working "ten days" shall be changed to and be read as"fifteen days".9.3.4. All materials and work incorporated in the work covered by partial payments made shall thereupon become the soleproperty of the Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility forthe care and protection of materials and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work,or as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment as all the terms of the Contract. Materials delivered andstored are the responsibility of the Contractor, and he shall be solely responsible for their safekeeping and usability at thetime they are to be incorporated in the structure or Project, and shall, at his own expense care for and protect the same,employ watchmen, if he so desires, and take out insurance against theft, loss from other cause, damage, destruction and/orsuch other risks as may be involved which would render the aforesaid materials unfit or unsuitable for use in the Project.Materials shall not be delivered earlier than reasonably necessary for proper progress of the work unless prior approval isgranted by the Owner.9.3.5. Based on Application for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued bythe Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided in theWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 5-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERConditions of the Contract as follows: monthly, ninety percent of the proportion of the Contract Sum properly allocable tolabor, materials, and equipment incorporated in the work and Seventy five percent of the portion of the Contract sum properlyallocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the Site or at some other location agreed upon in writing by theparties, up to a selected day of the month as established by the Architect at the first job meeting, less the aggregate ofprevious payments in each case; and upon substantial Completion of the entire Work, a sum efficient to increase the totalpayments to ninety percent of the Contract Sum, less such retainage as the Architect shall determine for all incomplete workand unsettled claims.9.3.6. In making progress payments, there shall be retained 10% on estimated amounts until final payment and acceptance ofthe Work; provided however, that the Architect may at any time after 50% of the Work has been completed, if he finds thatsatisfactory progress is being made and with written consent of surety, recommend that any of the remaining partial paymentsbe made in full; provided, also, that the Contractor agrees to pay his Subcontractor under the same conditions. The fullcontract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the Work and its progress does not remain satisfactory tothe Architect, or if the Surety withholds his consent, or for other good and sufficient reasons.9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE9.9.1.1 The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order of time as may be stated in thespecifications or as the Owner may require. The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed orpartially completed portion of the work, notwithstanding the entire work or such portions may not have been completed, butsuch taking possession or payment made to the Contractor shall not be deemed an acceptance of the work so taken or usedor any part thereof.9.9.1.2 The Owner shall also have the right to occupy and erect or place any apparatus or equipment in any part of the projectwithout such installation being construed as an acceptance of any of the Contractors' workmanship or materials, or asaffecting any terms in the Contract for the Building.Prior, however, to the Owner taking possession, an inspection will be made by the Architect and Owner of the completedwork to determine if it is in conformity with the Contract, and any subsequent damage due to occupancy by the Owner willnot be the responsibility of the Contractor.ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10.2.2.4. Special attention is drawn to the regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Department of Labor andIndustry and the Federal Government, Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards, Safety and Health Regulations for<strong>Construction</strong>, safety and other regulations of which the Contractor shall be fully informed and with which he shall fullycomply.ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE11.1.1 In the first line following the word "maintain", insert the words "in a company or companies licensed to do business inthe state in which the Project is located."11.1.2.1. The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if requiredby law:1. a. Workman’s Compensation - Statutoryb. Employer’s Liability - $500,0002. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises-Operations, Independent Contractors' Protective,Products and Completed Operations, Broad Form Property Damage):a. Bodily Injury$1,000,000 each occurrence$2,000,000 annual aggregateb. Personal Injury$1,000,000 each occurrence$2,000,000 annual aggregatec. Property Damage$1,000,000 each occurrenceWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 6-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER$2,000,000 annual aggregated. Products and completed operations to be maintained for one year after final payment.3. Contractual Liabilitya. Bodily Injury$1,000,000 each occurrence$2,000,000 annual aggregateb. Property Damage$1,000,000 each occurrence$2,000,000 annual aggregate4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleteda. $2,000,000 annual aggregate5. Comprehensive Automobile Liabilitya. Bodily Injury$1,000,000 each person$2,000,000 each occurrenceb. Property Damage$500,000 each occurrence6. Additional Insureda. Berks County Intermediate Unitb. Watkins Architect, LTD11.1.2.2. Furnish three (3) copies of Certificates herein required; specifically setting forth evidence of all coverage required.The Form of the Certificate shall be approved by the Architect or Owner. Furnish copies of any endorsements that aresubsequently issued amending coverage or limits.11.1.4. All policies shall be issued by insurance companies authorized to conduct such business under the laws of theCommonwealth of PA, and by a company or companies approved by the Owner. Policies expiring at a fixed date before finalacceptance of the work must be renewed and refiled before such date.11.1.5. All insurance for this Project shall be carried by the Contractor to fully protect the Owner against all claims whichmay arise. No work shall be started until all requirements are satisfied, as specified.11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE11.4.7. Add the following sentence: In waiving rights of recovery under terms of this Subparagraph, the term "Owner" shallbe deemed to include his employees, and the Architect and his employees as the Owner's representative, as Provided in theContract Documents.ARTICLE 13 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS13.1 GOVERNING LAW13.1.2 The Contractor at all times shall observe and comply with all Federal and State Laws and local ordinances andregulations in any manner affecting the conduct of the work and all such orders or decrees as exist at present and those whichmay be enacted later by bodies or tribunals having jurisdiction or authority over the work and shall indemnify and saveharmless the Owner and all his officers, agents and servants against any claim or liability arising from or based on theviolation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, order or decree, whether by himself or his employees.ARTICLE 15 - LIENS AND AFFIDAVITS15.1 Upon request by the Owner, each Contractor shall sign a Waiver of Liens, Release of Liens, Contractor's Affidavit ofRelease of Liens, and/or Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, in the form prescribed by the Owner orArchitect.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 7-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER15.2 Waiver of Liens must be done before any work is started upon the grounds, structures, or utilities. Neither final paymentnor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor, if required, delivers to the Owner a completerelease of all liens. Individually signed forms of release will be acceptable arising out of this contract, or receipts in full inlieu thereof, and if required in either case, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information, the releases andreceipts include all labor and material for which a lien could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses tofurnish a release or receipt in full, furnish a Bond satisfactory to the Owner, to indemnify him against any lien. If any lienremains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may becompelled to pay in discharging such a lien, including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees.ARTICLE 16 - COLOR SAMPLES16.1 Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall submit samples of all available colors of all colored material tobe incorporated into the construction, to the Architect, so that a master color scheme can be set up immediately.ARTICLE 17 - WATERTIGHT BUILDING17.1 The General Contractor shall be held strictly responsible for a watertight building, and he in turn shall hold responsiblefor the same all his subcontractors. No final payment will be made while any parts of the building show a tendency to leakwater in any manner. The Architect reserves the right to ask for, at no extra cost, water hose tests on any parts of the structureto check the same for leaks.17.2 To this end, the General Contractor is instructed to study all details furnished him by the Architect, and if in his opinionhe feels that they would not permit the making of a watertight job, he shall so notify the Architect and have them adjustedbefore proceeding.ARTICLE 18 - CONTACTS BETWEEN METALS18.1 In any section of this specification where incompatible metals are placed in direct contact with each other they shall beseparated by a suitable tape, asphalt, impregnated fabric, or other approved or directed method to prevent electrolytic action.Where copper and ferrous metals come in contact, the copper shall be well tinned.ARTICLE 19 - EXPLOSIVES19.1 If and when the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall observe the utmostcare, so as not to endanger life or property. All explosives shall be stored in a secure and save manner, in strict conformitywith all State and Municipal regulations, and all such storage shall be marked clearly, "DANGEROUS-EXPLOSIVES" andshall be in the care of competent watchmen at all times.ARTICLE 21 - MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS21.1 The General and each Mechanical Contractor and Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, clear and completemanufacturer's instructions for properly operating, maintaining materials, equipment, appliances, etc., furnished under theirContracts, to insure proper use and normal life expectancy of same. This data shall be submitted in duplicate, printed or typedon 8-1/2" x 11" sheets, or manufacturer's printed specifications placed in plastic sleeves and adequately bound in printedspecifications. All specifications shall be adequately bound in sturdy binders.Materials considered shall include floor finishes, wood finishes, door finishes, metal finishes, wall finishes, etc, andmechanical equipment, appliances, apparatus and systems, wiring diagrams of All control systems, manufacturer's spare partslist, catalogue cuts of all equipment, copies of approved Shop Drawings and two sets of drawings showing all dimensions ofall underground work.21.2 Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Architect, the services of the manufacturer'srepresentatives shall be provided to instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation and maintenance of the materials,equipment, appliances, apparatus and systems of the various contracts.21.3 The Owner shall be furnished with three (3) printed copies of instructions for care and cleaning of equipment and thetype and use of any special lubricants, along with three (3) copies of manufacturer’s instructions. Copies shall contain wiringdiagrams, spare parts lists, operating and maintenance instructions.ARTICLE 22 - PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTED22.1 Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be insertedWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 8-00700- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERherein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise anysuch provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract shallforthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.ARTICLE 23 - MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS23.1 Mention of a product by specific name shall imply application of the manufacturer's specifications, except as morestringently specified. A copy of the manufacturer's specifications which apply shall be kept available at the Job Site. Thisshall extend to include association specifications named directly, in all cases where installation of work applies, where thespecifications covers material only it need not be made available.ARTICLE 24 - CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE24.1 Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, upon request, a signed Certificate from the Manufacturer or Producer that itemsspecified by A.S.T.M. or Federal Specification Numbers or Designations comply with said Specifications.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 9 - 00700SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 00800 – SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTSSTATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS:Each supplier shall submit with the Bid Proposal the Statement of Bidder's Qualifications on the form provided withthese specifications. In addition, each supplier may be asked to submit a detailed financial statement of its operations.The Berks County Intermediate Unit shall use the information submitted, information obtained from contracts ofprevious clients, as well as all other available information in determining the lowest responsible supplier to be awardedthis contract.DRAWINGS:If drawings are included with specifications, dimensions are approximate and indicate relative locations of the items tobe furnished or installed. The contractor shall verify all measurements on the premises. Work, materials and items tobe furnished or installed, called for in either the drawings or specifications, shall be included as though called for inboth. Shop drawings, when required, must be submitted within thirty (30) days after the award of contract. Allsubmissions of the shop drawings must consist of at least six sets and must be furnished at no cost to the Architect forreview.ENVIONMENTAL STUDY:Contractor Notification: Environmental reports are posted and hereby incorporated into the contract. All contractgorsshall become familiar with this report and comply with applicable law.STANDARD OF QUALITY:The various materials and products specified in the specifications by name or description are given to establish astandard of quality and of cost for bid purposes. It is not the intent to limit the bidder, the bid or the evaluation of thebid to any one material or product specified but rather to describe the minimum standard. When proprietary names areused, they shall be followed by the words “or alternatives of the quality necessary to meet the specifications”. A bidcontaining an alternative which does not meet the specifications may be declared non-responsive. A bid containing analternative may be accepted but, if an award is made to that bidder, the bidder will be required to replace anyalternatives which do not meet the specifications.The supplier shall state if a quality management system, similar to ISO 9000, is used by their organization to ensurethat the quality of manufactured goods, service, & deliver meets the quality requirements of Berks County IntermediateUnit. Quality performance may be used as selection criteria for choosing a qualified supplier.SAMPLES:Where no trade name or manufacturer's number is given, furnish a sample and illustrated description of materialproposed to be furnished. All samples must be plainly labeled to compare with items bid upon. Samples are suppliedby the bidder at his own expense and all material supplies to complete an order must conform with the acceptedsamples. The Architect may require the submission of samples either before or after the award of a contract, at nocharge to BCIU, in order to ascertain whether or not a product will be suitable for the purpose for which it is intended.If it is specifically stated elsewhere in the bid documents, that samples are required, full size samples must be submittednot later than the shop drawing review period. Failure to submit said samples may be regarded as a basis for rejectingthe work. Samples may be kept until satisfactory completion of the contract. Otherwise, all samples must be picked upby the bidder within thirty (30) days of the award of contracts or end of shop drawing review period or said sampleswill be presumed abandoned and the Architect and / or BCIU will dispose of them as seen fit.ACT 159 PENNSYLVANIA WORKER & COMMUNITY RIGHT TO KNOW LAWSuppliers of chemicals to Berks County Intermediate Unit must insure that the container of any chemical, which isdelivered, is clearly labeled with the chemical name or common name, a hazard warning and the name, address andtelephone number of the manufacturer of the substance. You shall prepare a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) foreach hazardous substance or hazardous mixture. This must be received from the manufacturer, importer, supplier, ordistributor with the shipment as required by Pennsylvania Right to Know Law.CONTRACTORS NOTIFICATION:WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 00800SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERThe Berks County Intermediate Unit requires that all Contractors notify them of all hazardous substances which will bestored or used on site, as well as the production of hazardous gases, dusts, etc. and shall submit Material Safety DataSheets of all products used.NO CASH ALLOWANCES:Cash allowances are not to be included in the bid specifications.TAXES:All prices quoted shall be exclusive of Pennsylvania Sales Tax and <strong>Us</strong>e Tax and Federal Excise Tax, from which theBerks County Intermediate Unit is exempt. Exemption certification, if required, will be furnished by BCIU at therequest of the bidder.CHANGE ORDERS:When, and if, field conditions necessitate changes, additions or deletions be made to the contract, the Architect willissue the necessary AIA change order in writing describing such changes and indicate the amount of any decrease orincrease in the contract price, if any.OWNERS COMPLIANCE IN RETAINING PAYMENTS:If the Berks County Intermediate Unit intends to retain a percentage of the payments to the contractors throughout theduration of the project, it should be clearly stated in the specifications. Retaining of payments must be done in accordwith 62 Pa.C.S.A. § 3921.TIME(S) OF COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT:Completion dates for projects must be stated in terms of actual date(s) or the number of calendar days after the noticeto proceed with the workSUB-CONTRACTS:The Supplier shall not assign, transfer or sublet this contract or any portion thereof (contracts for delivering materials,equipment and machinery to be excepted) without the express consent and approval of the Berks County IntermediateUnit, and further, the Supplier shall be responsible for the faithful performance of any work sublet. In the event work issublet, the supplier shall require subcontractors to comply with ACT 34 requirements, ACT 151 requirements, andACT 114 requirements and provide applicable reports to the Berks County Intermediate Unit prior to performingservices.CONTRACT DEFAULT:Should the Supplier at any time fail to perform the work or provide the supplies and/or equipment in accordance withthe specifications and to the satisfaction of the Berks County Intermediate Unit, the Berks County Intermediate Unit ishereby authorized to employ some other person, persons or company to complete the Contract and to charge the sameto the Supplier and for that purpose to retain any monies still due him upon his Contract, to meet such payments, andSupplier shall be liable for and shall pay any costs and expense incurred by the Berks County Intermediate Unit incompletion of the contract in excess of the monies that may still be due him for what Supplier has done or failed to do,so that the Berks County Intermediate Unit shall sustain no loss, cost, or expense beyond the Contract price by reasonsof such default of the Supplier.UNSATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE:If the Berks County Intermediate Unit terminates this contract for unsatisfactory performance of said contract, thetermination will become effective upon giving twenty-four (24) hours written notice to the Supplier. The notificationof contract termination shall include the violations of contract provisions and deficiencies as determined by the BerksCounty Intermediate Unit or its representatives.SUPPLIER DISQUALIFICATION:Supplier’s performances will be evaluated to assure compliance with specifications and bid conditions. Suppliersdeemed to be in non-conformance with the bid specifications or conditions shall be deemed not to be responsible andshall be disqualified from bidding for a period of one year. A second incident of non-performance within a five-yearperiod shall result in disqualification from bidding for a period of three years. Grounds for disqualification include, butWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 - 00800SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTS
are not limited to the following:BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1/ Failure to provide specified products.2/ Failure to meet reasonable delivery requirements.3/ Failure to adhere to general bid conditions.4/ Submission of bid prices higher than state contract bid prices (all things being equal) if supplier is a statecontract awardee for identical products and services specified.The right is reserved to levy lengthier suspensions from bidding to suppliers whose conduct is perceived to be unethicaland/or illegal.DELIVERIES:No deliveries shall be made directly to the project site unless approved by the Berks County Intermediate Unit. All/any freight and delivery charges shall be paid by the contractor. Berks County Intermediate Unit personnel are notrequired to assist in the deliveries and contractors are cautioned to notify their shippers that adequate assistance must beprovided at the point of delivery. If allowed by Berks County Intermediate Unit, deliveries are to be made between8:30 A.M. and 2:00 P.M. Monday through Friday, except on holidays. Machinery is to be delivered assembled.Machinery delivered knocked down must be assembled by bidder. All damaged items, or items which do not complywith specifications, will be accepted and title thereof will not vest to the Berks County Intermediate Unit until suchitems are accepted by the Berks County Intermediate Unit. The contractor must replace, without further cost to theBerks County Intermediate Unit, such damaged or non-complying items before payment will be made. If the contractorfails to make delivery within the specified time, or if the delivery is rejected, the Berks County Intermediate Unit mayobtain such items from other sources in the open market or on contract. Should the new price be greater than theoriginal bid price, the difference plus liquidated damages, if any, will be charged against the contractor.DAMAGES:The contractor will be held responsible for injury to any person and shall repair or replace to the satisfaction of theBerks County Intermediate Unit any or all damage done to a building or it's contents, as a result of negligence in thedelivery of any supplies, material, or equipment, or resulting from defective equipment, material, supplies, orworkmanship provided by such contractor.GUARANTEES:Unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications, furniture, equipment, and similar durable items shall be guaranteedby the contractor for a period of not less than one year from the date of acceptance by the Berks County IntermediateUnit. In addition, the manufacturer's guarantee shall be furnished. Any items provided under this contract, which areor become defective during the guarantee period shall be replaced by the contractor free of charge with the specificunderstanding that all replacements shall carry the same guarantee as the original equipment. The contractor shallmake any such replacement immediately on receiving notice from the Berks County Intermediate Unit.WARRANTIES:Contractor warrants that all material, service or construction delivered under this contract shall conform to therequirements of this contract, and shall be free from defects in material, workmanship, design and will be fit for theintended purposes. Mere acceptance of shipment of the material, service, or construction specified and any inspectionincidental thereto by the Berks County Intermediate Unit, shall not alter or affect the obligations of the contractor or therights of the Berks County Intermediate Unit under the foregoing warranties.INSTALLATION OR CONSTRUCTION:When the specifications require installation or construction, the contractor must furnish all tools, labor, transportation,and materials necessary for the completion of his contract including any new services required. Equipment must beinstalled in ready-to-use condition. The equipment and/or material described in these specifications must be deliveredto the Berks County Intermediate Unit and installed in their respective places as directed by the Berks CountyIntermediate Unit or specified representative, or as indicated on any attached drawings and/or approved shop drawing.LABELING:All packages, cartons or other containers must be clearly marked with the Berks County Intermediate Unit’s PurchaseWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 3 - 00800SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTS
Order number and supplier's name.BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERINSPECTION:All materials, service or construction are subject to final inspection and acceptance by the Berks County IntermediateUnit. Material, service or construction failing to conform to the specifications of this contract will be held at theContractor's risk and may be returned to the Contractor. If so returned, all costs are the responsibility of the Contractor.HOLD HARMLESS:The successful bidder agrees that the Berks County Intermediate Unit and Watkins Architect LTD will be indemnifiedagainst any loss, damage, or expenses of any kind that may occur during the processes of the contracted services.ACT 34 REQUIREMENTS: (CRIMINAL BACKGROUND CHECKS)All suppliers providing a service to the Berks County Intermediate Unit having unsupervised direct contact withchildren must comply with Act 34 of 1985. All criminal history background checks and appropriate forms must be onfile with the Berks County Intermediate Unit prior to performing such services. Direct contact shall be defined as thepossibility of care, supervision, guidance or control of children or routine interaction with children.ACT 151 REQUIREMENTS: (CHILD ABUSE BACKGROUND CHECKS)All suppliers providing a service to the Berks County Intermediate Unit having unsupervised direct contact withchildren must comply with ACT 151 of 1994. All background checks for employees must be on file with the BerksCounty Intermediate Unit prior to performing such services. Direct contact shall be defined as the possibility of care,supervision, guidance or control of children or routine interaction with children.ACT 114 REQUIREMENTS: (FBI FEDERAL CRIMINAL HISTORY RECORD)All suppliers providing a service to the Berks County Intermediate Unit having unsupervised direct contact withchildren must comply with ACT 114 of 2006. All FBI Federal criminal history records for employees must be on filewith the Berks County Intermediate Unit prior to performing such services. Direct contact shall be defined as thepossibility of care, supervision, guidance or control of children or routine interaction with children.USE OF U.S. STEEL & STEEL PRODUCTS:In accordance with Act No. 3 of the l978 General Assembly of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, approved March 3,1978, if any steel products are to be used or supplied in the performance of the contract, only steel products produced inthe United States as defined therein shall be used or supplied in the performance of the contract or any subcontractsthereunder.In accordance with Act 161 of 1982, cast iron products shall also be included and produced in the United States, Act141 of 1984 further defines “steel products” to include machinery and equipment. The act also provides clarificationsand penalties.HUMAN RELATIONS ACT:The provisions of the Pennsylvania Human Relations Act, Act 222 of October 27, 1955 (P.L. 744) (43 P.S., Section951, et seq.) of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania prohibit discrimination because of race, color, religious creed,ancestry, age, sex, national origin, handicap or disability, by employers, employment agencies, labor organizations,contractors and others. The contractor shall agree to comply with the provisions of this Act as amended that is madepart of this specification. Your attention is directed to the language of the Commonwealth’s non-discrimination clausein 16 PA. Code 49.101.RESIDENT WORKMEN:Laborers and mechanics employed shall have been residents of the Commonwealth for at least 90 days prior to theiremployment. Failure to keep and comply with this provision shall be sufficient legal reason to refuse payment of thecontract price to the contractor.COMPETENT WORKMEN:No workmen shall be regarded as competent first class, within the meaning of this Act, except those who are dulyskilled in their respective branches of labor, and who shall be paid not less than such rates of wages and for such hours'WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 4 - 00800SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERwork as shall be established and current rates of wages paid for such hours by employers of organized labor in doing ofsimilar work in the district where work is being done.PENNSYLVANIA PREVAILING WAGE RATES:Applicable for projects exceeding $25,000 this regulation and the general Pennsylvania prevailing minimum wagerates, (Act 442 of 1961, P.L. 987, amended), as determined by the Secretary of Labor and Industry, which shall be paidfor each craft or classification of all workers needed to perform the contract during the anticipated term therefor in thelocality in which public work is performed, are made part of this specification.DISCRIMINATION PROHIBITED:According to Section 62 Pa.C.S.A. § 3701, the contractor agrees that:1. In the hiring of employees for the performance of work under the contract or any subcontract, no contractor,subcontractor or any person acting on behalf of the contractor or subcontractor shall by reason of gender, race,creed or color discriminate against any citizen of this Commonwealth who is qualified and available toperform the work to which the employment relates.2. No contractor or subcontractor or any person on their behalf shall in any manner discriminate against orintimidate any employee hired for the performance of work under the contract on account of gender, race,creed or color.3. The contract may be canceled or terminated by the government agency, and all money due or to become dueunder the contract may be forfeited for a violation of the terms or conditions of that portion of the contract.4. That this contract may be canceled or terminated by the Berks County Intermediate Unit, and all money dueor to become due hereunder may be forfeited, for a second or any subsequent violation of the terms orconditions of this portion of the contract.END OF SECTION 00800WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 5 - 00800SPECIFIC OWNER REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARYBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY OF WORKA. Project Identification: As follows:1. Project: BCIU – Maintenance and Transportation Center61 Berkley RoadReading, PA 196052. Owner: Berks County Intermediate Unit1111 Commons BoulevardP.O. Box 16050Reading, PA 19612-6050B. Contract Documents, dated June 4, 2010 were prepared by Watkins Architect LTD, P.O. Box 412, Fleetwood,PA 19522.C. The Work consists of renovations to the existing 10,400 s.f. building including an interior 3,000 s.f. office/break area expansion and miscellaneous site work, as described in the Contract Documents.1.2 WORK RESTRICTIONSA. Contractor's <strong>Us</strong>e of Premises: During construction, Contractor shall have limited use of site and full useof the building. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or employother contractors on portions of Project.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)END OF SECTION 01100WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 01100SUMMARY
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 ALTERNATESA. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidder for certain work that may be added to or deducted from theBase Bid amount if Owner accepts the Alternate. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net additionto or deduction from Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments aremade to Contract Sum.B. Indicate on the Bid Form amounts to be deducted from or added to Contract Sum for the following alternates.(Note: G= General Contractor, M= HVAC Contractor, and P= Plumbing Contractor; E= ElectricalContractor):C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR1. Add Alternate #G1 – FENCE ON 3 SIDES AND GATES (GC to provide and install the fenceon 3 sides of the property with gates, boundary survey and all associated work shown on the drawings)2. Add Alternate #G2 – – FENCE ALONG ROUTE 61 (GC to provide and install the fence onone side of the property along route 61 and all associated work shown on the drawing. The costfor this alternate shall be based on alternate G1 being accepted so the boundary survey work shallnot be duplicated)3. Add Alternate #G3 – – BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM(GC to provide, prep and install thebus snow removal system as shown on drawing A-1. Also see specification section 13038)4. Add Alternate #G4 – – 1/8” THICK EPOXY FLOOR IN GARAGE (GC to prep and installthe 1/8” thick epoxy floor system in garage #110 and #116. Also see specification section 09671b)5. Add Alternate #G5 – – 1/4” Thick Epoxy Floor In Garage (GC to prep and install the 1/4”thick epoxy floor system in garage #110 and #116. This alternate will be in lieu of alternate G4.Also see specification section 09671c)6. Add Alternate #G6 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116 (GC to demo the existingand install the new insulated roof panel system and all related work as shown on the drawings)7. Add Alternate #G7 – – PREP AND PAINT GARAGE #116 (GC to prep, clean and install newepoxy paint on all walls, steel roof purlins, steel columns/beams, floor curbs and all attached misc.items in garage #116)8. Add Alternate #G8 – – STEEL STAIR TO MEZZANINE (GC to provide and install the newpainted steel stair and related columns / cane detection rails. The mezzanine and guardrail willremain in the base bid, and since the stair will not be in-place for the base bid, the GC shall includein the base bid a complete guardrail across the entire mezzanine and the 6’ gate in the basebid)9. Add Alternate #G9 – – PREP AND PAINT EXTERIOR STEEL FRAMING (GC to sand,patch clean, prime and paint exterior steel frames, including steel columns, beams, purlins, O.H.door jambs and bollards.)WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 01200PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER10. Add Alternate #G10 – – OVERHEAD DOOR UPGRADES (GC to provide 6 new vehicle exhaustports installed/cut into the existing doors, demo and install new overhead door #22, #25, and#29 including all related work for a complete and operational system. Replace weather strippingon all existing overhead doors to remain. No work on the overhead doors will be included in thebase bid.)D. HVAC CONTRACTOR1. Add Alternate #M1 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116 (MC to temporarilyremove and reinstall existing HVAC components, or install new if required, due to the demo/installationof the new insulated roof panel system in garage #116)2. Add Alternate #M2 – – NEW WASTE OIL HEATERS (MC to provide and install the newwaste oil heaters as shown / described on the mechanical drawings)E. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR1. Add Alternate #P1 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116 (PC to temporarily removeand reinstall existing plumbing components, or install new if required, due to the demo/installationof the new insulated roof panel system in garage #116)2. Add Alternate #P2 – – HOTSY SYSTEM UPGRADE (PC to provide demolition, new equipmentand all related work as shown on the plumbing drawings for the Hotsy upgrade)3. Add Alternate #P3 – – NEW WASTE OIL HEATERS (PC to provide piping for the new wasteoil heaters as shown / described on the plumbing drawings)4. Add Alternate #P4 – – NEW 270 GALLON OIL TANK, NEW WASTE OIL TANK ANDNEW OIL, GREASE AND AIR LINES (PC to provide new 270 gallon oil tank, new waste oiltank, new oil, grease and air lines and all related items as shown / described on the plumbingdrawings)5. Add Alternate #P5 – – PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW OIL INTERCEPTOR (PC to provideand install a new oil interceptor in the parking lot next to the existing interceptor)F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR1. Add Alternate # E1– – POWER FOR MOTORIZED FENCE GATE (EC to provide and installthe power and conduits for the one motorized fence gate and all associated work shown onthe drawings)2. Add Alternate #E2 – – BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM (EC to provide power for the bussnow removal system as shown on the electrical drawings. Also see specification section 13038)3. Add Alternate #E3 – – DEMO / NEW ROOF ABOVE GARAGE #116 (EC to temporarily removeand reinstall existing electrical components, or install new if required, due to the demo/installationof the new insulated roof panel system in garage #116)4. Add Alternate #E4 – – HOTSY SYSTEM UPGRADE (EC to provide demolition, new powerand all related work as shown on the electrical drawings for the Hotsy upgrade)5. Add Alternate #E5 – – NEW SITE LIGHTS (EC to provide and install new ‘K’ site lights, asshown / described on the electrical drawings.)WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 - 01200PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER6. Add Alternate #E6 – – REPLACE SITE LIGHTS AND WALL PACK LIGHTS (EC to demoand install new site lights as shown / described on the electrical drawings)7. Add Alternate #E7 – – REPLACE INTERIOR LIGHTS IN GARAGE #110 AND #116 (ECto demo and install new lights as shown / described on the electrical drawings)8. Add Alternate #E8 – – NEW WASTE OIL HEATERS (EC to provide power for the new wasteoil heaters as shown / described on the electrical drawings)9. Add Alternate #E9 – – NEW 270 GALLON OIL TANK, NEW WASTE OIL TANK ANDNEW OIL, GREASE AND AIR LINES (EC to provide power for the new 270 gallon oil tank,new waste oil tank, new oil, grease and air lines and all related items as shown / described on theelectrical drawings)10. Add Alternate #E10 – – NEW GENERATOR, CONCRETE PAD AND RELATED ITEMS(EC to provide and install the new generator, concrete pad and related items as shown / describedon the electrical drawings)1.2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURESA. On Owner's approval of a proposal from Contractor, Architect will issue a Change Order onAIA Document G701, for all changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time.B. When Owner and Contractor disagree on the terms of a proposal, Architect may issue a <strong>Construction</strong>Change Directive on AIA Document G714, instructing Contractor to proceed with the change. <strong>Construction</strong>Change Directive will contain a description of the change and designate the method to be followed todetermine changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time.1.3 PAYMENT PROCEDURESA. Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days before the first Application for Payment. In Schedule ofValues, break down Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section. Correlate theSchedule of Values with Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.B. Submit 3 copies of each application for payment on AIA Document G702/703, according to the scheduleestablished in Owner/Contractor Agreement.1. For the second Application for Payment through the Application for Payment submitted at SubstantialCompletion, submit partial releases of liens from each subcontractor or supplier for whomamounts were requisitioned in the previous Application for Payment.2. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with releaseof liens and supporting documentation. <strong>Inc</strong>lude consent of surety to final payment and insurancecertificates.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)END OF SECTION 01200WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 3 - 01200PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATIONA. Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks,before laying out the Work.B. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly execution of each part of the Work.C. Progress meetings will be held at Project site every other week. Notify Owner and Architect of meetingdates. Each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current progress or involved with planning orcoordination of future activities, shall attend.1. The Architect will prepare minutes of each meeting and distribute to parties present.1.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULEA. Prepare a horizontal bar-chart construction schedule. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and avertical line to identify the first workday of each week. <strong>Us</strong>e same breakdown of Work indicated in theSchedule of Values. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion.1. Submit within 5 days after date established for Commencement of the Work.2. Coordinate each element with other activities. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicatesequences necessary for completion of related Work.3. Indicate Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's procedures necessary for certifyingSubstantial Completion.4. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties requiredto comply with dates.5. Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been made.Distribute revised copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required to comply withdates. The schedule shall be updated for each meeting, with the current date highlighted. Submitcopies of the schedule to the Owner and Architect. The schedule will be attached to the meetingminutes by the architect.1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other submittals, andactivities that require sequential operations.1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in time topermit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work.2. Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than Contractor.3. Prepare submittals by placing a permanent cover sheet on each packet. A typical submittal sheetis attached to this specification, or is available from the Architect.B. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with work that does not require submittals.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 01300ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERC. Note: No submittals will be reviewed prior to the Contractors review and stamp certifying that thematerials comply with the specified requirements.D. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. <strong>Inc</strong>lude the following:1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements.2. Notation of coordination requirements.3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances, and furnishedspecialties and accessories.E. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Do not reproduce Contract Documentsor copy standard information. Submit blue- or black-line prints on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. <strong>Inc</strong>lude the following:1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale details,and other information, as appropriate for the Work.2. Identification of products and materials.3. Notation of coordination requirements.4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.F. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Where variationsare inherent in the material, submit sufficient <strong>unit</strong>s to show limits of the variations. <strong>Inc</strong>lude productname or name of the manufacturer. Samples will be used for selecting colors, and will not be returned.Color charts may be submitted for initial approval, however, sample materials with the colors selectedwill be required to be submitted.G. Architect will review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action taken, and return copies lessthose retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains Contractor's responsibility.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)END OF SECTION 01300WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 01300ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports. Quality-controlservices are further specified in other Sections of these Specifications and shall be performed by independenttesting agencies provided by Contractor or Owner, as specified.1. Unless otherwise indicated, quality-control services required by authorities having jurisdictionshall be provided by The Contractor.B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests.C. Retesting: Contractor shall pay for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactoryand indicate noncompliance with requirements.D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary servicesas requested. Notify agency in advance of operations requiring tests or inspections, to permit assignmentof personnel. Auxiliary services include the following:1. Access to the Work.2. <strong>Inc</strong>idental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests.3. Adequate quantities of materials that require testing, and assisting in taking samples.4. Facilities for storage and curing of test samples.5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment.E. Duties of Testing Agency: Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performingits duties. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests.1. Agency shall promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies observed inthe Work during performance of its services.2. Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approveor accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency shall not perform duties of Contractor.F. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to the following:1. Owner.2. Architect.3. Contractor.4. Structural engineer.5. Authorities having jurisdiction, when authorities so direct.G. Report Data: Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service shall include at least the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.2. Project title and testing agency's project number.3. Designation (number) and date of report.4. Dates and locations where samples were taken or inspections and field tests made.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 01400QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER5. Names of individuals taking the sample or making the inspection or test.6. Designation of the product and test method.7. Complete inspection or test data including an interpretation of test results.8. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.9. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with requirements.10. Recommendations on retesting or reinspection.11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.H. Testing Agency Qualifications: Engage inspection and testing agencies that are prequalified as complyingwith the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Quality Assurance Manual" and that specializein the types of inspections and tests to be performed.1. Each testing agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the statewhere Project is located.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)END OF SECTION 01400WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 01400QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding <strong>Construction</strong>, Alterations, and DemolitionOperations"; ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for <strong>Construction</strong> and Demolition";and NECA Electrical Design Library's "Temporary Electrical Facilities."1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporaryelectric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.B. At the earliest possible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary utility servicesto use of permanent utilities.C. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after SubstantialCompletion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIESA. Provide temporary utility services to existing facilities during interruptions of permanent utilities. Arrangefor and coordinate utility services with local utility companies.1. Contractor shall also pay use charges for temporary utilities.B. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of work, and for protection of existing and new constructionfrom adverse effects of low temperatures. <strong>Us</strong>e of gasoline-burning heaters and open-flame heaters is notpermitted.1. Temporary heat shall be paid by the applicable contractor.C. New HVAC equipment shall not be used for temporary heat unless specifically agreed to in wiring andwarranties shall not be affected due to the start-up of equipment. All/ any filters or other protectors ofequipment shall be maintained until the completion of the project.3.2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIESA. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for efficient prosecution ofthe Work.1. Temporary facilities located within the construction area or within 30 feet of building lines shallbe of noncombustible construction.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 01500TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER2. Contractor shall provide a site or cell phone during the entire period of construction.B. Provide temporary sanitary facilities. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location,and maintenance of facilities.C. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from exposure and inclementweather and for containment of heat.D. Install project identification and other sign in location approved by Owner to inform the public and personsseeking entrance to Project.1. Install one Project sign, 2 sided, 4’ x 8’ and cut for a unique appearance, with up to 8 companiesand logos, using up to 4 colors. The Contractor, following architects detail on Sheet A-10 shalldesign sign, and submit to architect for approval. No other project signage will be allowed on thesite.E. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site.1. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste containers.Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations.3.3 TEMPORARY CONTROLSA. Provide temporary fire protection until permanent systems supply fire-protection needs.1. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers.2. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers in fire-safe locations.3. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating <strong>unit</strong>s, and similar sources offire ignition.B. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction personnelfrom construction hazards.1. Enclose construction areas with fences with lockable entrance gates, to prevent unauthorized access.C. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction including, but notlimited to, erosion and sediment control, dust control, noise control, and pollution control.END OF SECTION 01500WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 01500TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term "product" includes the terms "material,""equipment," "system," and similar terms.B. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using means andmethods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding constructionspaces.2. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for handling,storing, protecting, and installing.3. Inspect products at time of delivery for compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensureitems are undamaged and properly protected.4. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction.5. Store products subject to damage on platforms or pallets, under cover in a weathertight enclosure,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity withinrange required.C. Product Substitutions: Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered. Substitutionsinclude products and methods of construction differing from that required by the Contract Documents andproposed by Contractor after award of Contract.1. Submit four copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be replaced andprovide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed substitution with applicable requirements.<strong>Inc</strong>lude a full comparison with the specified product, a list of changes to other Workrequired to accommodate the substitution, and any proposed changes in Contract Sum or ContractTime should the substitution be accepted.2. Submit requests for product substitution in time to permit processing of request and subsequentSubmittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. Do notsubmit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.3. Architect will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time ofinstallation.1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and componentsneeded for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.B. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademarks, except for required nameplates, on surfaces exposed toview in occupied spaces or on the exterior.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 01600PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
C. Select products as follows:BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item indicated. No substitutionswill be permitted.2. Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items indicated. Nosubstitutions will be permitted.3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal,"provide the named item or comply with provisions concerning "product substitutions" to obtainapproval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.4. Where a product is described with required characteristics, with or without naming a brand ortrademark, provide a product that complies with those characteristics and other Contract requirements.5. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products that comply andare recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the application.6. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards, is specified, select a product that complieswith the codes, regulations, or standards referenced.D. Unless otherwise indicated, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from manufacturer'sfull range of options.PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)END OF SECTION 01600WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 01600PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Record Drawings: Maintain three (3) sets of Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show installationthat varies from the Work originally shown.B. Record Specifications: Maintain three (3) copies of the Project Manual, including addenda, as RecordSpecifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specificationsand modifications.C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into three (3) three-ring binders, with pocket folders forfolded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. <strong>Inc</strong>lude the following:1. Emergency instructions.2. Spare parts list.3. Copies of warranties.4. Wiring diagrams.5. Shop Drawings and Product Data.6. Color selection name and number (in plastic sleeve).7. List of all subcontractors with phone number and address (in plastic sleeve).8. All meeting minutes and related correspondence.9. All applicable certificates of occupancy and approval documentation.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATIONA. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements including,but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, and plumb; substrates within installation tolerances; surfacesthat are smooth, clean, and free of deleterious substances; and application conditions within environmentallimits. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions, including, butnot limited to, filler and primer application.C. Where Drawings indicate dimensions of existing construction verify by field measurement. Where fabricatedproducts are to be fitted to other construction verify dimensions by field measurement before fabricatingand, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during installation.3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 01700EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERB. For patching, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.For exposed surfaces, provide or finish materials to visually match existing adjacent surfaces to thefullest extent possible.3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in place,accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If applicable, preparesurfaces for field finishing.B. Comply with NFPA 70 for installation of electrically operated equipment and electrical components andmaterials.3.4 FINAL CLEANINGA. Clean each surface or item as follows before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion:1. Remove labels that are not permanent.2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds. Replacechipped or broken glass.3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances.Leave concrete floors broom clean.4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and wax resilient flooring.5. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean plumbingfixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps.6. Clean the site. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to asmooth, even-textured surface.3.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete:1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications, maintenance manuals, warranties, and similar recordinformation.3. Deliver spare parts, extra materials, and similar items.4. Changeover locks and transmit keys to Owner.5. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation and maintenance personnel.6. Remove temporary facilities and controls.7. Complete final cleanup.8. Touch up, repair, and restore marred, exposed finishes.9. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction.10. Obtain certificate of occupancy.B. On receipt of a request for inspection, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfilledrequirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection oradvise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.C. Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires operation and maintenance to provide instruction toOwner's personnel. <strong>Inc</strong>lude a detailed review of the following:WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 01700EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Startup and shutdown.2. Emergency operations and safety procedures.3. Noise and vibration adjustments.4. Maintenance manuals.5. Spare parts, tools, and materials.6. Lubricants and fuels.7. Identification systems.8. Control sequences.9. Hazards.10. Warranties and bonds.D. Request inspection for certification of final acceptance, once the following are complete:1. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been completedor otherwise resolved for acceptance.2. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date ofSubstantial Completion.E. Architect will reinspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed.1. On completion of reinspection, Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If theWork is incomplete, Architect will advise Contractor of the Work that is incomplete or obligationsthat have not yet been fulfilled.END OF SECTION 01700WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 - 01700EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
REGULATIONSFORPENNSYLVANIAPREVAILING WAGE ACTCOMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIADEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRYBUREAU OF LABOR LAW COMPLIANCE1997 EDITIONR-5
Subchapter E. PREVAILING REGULATIONSSec.9.101. Purpose and scope.9.102. Definitions.9.103. Required provisions.9.104. Duty of the public body.9.105. Determination of classification and general prevailing minimum wage rates.9.106. Payment of general prevailing minimum wage rates.9.107. Petition for review of rates and hearing.9.108. Posting of wage rates.9.109. Records and inspection.9.110. Certification of rate of wage and payment by contractor or subcontractor.9.111. Remedies and penalties.9.112. Workmen's rights.AuthorityThe provisions of this Subchapter E issued under act of August 15, 1961 (P.L. 987) (43 P.S. § 165-14),unless otherwise noted.SourceThe provisions of this Subchapter E adopted May 23, 1975, 5 Pa.B. 1347, unless otherwise noted.Notes of DecisionsThe Secretary of Labor and Industry's definition of workers as "electricians" on a public works project,and therefore subjecting their employer to payment of the wages not paid in violation of the PennsylvaniaPrevailing Wage Act (43 P.S. §§ 165-1 — 165-17) would not be disturbed as the determination was neithererroneous nor inconsistent with the statute. Henkels & McCoy, <strong>Inc</strong>. v. Department of Labor and Industry,598 A.2d 1065 (Pa. Cmwlth. 1991).§ 9.101. Purpose and scope.(a) Every contract to which the Commonwealth, its political subdivisions, an authority created bythe General Assembly of the Commonwealth including authorities created under the Municipality AuthoritiesAct of 1945 (53 P. S. §§ 301–401) and instrumentalities or agencies of the Commonwealth is a party,for construction, reconstruction, demolition, alteration or repair work other than maintenance work wherethe estimated cost of the total project is in excess of $25,000, which requires or involves the employment bya contractor or subcontractor of laborers, mechanics, skilled and semi-skilled laborers and apprentices inthe performance of services directly upon the public work project shall include in its specifications a provisionstating the general prevailing minimum wage rates as determined by the Secretary which shall be paidfor each craft or classification of workmen needed to perform the contract during the anticipated termthereof in the locality in which the public work is performed.(b) Every person paid by a contractor or a subcontractor in any manner for his labor in the construction,reconstruction, demolition, alteration or repair work other than maintenance work done under contractand paid for in whole or in part out of the funds of a public body except work performed under a rehabilitationprogram or manpower training programs is "employed" and "receiving wages."(c) These regulations do not apply to a public works contracts subject to the Walsh-Healey Act (41U.S.C.A. §§ 35–45) or section 1 of the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C.A. § 276(a)).- 1 -
(d) Work performed under a rehabilitation program arranged by and at a State institution primarilyfor teaching and up-grading the skills and employment opport<strong>unit</strong>ies of the inmates of the institution is notto be considered public work performed by a public body as defined in the act and this Subchapter.Notes of DecisionsThe court declared the Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act (Act) (43 P. S. §§ 165-1–165-17) and itsaccompanying regulations invalid and unenforceable because they were preempted by ERISA where theAct related to ERISA plans regarding fringe benefits. Keystone Chapter, Assoc. Builders and Contractors,Ind. v. Foley, 837 F.Supp. 654 (M. D. PA. 1993).§ 9.102. Definitions.The following words and terms, when used in this subchapter, have the following meanings, unless thecontext clearly indicates otherwise:Act–The Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act (43 P. S. §§ 165-1–165-17).Apprentice–A person employed and working under a bona fide apprenticeship program, directlyrelated to the particular craft involved in the construction industry and registered with an approved bythe Pennsylvania Apprenticeship and Training Council and whose training and employment are in fullcompliance with the provisions of The Apprenticeship and Training Act (43 P. S. §§ 90.1–90.10),approved July 14, 1961.Authorized deduction–Those deductions which are authorized by the Wage Payment and CollectionLaw (43 P. S. §§ 260.1–260.45), approved July 14, 1961 and the Regulations of the Department ofLabor and Industry issued pursuant thereto.Bona fide collective bargaining agreement–The agreement negotiated between the historicallyestablished and recognized bargaining representatives for the employers and of the workmen for theparticular crafts or classifications involved providing for applicable wage rates, hours of work, workingconditions and contributions for employe benefits as defined in "contributions for employe benefits"in this section.Classification–Specific categories of jobs which are performed within a "craft" as defined in thissection. The term includes those specific categories of jobs which are performed by a "workman," asdefined in section 2(7) of the act (43 P. S. § 165-2(17)) and this section, and "apprentice," as defined inthis section.Contributions for employe benefits–"Fringe benefits" paid or to be paid, including payment madewhether directly or indirectly, to the workmen for sick, disability, death, other than Workmen’s Compensation,medical, surgical, hospital, vacation, travel expense, retirement and pension benefits.Craft–Special skills and trades which are recognized as such by custom and usage in the buildingand construction industry.Department–The Department of Labor and Industry of the Commonwealth.General prevailing minimum wage rates, prevailing wage rates, minimum wage rates and wagerates–Rates as determined by the Secretary, as payable in the locality in which the public work is to beperformed, for the respective crafts and classifications, including the amount of contributions for employebenefits as required by the act.Locality–A political subdivision, or combination of the same, within the <strong>county</strong> in which thepublic work is to be performed. When no workmen for which a prevailing minimum wage is to bedetermined hereunder are employed in the locality, the locality may be extended to include adjoining- 2 -
political subdivisions where the workmen are employed in those crafts or trades for which there are noworkmen employed in the locality as otherwise herein defined.Maintenance work–The repair of existing facilities when the size, type or extent of the facilitiesis not thereby changed or increased.Public body–The Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, its political subdivisions, authorities createdby the General Assembly of the Commonwealth and instrumentalities or agencies of the Commonwealth.Public work–<strong>Construction</strong>, reconstruction, demolition, alteration or repair work other than maintenancework, done under contract and paid for in whole or in part out of the funds of a public bodywhere the estimated cost of the total project is in excess of $25,000. The term does not include workperformed under a rehabilitation or manpower training program.Secretary–The Secretary of Labor and Industry or his authorized deputy or representative.Workman–<strong>Inc</strong>ludes laborer, mechanic, skilled and semiskilled laborer and apprentices employedby a contractor or subcontractor and engaged in the performance of services directly upon the publicwork project, regardless of whether their work becomes a component part thereof. The term does notinclude material suppliers or their employes who do not perform services at the job site.PreemptionNotes of DecisionsThe union fund correctly argued that its suit under the Public Works Contractors’ Bond Law (8 P. S.§ 191 et seq.) was not preempted by Employee Retirement and <strong>Inc</strong>ome Security Act (ERISA), 29 U.S.C.A.§ 1001 et seq., because the Bond Law made no reference to ERISA plans and was not related to employeebenefit plans or the enforcement of those plans. Thus, the Union Fund’s cause of action against the bondinsuring company can survive the company’s motion for summary judgment. Carpenters v. National UnionFire Insurance of Pittsburgh, 686 A.2d 1373 (Pa. Cmwlth. 1996).Cross ReferencesThis section cited in 34 Pa. Code § 9.105 (relating to determination of classification and general prevailingminimum wage rates).§ 9.103. Required provisions.The specifications for every contract for a public work as defined herein shall contain at least thefollowing conditions, provisions and requirements:(1) The general prevailing minimum wage rates including contributions for employe benefitsas determined by the Secretary which shall be paid to the workmen employed in the performance of thecontract. The contract shall specifically provide that the contractor shall pay at least the wage rates asdetermined in the decision of the Secretary of Labor and Industry and shall comply with the conditionsof the act approved August 15, 1961, and the regulations issued thereto, to assure the full and properpayment of the rates.(2) The contract shall contain the stipulation that workmen shall be paid at least the generalprevailing minimum wage rates and other provisions to assure payment thereof as set forth in thissection.(3) The contract provisions apply to work performed on the contract by the contractor and towork performed on the contract by subcontractors.- 3 -
(4) The contractor shall insert in each of his subcontracts the stipulations contained in theserequired provisions and other stipulations as may be required.(5) The contract shall provide that no workmen may be employed on the public work except inaccordance with the classifications in the decision of the Secretary. If additional or different classificationsare necessary the procedure in § 9.107 (relating to petition for review of rates and hearings) shallbe followed.(6) The contract shall provide that workmen employed or working on the public work shall bepaid unconditionally, regardless of whether a contractual relationship exists or the nature of a contractualrelationship which may be alleged to exist between a contractor, subcontractor and workmen, atleast once a week, without deduction or rebate, on any account, either directly or indirectly exceptauthorized deductions, the full amounts due at the time of payment, computed at the rates applicable tothe time worked in the appropriate classification. Nothing in the contract, the act or this title prohibitsthe payment of more than the general prevailing minimum wage rates as determined by the Secretary toa workman on public work.(7) The contract shall provide that the contractor and each subcontractor shall post for theentire period of construction the wage determination decisions of the Secretary, including the effectivedate of changes thereof, in a prominent and easily accessible place or places at the site of the work andat the places used by them to pay workmen their wages. The posted notice of wage rates shall containthe following information:(i)(ii)The name of project.The name of the public body for which it is being constructed.(iii) The crafts and classifications of workmen listed in the Secretary’s general prevailingminimum wage rate determination for the particular project.(iv) The general prevailing minimum wage rates determined for each craft and classificationand the effective date of changes.(v) A statement advising workmen that if they have been paid less than the generalprevailing minimum wage rate for their job classification or that the contractor or subcontractorare not complying with the act or this title, they may file a protest in writing with the Secretarywithin 3 months of the date of the occurrence, objecting to the payment to a contractor to theextent of the amount due or to become due to them as wages for work performed on the publicwork project. A workmen paid less than the rate specified in the contract shall have a civil right ofaction for the difference between the wage paid and the wages stipulated in the contract, which rightof action shall be exercised within 6 months from the occurrence of the event creating the right.(8) The contract shall provide that the contractor and subcontractors shall keep an accuraterecord showing the name, craft or classification, number of hours worked per day and the actual hourlyrate of wage paid, including employe benefits, to each workman employed by him in connection withthe public work. The record shall include deductions from each workman. The record shall be preservedfor 2 years from the date of payment and shall be open at reasonable hours to the inspection ofthe public body awarding the contract and to the Secretary or his authorized representatives.(9) The contract shall provide that apprentices shall be limited to numbers in accordance witha bona fide apprenticeship program registered with and approved by The Pennsylvania Apprenticeshipand Training Council and only apprentices whose training and employment are in full compliance withThe Apprenticeship and Training Act (43 P. S. §§ 90.1–90.10), approved July 14, 1961, and the regulationsissued thereto shall be employed on the public work project. A workman using the tools of a craftwho does not qualify as an apprentice within this subsection shall be paid the rate predetermined forjourneymen in that particular craft or classification.- 4 -
(10) Wages shall be paid without deductions except authorized deductions. Employers not partiesto a contract requiring contributions for employe benefits which the Secretary has determined to beincluded in the general prevailing minimum wage rate shall pay the monetary equivalent thereof directlyto the workmen.(11) Payment of compensation to workmen for work performed on public work on a lump sumbasis, or a piece work system, or a price certain for the completion of a certain amount of work, or theproduction of a certain result shall be deemed a violation of the act and this subchapter, regardless ofthe average hourly earnings resulting therefrom.(12) The contract shall also provide that each contractor and each subcontractor shall file astatement each week and a final statement at the conclusion of the work on the contract with the contractingagency, under oath, and in form satisfactory to the Secretary, certifying that workmen havebeen paid wages in strict conformity with the provisions of the contract as prescribed by this section orif wages remain unpaid to set forth the amount of wages due and owing to each workman respectively.(13) The provisions of the act and this subchapter shall be incorporated by reference in thecontract.Cross ReferencesThis section cited in 34 Pa. Code § 9.108 (relating to posting of wage rates); and 34 Pa. Code § 9.110(relating to certification of rate of wage and payment by contractor or subcontractor).§ 9.104. Duty of the public body.(a) It is the duty of the public body awarding a contract for public work to request the Secretary fordetermination of the general prevailing minimum wage rates to be paid workmen on the public work project.The request shall be made on forms issued for the purpose by the Department. A new request for predeterminationshall be made if the contract is not awarded within 120 days from the determination date.(b) It is the duty of the public body to enforce the posting of wage rate determinations in accordancewith the provisions of section 9 of the act (43 P. S. § 165-9) and § 9.108 (relating to posting of wage rates).The fiscal officer of the public body, the treasurer or other officer of the public body, charged with thecustody and disbursement of the funds of the public body, shall ascertain that the wage rates as determinedby the Secretary are paid and that the job classifications are maintained, otherwise it is his duty to hold upfinal payment and to inform the Secretary of the failure by the contractor or a subcontractor to comply withthe act.Time LimitationsNotes of DecisionsAlthough the borough awarded the company the contract more than 120 days after the determination of theprevailing minimum wage and although the borough never made a new request for a predetermination, thecompany waived its right to protest the predetermination by failing to adhere to the 120 day time period.Linde Enter., <strong>Inc</strong>. v. Prevailing Wage Appeals Board, 676 A.2d 310 (Pa. Cmwlth. 1996).§ 9.105. Determination of classification and general prevailing minimum wage rates.(a) For the purpose of making a determination of the general prevailing minimum wage rates in thelocality in which the public work is to be performed for each craft or classification during the anticipatedterm of the contract, the Secretary may ascertain and consider the wage rates and employe benefits establishedby collective bargaining agreements.(b)If a bona fide collective bargaining agreement has expired by the terms thereof, the Secretary- 5 -
may ascertain and consider the wage rates and employe benefits established thereby until a new bona fidecollective bargaining agreement, as defined in § 9.102 (relating to definitions), has been executed.(c)The Secretary may also consider the following:(1) Information obtained from Federal agencies charged with the administration of labor standardsprovisions of Federal acts applicable to contracts covering contractors and subcontractors onpublic building and public work and on building and work financed in whole or in part by loans andgrants of the United States, within the locality.(2) The number of skilled, competent and experienced workmen within the locality who aregenerally available for employment on public work.(3) Statements signed and certified by contractors and subcontractors and union representativesshowing wage rates paid on projects, within the locality. These statements to be relevant to a wagedetermination shall indicate the names and addresses of the contractors, including the subcontractors,the locations, approximate cost, dates of construction and type of projects, the number of workmenemployed and the number of man hours worked in each craft or classification on each project and therespective wage rates paid the workmen, which wage rates shall consist only of rates paid for servicesperformed solely within the classification for which it is submitted.(4) Other information pertinent to the determination of prevailing minimum wage rates.(d) The Secretary will conduct a continuing program for obtaining and compiling of wage rate informationand shall encourage the voluntary submission of wage rate data by contractors, contractors’ associations,labor organizations, public officials and other interested parties, reflecting wage rates paid toworkmen in the various types of construction in the locality. Rates shall be determined for varying types ofprojects within the entire range of work performed by the building and construction industry. Informationsubmitted shall reflect not only the specified wage rate or rates paid to a particular craft in the locality butalso the type or types of construction on which the wage rate or rates have been paid. If the Secretary deemsthat the data at hand is insufficient to make a determination with respect to the crafts or classificationsnecessary to perform the proposed public work, he may have a field survey conducted by his staff representativefor the purpose of obtaining additional information upon which to make a determination of the wagerates, and also the customs, usages and practices as to the type of work to which the wage rates apply andthe size of available force of qualified workmen within the locality in which the public work is to beperformed.Notes of DecisionsGranting authority to the Secretary to consider fringe benefits determined by collective bargainingwhen he is making prevailing wage determinations is not an unconstitutional denial of equal protection tononunion contractors and employes, since he is not required to make his determination solely on the basisof rates in collective bargaining. Keystone Chapter of Associated Builders and Contractors, <strong>Inc</strong>. v. Departmentof Labor and Industry, 414 A.2d 1129 (Pa. Cmwlth. 1980).If the parties introduce exhibits which in some way do not comply with the standards of 34 Pa. Code §9.105(c)(3), the Secretary may give more weight to evidence which includes fringe benefits and projects ofevery nature and which clearly demonstrates prevailing wage rates for the year in question rather to evidencewhich does not include fringe benefits, excludes public works projects and some major private projects,and lumps together wage rates from previous years to establish current wage rates. Keystone Chapter ofAssociated Builders and Contractors, <strong>Inc</strong>. v. Department of Labor and Industry, 414 A.2d 1129 (Pa. Cmwlth.1980).§ 9.106. Payment of general prevailing minimum wage rates.(a)Not less than the general prevailing minimum wage rates determined by the Secretary under the- 6 -
act and this subchapter may be paid unconditionally, by contractors and subcontractors to workmen in theirrespective crafts and classifications on public work and the workmen can not be required to refund, directlyor indirectly, part of the wages. It is no defense that workmen accepted or agreed to accept less than therequired rate of wages or voluntarily made refunds, in any form or manner.(b) Wages shall be paid without deductions except authorized deductions. Employers not parties to acontract requiring contributions for employe benefits which the Secretary has determined to be included inthe general prevailing minimum wage rate shall pay the monetary equivalent thereof directly to the workmen.(c) Payment of compensation to workmen for work performed on public work on a lump sum basisor a piece work system or a price certain for the completion of certain amount of work or the production ofa certain result shall be deemed a violation of the act and this subchapter, regardless of the average hourlyearnings resulting therefrom.§ 9.107. Petition for review of rates and hearings.(a) A prospective bidder or his representative, a representative of a group of employers engaged inthe particular type of construction, reconstruction, demolition, alteration or repair work, a representative ofa craft or classification of workmen or the public body affected by the determination made by the Secretary,may on verified petition request a review of this determination in accordance with the procedures requiredby section 8 of the act (43 P. S. § 165-8).(b) The Secretary will, after notice and hearing as prescribed by section 8 of the act, make a finaldetermination of the general prevailing minimum wage rates to be paid to workmen on the public workproject. The public body when notified by the Secretary that a verified petition has been filed shall extendthe closing date for the submission of bids until 5 days after the Secretary’s final determination. Within 10days after hearing the Secretary will make a determination and transmit it in writing to the public body andto the interested parties. This determination shall be final unless within 10 days an appeal is filed with theAppeals Board.(c) If, after a contract has been awarded, it is deemed advisable by the public body because ofunforeseen construction development to list an additional classification and wage rate therefor the publicbody shall request, in writing, a determination thereof by the Secretary. A copy of this request shall begiven to interested parties and shall also be posted at an appropriate place at the site of the public workproject. The Secretary will thereupon give consideration to the request and if he determines that the additionalclassification requested is necessary, he will determine the classification and wage rate therefor andnotify the interested parties of his determination, which shall be effective as of the date on which it is made.Additional classifications shall be made in conformity with this procedure.Cross ReferencesThis section cited in 34 Pa. Code § 9.103 (relating to required provisions).§ 9.108. Posting of wage rates.The contractors and subcontractors on the public work project shall post a notice or notices in themanner and form prescribed by § 9.103 (relating to required provisions). This notice is to be clearly legibleand placed in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site of the public work project and at placesused by them to pay workmen their wages.Cross ReferencesThis section cited in 34 Pa. Code § 9.104 (relating to duty of the public body).§ 9.109. Records and inspection.The accurate record of employment and wage payments required to be kept and preserved by contrac-- 7 -
tors and subcontractors on public work shall include at least the following information:(1) The name, address and social security number of each workman.(2) The craft, if applicable, the classification within each craft, and any other classificationincluding apprenticeship, at which the workman worked. These records shall show the number of hoursin each day, specified by actual calendar date, during which each workman worked and if he worked inmore than one craft or classification for which different rates were payable the records shall show thenumber of hours in each day as aforesaid in which he worked at the different crafts or classifications.Time cards of employes shall be kept and preserved as records required by the act and this subchapter.In addition, the original signed indentures for each apprentice and the approvals of the PennsylvaniaApprenticeship and Training Council shall be kept. The records shall be preserved for 2 years from dateof payment and shall be open at all reasonable hours for inspection by the public body awarding thecontract and by the Secretary, and shall be made easily accessible within this Commonwealth within aperiod of 7 days from the date on which the Secretary requests in writing that these records be made soavailable.§ 9.110. Certification of rate of wage and payment by contractor or subcontractor.(a) It is the duty of the treasurer or other officer charged with the custody and disbursement of publicfunds applicable to the public work contract under and pursuant to which payment is made, to require thecontractor and subcontractor to file a statement each week and a final statement at the conclusion of thework on the contract with the contracting agency under oath in form satisfactory to the Secretary certifyingthat workmen have been paid wages in strict conformity with the contract as prescribed by § 9.103(7)(relating to required provisions) or if wages remain unpaid to set forth the amount of wages due and owingto each workman respectively.(b) It is the duty of the treasurer or other officer charged with the custody and disbursement of publicfunds to withhold the amount of wages unpaid or not paid in accordance with § 9.103 for the benefit of theworkman whose wages have not been paid by the contractor and he may pay directly to a workman theamount shown to be due him. Each contractor and subcontractor shall also certify that he is not receiving orrequiring, or will not receive or require, directly or indirectly, from a workman a refund of the minimumwage.(c) A contractor or subcontractor who shall, under oath, verify the statements required to be filedunder section 10 of the act (43 P. S. § 165-10) which are known to him to be false, shall be guilty of amisdemeanor, and shall, upon conviction, be sentenced to pay a fine of not exceeding $2,500 or to undergoimprisonment not exceeding 5 years, or both.§ 9.111. Remedies and penalties.(a) It is the duty of the Secretary where a timely protest has been filed by a workman that he has beenpaid less than the general prevailing minimum wage rate, to investigate the matter and determine whetheror not there has been a failure to pay the general prevailing minimum wage rate and whether this failure wasintentional or otherwise. The Secretary will hold appropriate hearings upon due notice to interested partiesincluding the workman, the employer and their respective representatives, if any. If the Secretary, afterhearing, has determined that the failure to pay the general prevailing minimum wage rate was not intentionalhe shall afford the person or firm a reasonable opport<strong>unit</strong>y to adjust the matter by making payment tothe workmen or providing adequate security to insure payment. If the Secretary determines that the failureto pay the general prevailing minimum wage rates intentional, he will thereupon notify the public bodies ofthe names of the persons or firms and no contract may be awarded to the person or firms or to a firm,corporation or partnership in which the person or firms have an interest until 3 years have elapsed from thedate of the notice to the public bodies. The Secretary may, in addition thereto, request the Attorney Generalto proceed to recover the penalties for the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania which are payable under section11(f) of the act (43 P. S. 16511(f).- 8 -
(b)The following constitutes substantial evidence of intentional failure to pay prevailing wage rates:(1) Acts of omission or commission done willfully or with a knowing disregard of the rights ofworkmen resulting in the payment of less than prevailing wage rates.(2) If the Secretary has made a finding that a person or firm has failed to pay the generalprevailing minimum wage rate as determined by the Secretary in accordance with the act, and thereaftera person or firm continues to fail to pay the prevailing wages or a person or firm fails to comply withan opport<strong>unit</strong>y to adjust differences which shall be afforded him by the Secretary.(c) If the Secretary has determined that a person or firm has failed to pay the prevailing wages undersection 11(e) and (f) of the act (43 P. S. § 165(e) and 165(f)), he may direct the public body to terminate, andthe public body may terminate, the contractor’s right to proceed with the public work.Statute of LimitationsNotes of DecisionsThere is no language in this regulation which provides for a statute of limitations applicable to theDepartment of Labor and Industry’s initiation of enforcement actions for underpayment of workers. LindeEnter., <strong>Inc</strong>. v. Prevailing Wage Appeals Board, 676 A.2d 310 (Pa. Cmwlth. 1996).§ 9.112. Workmen’s rights.(a) A workman who has been paid less than the general prevailing minimum wage rate for his jobclassification as specified in the contract or who has not been paid, may file a protest, in writing with theSecretary within 3 months of the date of the occurrence, objecting to the payment to a contractor to theextent of the amount due or to become due to him as wages for work performed on the public work project.If the formal protest is filed with the Secretary, it is the duty of the Secretary to direct the fiscal or financialofficer of the public body or the person charged with the custody of the disbursement of the funds of thepublic body, to deduct the money so due and owing from the whole amount or of any payment due thecontractor.(b) Any workmen paid less than the rates specified in the contract shall have a right of action for thedifference between the wage paid and the wages stipulated in the contract, which right of action must beexercised within 6 months from the occurrence of the event creating the right.Statute of LimitationsNotes of DecisionsThere is no language in this regulation which provides for a statute of limitations applicable to theDepartment of Labor and Industry’s initiation of enforcement actions for underpayment of workers. LindeEnter., <strong>Inc</strong>. v. Prevailing Wage Appeals Board, 676 A.2d 310 (Pa. Cmwlth. 1996).- 9 -
"PENNSYLVANIA PREVAILING WAGE ACT"Act of 1961, P.L. 987, No. 442
"PENNSYLVANIA PREVAILING WAGE ACT"Act of 1961, P.L. 987, No. 442AN ACTRelating to public works contracts; providing for prevailing wage; imposing duties upon the Secretaryof Labor and Industry; providing remedies, penalties and repealing existing laws.The General Assembly of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania hereby enacts as follows:Section 1.Short Title.This act shall be known and may be cited as the "Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act."Section 2.Definitions.As used in this act —(1) "Department" means Department of Labor and Industry of the Commonwealth ofPennsylvania.(2) "Locality" means any political subdivision, or combination of the same, within the <strong>county</strong>in which the public work is to be performed. When no workmen for which a prevailing minimumwage is to be determined hereunder are employed in the locality, the locality may be extended toinclude adjoining political subdivisions where such workmen are employed in those crafts or tradesfor which there are no workmen employed in the locality as otherwise herein defined.((2) amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)(3) "Maintenance work" means the repair of existing facilities when the size, type orextent of such facilities is not thereby changed or increased.(4) "Public body" means the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, any of its political subdivisions,any authority created by the General Assembly of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvaniaand any instrumentality or agency of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.(5) "Public work" means construction, reconstruction, demolition, alteration and/or repair workother than maintenance work, done under contract and paid for in whole or in part out of the funds of apublic body where the estimated cost of the total project is in excess of twenty-five thousand dollars($25,000), but shall not include work performed under a rehabilitation or manpower training program.((5) amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)(6) "Secretary" means the Secretary of Labor and Industry or his duly authorized deputyor representative.(7) "Workman" includes laborer, mechanic, skilled and semiskilled laborer and apprenticesemployed by any contractor or subcontractor and engaged in he performance of services directlyupon the public work project, regardless of whether their work becomes a component part thereof,but does not include material suppliers or their employes who do not perform services at the job site.(8) "Work performed under a rehabilitation program," means work arranged by and at aState institution primarily for teaching and upgrading the skills and employment opport<strong>unit</strong>ies ofthe inmates of such institutions.(9) "Advisory Board" means the board created by section 2.1 of this act.- 1 -
((9) added Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)(10) "Appeals Board" means the board created by section 2.2 of this act.((10) added Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 2.1. Advisory Board, Powers and Duties.(a) There is hereby created in the Department of Labor and Industry an Advisory Board consistingof seven members for the purpose of assisting the secretary in carrying out his duties under theact to which this is an amendment.(b) Except for the member employed by the secretary, each member of the Advisory Boardshall be appointed by the Governor and shall receive a compensation of thirty dollars ($30) per dayfor each day actually spent in the performance of this duties plus necessary expenses.(c) Of the seven members, one shall be a representative of an association of general contractorsengaged full-time in the building construction industry, one shall be a representative of an associationof heavy and highway construction industry, one shall be a member of an historically establishedunion representing labor in the building construction industry, one shall be a member of an historicallyestablished union representing labor in the heavy and highway construction industry, one shallbe a member of an association representing a political subdivision, one shall be learned in the lawand employed by the secretary, and one shall not be engaged in or employed by the building industryor by a public body but shall represent the general public.(d) At least two weeks' public notice shall be given in the manner prescribed by regulation ofthe board prior to any meeting of the board. Four members of the board shall constitute a quorum.(e) The Advisory Board shall have the power and duty to —(1) Consult with the secretary at his request concerning any matter arising under theadministration of this act.(2) Advise and assist the secretary in carrying out the duties provided for him by section7 of this act.(3) Promulgate rules and regulations necessary to carry out the duties placed upon theboard by this act.(2.1 added Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 2.2. Appeals Board Powers and Duties.(a) There is hereby created in the Department of Labor and Industry an Appeals Board consistingof seven members for the purpose of hearing and determining grievances arising out of theadministration of the act to which this is an amendment.(b) Except for the member employed by the secretary, each member of the Appeals Board shallbe appointed by the Governor and shall receive a compensation of thirty dollars ($30) per day foreach day actually spent in the performance of his duties plus necessary expenses.(c) Of the seven members, one shall be a representative of an association of general contractorsengaged full-time in the building construction industry, one shall be a representative of an associationof heavy and highway contractors engaged full time in the heavy and highway construction industry,one shall be a member of an historically established union representing labor in the building constructionindustry, one shall be a member of an historically established union representing labor in the heavy- 2 -
and highway construction industry, one shall be a member of an association representing a political subdivision,one shall be learned in the law and employed by the secretary, and one shall not be engaged in oremployed by the building industry or by a public body but shall represent the general public. No memberof the Advisory Board created by this amendatory act shall be appointed to the Appeals Board.(d) Four members of the board shall constitute a quorum and the board shall neither sit forpurposes of hearing any grievance nor make any determination unless a quorum is present.(e) The Appeals Board shall have the power and duty to —(1) Hear and determine any grievance or appeal arising out of the administration of this act.(2) Promulgate rules and regulations necessary to carry out the duties placed upon theboard by this act: Provided, however, That any such rules and regulations shall provide for noticeof filing of grievances and appeals, public hearings, right of representation and all other proceduresrequired by due process of law.(2.2 added Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 3.Specifications.The specifications for every contract for any public work to which any public body is a party,shall contain a provision stating the minimum wage rate that must be paid to the workmen employedin the performance of the contract.(3 amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 4.Duty of Public Body.It shall be the duty of every public body which proposes the making of a contract for any projectof public work to determine from the secretary the prevailing minimum wage rates which shall bepaid by the contractor to the workmen upon such project. Reference to such prevailing minimumrates shall be published in the notice issued for the purpose of securing bids for such project of publicwork. Whenever any contract for a project of public work is entered into, the prevailing minimumwages as determined by the secretary shall be incorporated into and made a part of such contract andshall not be altered during the period such contract is in force.(4 amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 5.Prevailing Wage.Not less than the prevailing minimum wages as determined hereunder shall be paid to all workmenemployed on public work.(5 amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 6.Duty of Contractor.Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep an accurate record showing the name, craft and theactual hourly rate of wage paid to each workman employed by him in connection with public work,and such record shall be preserved for two years from date of payment. The record shall be open atall reasonable hours to the inspection of the public body awarding the contract and to the secretary.Section 7.Duty of Secretary.The secretary shall, after consultation with the advisory board, determine the general prevailing- 3 -
minimum wage rate in the locality in which the public work is to be performed for each craft or classificationof all workmen needed to perform public work contracts during the anticipated term thereof:Provided, however, That employer and employe contributions for employe benefits pursuant to a bonafide collective bargaining agreement shall be considered an integral part of the wage rate for the purposeof determining the minimum wage rate under this act. Nothing in the act, however, shall prohibitthe payment of more than the general prevailing minimum wage rate to any workman employed onpublic work. The secretary shall forthwith give notice by mail of all determinations of general prevailingminimum wage rates made pursuant to this section to any representative of any craft, any employeror any representative of any group of employers, who shall in writing request the secretary so to do.(7 amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 8. Review of Rates, Petition and Hearing.Any prospective bidder or his representative, any representative of any group of employers engagedin the particular type of construction, reconstruction, alteration and demolition or repair work involved,any representative of any craft or classification of workmen or the public body may, within ten days afterthe publication and issue of the specifications covering the particular contract for public work involved,file with the secretary a verified petition to review the determination of any such rate or rates. Within twodays thereafter a copy of such petition shall be filed with the public body authorizing the public work. Thepetition shall set forth the facts upon which it is based. The secretary shall, upon notice to the petitioner, thepublic body authorizing the public work and the recognized collective bargaining representatives for theparticular crafts and classifications involved, and also to all persons entitled to receive notice pursuant tosubsection (a) of section 7 hereof, institute an investigation and hold a public hearing within twenty daysafter the filing of such petition. Within ten days thereafter, the secretary shall make a determination andtransmit it, in writing, to the public body and to the interested parties. Such determination shall be finalunless within ten days an appeal is filed with the Appeals Board.Upon receipt by the public body of the notice of the filing of such petition, the public bodyawarding the contract or authorizing the public work shall extend the closing date for the submissionof bids until five days after the final determination of the general prevailing minimum wage ratespursuant to this section and the publication of such findings.Upon the filing of any such petition, notice thereof and of the extension of the closing date forsubmission of bids, shall be given forthwith by the awarding public body in a special bulletin to allinterested parties as defined herein, notice shall also be given to the bidders by the awarding body ofthe final determination of the secretary or Appeals Board which shall also be included in the contract.The determination of the secretary or Appeals Board shall be included in the contract.(8 amended Aug. 9, 1963, P.L. 653, No. 342)Section 9.Posting of Rates.Contractors and subcontractors performing public work for a public body subject to the provisionsof this act shall post the general prevailing minimum wage rates for each craft and classificationinvolved, as determined by the secretary, including the effective date of any changes thereof, inprominent and easily accessible places at the site of the work, or at such place or places as are used bythem to pay workmen their wages.Section 10. Duty of Public Body.(a) Before final payment is made by, or on behalf of any public body of any sum or sums dueon public work, it shall be the duty of the treasurer of the public body or other officer or personcharged with the custody and disbursement of the funds of the public body to require the contractorand subcontractor to file statements, in writing, in form satisfactory to the secretary, certifying to theamounts then due and owing from such contractor and subcontractor, filing such statement to any- 4 -
and all workmen for wages due on account of public work, setting forth therein the names of thepersons whose wages are unpaid and the amount due to each respectively, which statement so to befiled shall be verified by the oath of the contractor and subcontractor, as the case may be, that he hasread such statement subscribed by him, knows the contents thereof and that the same is true of his ownknowledge: Provided, nevertheless, That nothing herein shall impair the right of a contractor to receivefinal payment because of the failure of any subcontractor to comply with provisions of this act.(b) In case any workman shall have filed a protest, in writing, within three months from the date ofthe occurrence of the incident complained of, with the secretary, objecting to the payment to any contractorto the extent of the amount or amounts due or to become due to the said workman for wages or forlabors performed on public works, the secretary shall direct the fiscal or financial officer of the publicbody, or other person charged with the custody and disbursements of the funds of the public body, todeduct from the whole amount of any payment on account thereof the sum or sums admitted by anycontractor in such statement or statements so filed, to be due and owing by him on account of wagesearned on such public work before making payment of the amount certified for payment and may withholdthe amount so deducted for the benefit of the workmen whose wages are unpaid, as shown by theverified statement filed by any contractor, and may pay directly to any workmen the amount shown to bedue to him for such wages by the statements filed as hereinbefore required, thereby discharging theobligation of the contractor to the person receiving such payment to the extent of the amount thereof.(c) Any contractor or subcontractor who shall, under oath, verify the statement required to befiled under this section, which is known to him to be false, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor, andshall, upon conviction, be sentenced to pay a fine of not exceeding two thousand five hundreddollars ($2,500) or to undergo imprisonment not exceeding five years, or both.Section 11. Remedies and Penalties.(a) The fiscal or financial officer, or any public body having public work performed underwhich any workman shall have been paid less than the prevailing wage, shall forthwith notify thesecretary, in writing, of the name of the person or firm failing to pay the prevailing wages.(b) Any workman may, within three months from the date of the occurrence of the incidentcomplained of, file a protest, in writing, with the secretary objecting to the amount of wages paid forservices performed by him on public work as being less than the prevailing wages for such services.(c) Whenever a fiscal or financial officer of any public body shall notify the secretary that anyperson or firm required to pay its workmen the prevailing wage under this act has failed so to do, orwhenever any workman employed upon public work shall have filed a timely protest objecting thathe has been paid less than prevailing wages as required by this act, it shall be the duty of and thesecretary shall forthwith investigate the matter and determine whether or not there has been a failureto pay the prevailing wages and whether such failure was intentional or otherwise. In any suchinvestigation, the secretary shall provide for an appropriate hearing upon due notice to interestedparties including the workmen, the employer and their respective representative, if any.(d) In the event that the secretary shall determine, after notice and hearing as required by this section,that any person or firm has failed to pay the prevailing wages and that such failure was not intentional, heshall afford such person or firm a reasonable opport<strong>unit</strong>y to adjust the matter by making payment or providingadequate security for the payment of the amounts required to be paid under this act as prevailing wagesto the workmen affected on such terms and conditions as shall be approved by the secretary.(e) In the event that the secretary shall determine, after notice and hearing as required by thissection, that any person or firm has filed to pay the prevailing wages and that such failure was intentional,he shall thereupon notify all public bodies of the name or names of such persons or firms and no contractshall be awarded to such persons or firms or to any firm, corporation or partnership in which such personsor firms have an interest until three years have elapsed from the date of the notice to the public bodiesaforesaid. The secretary may in addition thereto request the Attorney General to proceed to recover the- 5 -
penalties for the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania which are payable under subsection (f) of this section.(f) Whenever it shall be determined by the secretary, after notice and hearing as required bythis section, that any person or firm has failed to pay the prevailing wages and that such failure wasintentional, such persons or firm shall be liable to the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania for liquidateddamages, in addition to damages for any other breach of the contract in the amount of the underpaymentof wages due any workman engaged in the performance of such contract.(g) It shall not constitute a failure to pay the prevailing wage rates for the work of a particularcraft or classification where the prevailing wage rates determined for a specific craft or classificationhas been paid, and it is asserted that one or more bona fide craft unions contend that the work shouldhave been assigned to their members instead of the members of the specific craft to whom it wasassigned or by whom it was performed.(h) The following shall constitute substantial evidence of intentional failure to pay prevailingwage rates:(1) Any acts of omission or commission done wilfully or with a knowing disregard of therights of workmen resulting in the payment of less than prevailing wage rates.(2) After there has been a finding by the secretary in the manner required by this sectionthat any person or firm has failed to pay the prevailing wages prescribed by this act and thereafterthere shall be a failure by such person or firm to pay the prevailing wages prescribed by this act,or there shall be a subsequent failure of such person or firm to comply with any opport<strong>unit</strong>y toadjust any differences which shall be afforded him by the secretary.Section 12. Failure to Comply, Termination.In any case where the secretary shall have determined that any person or firm has failed to pay theprevailing wages under subsections (e) and (f) of section 11 hereof, he may direct the public body toterminate, and the public body may terminate, any such contractor's right to proceed with the public work.Section 13. Workmen's Rights.Any workmen paid less than the rates specified in the contract shall have a right of action for thedifference between the wage so paid and the wages stipulated in the contract, which right of actionshall be instituted within six months from the occurrence of the event creating such right.Section 14. Rules and Regulations.The secretary is hereby authorized and empowered to prescribe, adopt, promulgate, rescind and enforcerules and regulations pertaining to the administration and enforcement of the provisions of this act.Section 15. Application of Act.This act shall have no application to any public works subject to the Walsh-Healey Act, the act ofJune 30, 1936, chapter 881, 49 Stat. 2036, 41 USCA sections 35-45, or the Davis Bacon Act, the actof March 3, 1931, 40 U.S. Code 276 (a).Section 16. Repealer.All acts and parts of acts are repealed in so far as they are inconsistent herewith.Section 17. Effective Date.This act shall take effect on the first day of the sixth month following date of final enactment.- 6 -
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESProject Name: Maintenance and Transportation CenterAwarding Agency: Berks County Intermediate Unit (BCIU)Contract Award Date: 8/3/2010Serial Number:10-04146Project Classification: BuildingDetermination Date: 6/9/2010Assigned Field Office: ScrantonField Office Phone Number: 570-963-4577Toll Free Phone Number:877-214-3962Berks CountyBuildingAsbestos & Insulation WorkersAsbestos & Insulation WorkersAsbestos & Insulation WorkersBoilermaker (Repair Work)BoilermakersBricklayers, Stone Masons, Pointers,Caulkers, CleanersBricklayers, Stone Masons, Pointers,Caulkers, CleanersBricklayers, Stone Masons, Pointers,Caulkers, CleanersCarpenters, Drywall Hangers, Framers,Instrument Men, Lathers, Soft FloorLayersCarpenters, Drywall Hangers, Framers,Instrument Men, Lathers, Soft FloorLayersCarpenters, Drywall Hangers, Framers,Instrument Men, Lathers, Soft FloorLayersCarpenters, Drywall Hangers, Framers,Instrument Men, Lathers, Soft FloorLayersCement FinishersCement FinishersEffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal6/29/2009 $29.88 $18.88 $48.766/28/2010 $31.88 $18.88 $50.766/27/2011 $33.88 $18.88 $52.761/1/2010 $23.59 $15.15 $38.741/1/2010 $38.08 $25.29 $63.375/3/2009 $28.48 $14.19 $42.6710/4/2009 $28.48 $14.24 $42.725/2/2010 $30.41 $14.28 $44.696/1/2008 $24.42 $9.67 $34.096/1/2009 $25.69 $10.27 $35.966/1/2010 $26.71 $11.02 $37.736/1/2011 $27.91 $11.47 $39.385/1/2009 $29.10 $10.75 $39.855/1/2010 $30.85 $10.75 $41.60Page 1 of 8 06/09/2010
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESBuildingDock Builder/Pile DriversDock Builder/Pile DriversDrywall FinisherDrywall FinisherDrywall FinisherElectric LinemanElectric LinemanElectriciansElevator ConstructorElevator ConstructorElevator Tender (<strong>Us</strong>e Elevator Apprenticeor Constructor)GlazierGlazierIron Workers (Bridge, Structural Steel,Ornamental, Precast, Reinforcing)Laborers (Class 01 - See notes)Laborers (Class 01 - See notes)Laborers (Class 02 - See notes)Laborers (Class 02 - See notes)Laborers (Class 03 - See notes)Laborers (Class 03 - See notes)Laborers (Class 04 - See notes)Laborers (Class 04 - See notes)Laborers (Class 05 - See notes)Laborers (Class 05 - See notes)MillwrightMillwrightMillwrightOperators (Building/Heavy, Class 01 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 01 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 01 -See Notes)EffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal1/1/2009 $28.85 $12.00 $40.851/1/2010 $29.95 $12.25 $42.205/1/2009 $23.31 $12.57 $35.885/1/2010 $23.86 $13.42 $37.285/1/2011 $23.86 $15.42 $39.286/1/2008 $35.28 $14.90 $50.185/31/2009 $37.27 $15.43 $52.709/1/2009 $31.62 $14.50 $46.121/1/2008 $37.85 $16.47 $54.321/1/2010 $40.08 $20.24 $60.321/1/2005 $0.00 $0.00 $0.006/1/2008 $27.00 $12.64 $39.646/1/2009 $29.22 $11.92 $41.147/1/2009 $28.30 $21.70 $50.005/1/2009 $19.43 $9.73 $29.165/1/2010 $19.43 $11.43 $30.865/1/2009 $21.43 $9.73 $31.165/1/2010 $21.43 $11.43 $32.865/1/2009 $23.43 $9.73 $33.165/1/2010 $23.43 $11.43 $34.865/1/2009 $24.93 $9.73 $34.665/1/2010 $24.93 $11.43 $36.365/3/2009 $25.43 $9.86 $35.295/1/2010 $25.43 $11.43 $36.865/1/2009 $27.41 $13.47 $40.885/1/2010 $28.91 $13.99 $42.905/1/2011 $30.27 $14.63 $44.905/1/2009 $29.42 $16.89 $46.315/1/2010 $30.76 $17.85 $48.615/1/2011 $32.06 $18.85 $50.91Page 2 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESBuildingOperators (Building/Heavy, Class 01a -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 01a -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 01a -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 02 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 02 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 02 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 02a -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 02a -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 02a -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 03 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 03 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 03 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 04 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 04 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 04 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 05 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 05 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 05 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 06 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 06 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 06 -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 07/A -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 07/A -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 07/A -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 07/B -See Notes)Operators (Building/Heavy, Class 07/B -See Notes)EffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal5/1/2009 $31.67 $17.55 $49.225/1/2010 $33.01 $18.51 $51.525/1/2011 $34.31 $19.51 $53.825/1/2009 $29.13 $16.81 $45.945/1/2010 $30.47 $17.77 $48.245/1/2011 $31.77 $18.77 $50.545/1/2009 $31.38 $17.48 $48.865/1/2010 $32.72 $18.44 $51.165/1/2011 $34.02 $19.44 $53.465/1/2009 $26.22 $15.94 $42.165/1/2010 $27.55 $16.91 $44.465/1/2011 $28.85 $17.91 $46.765/1/2009 $25.08 $15.61 $40.695/1/2010 $26.42 $16.57 $42.995/1/2011 $27.72 $17.57 $45.295/1/2009 $24.64 $15.47 $40.115/1/2010 $25.96 $16.45 $42.415/1/2011 $27.27 $17.44 $44.715/1/2009 $23.76 $15.21 $38.975/1/2010 $25.09 $16.18 $41.275/1/2011 $26.39 $17.18 $43.575/1/2009 $35.30 $19.38 $54.685/1/2010 $36.91 $20.43 $57.345/1/2011 $38.47 $21.53 $60.005/1/2009 $34.96 $19.27 $54.235/1/2010 $36.56 $20.33 $56.89Page 3 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESBuildingOperators (Building/Heavy, Class 07/B -See Notes)Painters Class 1 (see notes)Painters Class 1 (see notes)Painters Class 1 (see notes)Painters Class 2 (see notes)Painters Class 2 (see notes)Painters Class 2 (see notes)Painters Class 3 (see notes)Painters Class 3 (see notes)Painters Class 3 (see notes)Pile Driver Divers (Building, Heavy,Highway)Pile Driver Divers (Building, Heavy,Highway)PlasterersPlasterersPlumbersRoofers (Composition)Roofers (Composition)Roofers (Shingle, Slate, Tiles)Sheet Metal WorkersSheet Metal WorkersSign Makers and HangarsSprinklerfittersSprinklerfittersSteamfittersSteamfittersTerrazzo FinisherTerrazzo FinisherTerrazzo SetterTerrazzo SetterTile & Marble FinisherEffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal5/1/2011 $38.12 $21.43 $59.555/1/2009 $22.75 $12.57 $35.325/1/2010 $23.30 $13.42 $36.725/1/2011 $23.30 $15.42 $38.725/1/2009 $24.75 $12.57 $37.325/1/2010 $25.30 $13.42 $38.725/1/2011 $25.30 $15.42 $40.725/1/2009 $25.60 $12.57 $38.175/1/2010 $29.60 $13.42 $43.025/1/2011 $29.60 $15.42 $45.021/1/2009 $43.28 $12.00 $55.281/1/2010 $44.39 $12.25 $56.645/1/2009 $23.70 $12.96 $36.665/1/2010 $23.95 $14.46 $38.415/1/2010 $34.50 $24.04 $58.545/1/2009 $30.00 $23.10 $53.105/1/2010 $30.75 $24.95 $55.705/1/2009 $23.25 $13.62 $36.876/1/2008 $28.98 $27.45 $56.436/1/2009 $29.56 $29.12 $58.687/1/2009 $24.17 $15.99 $40.167/1/2009 $33.35 $17.05 $50.401/1/2010 $33.85 $17.60 $51.455/1/2009 $37.76 $25.00 $62.765/1/2010 $39.36 $26.26 $65.625/1/2009 $26.54 $14.37 $40.915/1/2010 $27.89 $14.42 $42.315/1/2009 $25.86 $17.27 $43.135/1/2010 $27.21 $17.32 $44.535/1/2009 $21.48 $12.39 $33.87Page 4 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESBuildingTile & Marble LayerTile & Marble LayerTile & Marble LayerTruckdriver class 1(see notes)Truckdriver class 1(see notes)Truckdriver class 1(see notes)Truckdriver class 2 (see notes)Truckdriver class 2 (see notes)Truckdriver class 2 (see notes)Truckdriver class 3 (see notes)Truckdriver class 3 (see notes)Truckdriver class 3 (see notes)EffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal5/1/2009 $24.15 $13.86 $38.015/1/2010 $24.90 $13.86 $38.765/1/2011 $25.85 $13.86 $39.715/1/2009 $28.58 $0.00 $28.585/1/2010 $29.58 $0.00 $29.585/1/2011 $30.73 $0.00 $30.735/1/2009 $28.65 $0.00 $28.655/1/2010 $29.65 $0.00 $29.655/1/2011 $30.80 $0.00 $30.805/1/2009 $29.14 $0.00 $29.145/1/2010 $30.14 $0.00 $30.145/1/2011 $31.29 $0.00 $31.29Page 5 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESHeavy/HighwayCarpentersCarpentersCarpentersLaborers (Class 01 - See notes)Laborers (Class 01 - See notes)Laborers (Class 01 - See notes)Laborers (Class 02 - See notes)Laborers (Class 02 - See notes)Laborers (Class 02 - See notes)Laborers (Class 03 - See notes)Laborers (Class 03 - See notes)Laborers (Class 03 - See notes)Laborers (Class 04 - See notes)Laborers (Class 04 - See notes)Laborers (Class 04 - See notes)Laborers (Class 05 - See notes)Laborers (Class 05 - See notes)Laborers (Class 05 - See notes)Laborers (Class 06 - See notes)Laborers (Class 06 - See notes)Laborers (Class 06 - See notes)Laborers (Class 07 - See notes)Laborers (Class 07 - See notes)Laborers (Class 07 - See notes)Laborers (Class 08 - See notes)Laborers (Class 08 - See notes)Laborers (Class 08 - See notes)Operators (Highway, Class 01 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 01 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 01a - SeeNotes)EffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal5/1/2009 $25.30 $9.86 $35.165/1/2010 $25.98 $10.83 $36.815/1/2011 $27.03 $11.43 $38.465/1/2009 $16.22 $11.03 $27.255/1/2010 $16.77 $11.88 $28.655/1/2011 $17.32 $12.78 $30.105/1/2009 $22.84 $11.03 $33.875/1/2010 $23.39 $11.88 $35.275/1/2011 $23.94 $12.78 $36.725/1/2009 $19.83 $11.03 $30.865/1/2010 $20.38 $11.88 $32.265/1/2011 $20.93 $12.78 $33.715/1/2009 $20.18 $11.03 $31.215/1/2010 $20.73 $11.88 $32.615/1/2011 $21.28 $12.78 $34.065/1/2009 $20.85 $11.03 $31.885/1/2010 $21.40 $11.88 $33.285/1/2011 $21.95 $12.78 $34.735/1/2009 $20.27 $11.03 $31.305/1/2010 $20.82 $11.88 $32.705/1/2011 $21.37 $12.78 $34.155/1/2009 $20.56 $11.03 $31.595/1/2010 $21.11 $11.88 $32.995/1/2011 $21.66 $12.78 $34.445/1/2009 $21.04 $11.03 $32.075/1/2010 $21.59 $11.88 $33.475/1/2011 $22.14 $12.78 $34.925/1/2010 $28.79 $17.26 $46.055/1/2011 $30.09 $18.26 $48.355/1/2010 $31.04 $17.94 $48.98Page 6 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESHeavy/HighwayOperators (Highway, Class 01a - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 02 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 02 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 03 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 03 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 04 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 04 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 05 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 05 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 06 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 06 - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 06/A - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 06/A - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 07/A - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 07/A - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 07/B - SeeNotes)Operators (Highway, Class 07/B - SeeNotes)PiledriversPiledriversSteamfitters (Heavy and Highway - GasDistribution)Steamfitters (Heavy and Highway - GasDistribution)Truckdriver class 1(see notes)Truckdriver class 1(see notes)Truckdriver class 1(see notes)Truckdriver class 2 (see notes)Truckdriver class 2 (see notes)Truckdriver class 2 (see notes)Truckdriver class 3 (see notes)EffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal5/1/2011 $32.34 $18.94 $51.285/1/2010 $27.61 $16.92 $44.535/1/2011 $28.91 $17.92 $46.835/1/2010 $26.91 $16.72 $43.635/1/2011 $28.21 $17.72 $45.935/1/2010 $26.46 $16.59 $43.055/1/2011 $27.76 $17.59 $45.355/1/2010 $25.95 $16.44 $42.395/1/2011 $27.25 $17.44 $44.695/1/2010 $29.03 $17.32 $46.355/1/2011 $30.33 $18.32 $48.655/1/2010 $31.28 $17.98 $49.265/1/2011 $32.58 $18.98 $51.565/1/2010 $34.55 $19.72 $54.275/1/2011 $36.10 $20.83 $56.935/1/2010 $33.13 $19.31 $52.445/1/2011 $34.69 $20.41 $55.105/1/2010 $25.98 $10.83 $36.815/1/2011 $27.03 $11.43 $38.465/1/2006 $27.01 $22.48 $49.495/1/2010 $30.27 $26.09 $56.365/1/2009 $28.58 $0.00 $28.585/1/2010 $29.58 $0.00 $29.585/1/2011 $30.73 $0.00 $30.735/1/2009 $28.65 $0.00 $28.655/1/2010 $29.65 $0.00 $29.655/1/2011 $30.80 $0.00 $30.805/1/2009 $29.14 $0.00 $29.14Page 7 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATESHeavy/HighwayTruckdriver class 3 (see notes)Truckdriver class 3 (see notes)EffectiveDateExpirationDateHourlyRateFringeBenefitsTotal5/1/2010 $30.14 $0.00 $30.145/1/2011 $31.29 $0.00 $31.29Page 8 of 8 Serial Number: 10-04146
WEEKLY PAYROLL CERTIFICATION FOR PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTSContractor or Subcontractor (Please check one) ALL INFORMATION MUST BE COMPLETEDCONTRACTORADDRESSSUBCONTRACTORADDRESSPAYROLL NUMBER WEEK ENDING DATEPROJECT AND LOCATIONPROJECT SERIAL # PROJECT #BUREAU OF LABOR LAW COMPLIANCEPREVAILING WAGE DIVISION7TH & FORSTER STREETSHARRISBURG, PA 171201-800-932-0665EMPLOYEE NAMEAPPR.RATE(%)WORKCLASSIFICATIONDAY AND DATEHOURS WORKED EACH DAYS-TIME0-TIMEBASEHOURLYRATETOTAL FRINGEBENEFITS(C=Cash)(FB=Contributions)*TOTALDEDUCTIONSGROSS PAYFORPREVAILINGRATE JOB(S)CHECK #C:FB:C:FB:C:FB:C:FB:C:FB:LLC-25 REV 10-03 (Page 1)*SEE REVERSE SIDEPAGE NUMBER ___________ OF ____________
THE NOTARIZATION MUST BE COMPLETED ON FIRST AND LAST SUBMISSIONS ONLY. ALL OTHERINFORMATION MUST BE COMPLETED WEEKLY.*FRINGE BENEFITS EXPLANATION (FB): Bona fide benefits contribution, except those required by Federal or StateLaw (unemployment tax, workers’ compensation, income taxes, etc.)Please specify the type of benefits provided and contributions per hour:1) Medical or hospital care__________________________________________________________________________2) Pension or retirement ____________________________________________________________________________3) Life insurance _________________________________________________________________________________4) Disability _____________________________________________________________________________________5) Vacation, holiday _______________________________________________________________________________6) Other (please specify) ___________________________________________________________________________CERTIFIED STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE1. The undersigned, having executed a contract with _____________________________________________________(AWARDING AGENCY, CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR)______________________________ for the construction of the above-identified project, acknowledges that:(a) The prevailing wage requirements and the predetermined rates are included in the aforesaid contract.(b)(c)Correction of any infractions of the aforesaid conditions is the contractor’s or subcontractor’s responsibility.It is the contractor’s responsibility to include the Prevailing Wage requirements and the predetermined rates inany subcontract or lower tier subcontract for this project.2. The undersigned certifies that:(a) Neither he nor his firm, nor any firm, corporation or partnership in which he or his firm has an interest is debarredby the Secretary of Labor and Industry pursuant to Section 11(e) of the PA Prevailing Wage Act, Act of August15, 1961, P.L. 987 as amended, 43 P.S.§ 165-11(e).(b)No part of this contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm,corporation or partnership in which such subcontractor has an interest is debarred pursuant to the aforementionedstatute.3. The undersigned certifies that:(a) the legal name and the business address of the contractor or subcontractor are: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________(b)(c)The undersigned is: a single proprietorship a corporation organized in the state of ______________a partnership other organization (describe) ____________________________The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the contractor/subcontractor are:NAME TITLE ADDRESSThe willful falsification of any of the above statements may subject the contractor to civil or criminal prosecution, provided inthe PA Prevailing Wage Act of August 15, 1961, P.L. 987, as amended, August 9, 1963, 43 P.S. § 165.1 through 165.17.(DATE)(SIGNATURE)LLC-25 REV 10-03 (Page 2)SEAL(TITLE)Taken, sworn and subscribed before me this _________ Dayof ___________________________________ A.D., ___________
SECTION 02222 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Unless otherwise indicated, demolished materials become Contractor's property. Remove from Projectsite.B. Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain Owner's property. Remove, clean, and deliver toOwner's designated storage area.C. Comply with EPA regulations and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 DEMOLITIONA. Maintain and protect existing utilities to remain in service before proceeding with demolition, providingbypass connections to other parts of the building.B. Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and cap off utility services to be demolished.C. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacentbuildings and site improvements.D. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve building stability and preventmovement, settlement, or collapse.E. Protect building structure or interior from weather and water leakage and damage.F. Protect remaining walls, ceilings, floors, and exposed finishes. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions.Cover and protect remaining furniture, furnishings, and equipment.G. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. <strong>Us</strong>e cutting methods leastlikely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.H. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces of building caused by demolition. Restore exposedfinishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into remaining adjoining construction.I. Promptly remove demolished materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. Do not burndemolished materials.END OF SECTION 02222WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 02222SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARINGBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or usedfacilities during site operations.B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premiseswhere indicated.C. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site work.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PREPARATIONA. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance.B. Install standard erosion and sedimentation control measures as required before site construction.C. Protect site improvements to remain from damage. Restore damaged improvements to condition existingbefore start of site clearing.D. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.E. Do not store materials or equipment or permit excavation within drip line of remaining trees.F. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.3.2 SITE CLEARINGA. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.B. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate newconstruction.C. In areas not to be further excavated, fill depressions resulting from site clearing. Place and compact satisfactorysoil materials in 6-inch thick layers to density of surrounding original ground.D. Dispose of waste materials, including trash, debris, and excess topsoil, off Owner's property. Burningwaste materials on-site is not permitted.END OF SECTION 02230WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 02230SITE CLEARING
SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVINGBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and hot-mix asphalt design mixes.B. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to standard specifications of Penn DOT.C. Comply with recommendations of AI's "The Asphalt Handbook."PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix aggregate-asphalt plant mixes as follows:1. Base Course: 4” Bc Bc binder course2. Surface Course: 1-1/2” wearing courseB. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic-emulsified asphalt, slow setting.C. Pavement-Marking Paint: FS TT-P-115, Type I, or AASHTO M-248, Type N, alkyd-resin type.D. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete; 2500-psi minimum compressive strength; 6 inches high; 9inches wide; and 84 inches long.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PAVINGA. Tack coat existing asphalt or concrete surfaces and allow tack coat to cure undisturbed.B. Place hot-mix asphalt to required grade, cross section, and thickness. Promptly correct surface irregularitiesin paving course.C. Compact each hot-mix asphalt course to an average density of 96 percent of reference laboratory densityaccording to ASTM D 1559, within thickness and surface tolerances recommended in AI's "The AsphaltHandbook."D. Remove and restore paved areas that are defective or contaminated.E. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.F. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with two galvanized steel dowels embedded in precast concrete.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 02741HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERG. Seal all edges of paving abutting other materials, building, and existing asphalt paving with asphalt emulsionconforming to Penn DOT regulations.END OF SECTION 02741WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 02741HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 02821 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and shop drawings.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FENCE COMPONENTSA. Fabric: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 392, 2-inch mesh, 9 ga. diameter wire.1. Selvage: Knuckled at bottom and twisted at top.B. Posts and Rails: ASTM F 761.C. Posts and Rails: Steel pipe as follows:1. Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.375-inch OD.2. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.375-inch OD.3. Top Rails: 1.66-inch OD.4. Gate Posts: 4-inch OD.D. Tension Wire: ASTM A 824 with finish to match fabric.E. Fittings and Accessories: ASTM F 626 and as follows:1. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight cap for each post. Provide line post caps with loop toreceive tension wire or top rail.2. Post Brace Assembly: Same material as top rail with 3/8-inch- diameter rod and adjustable tightener.3. Bottom Rail: Same material as top rail with cap on each end.4. Tie Wires: Galvanized steel with finish to match fabric.F. Sliding Gates:1. Fortress heavy duty aluminum frame sliding gate system shall be manufactured by Tymetal Corp.,2549 State Route 40, Greenwich, NY 12834 - (800) 328 - 4283. (Or approved equal)2. Motorized gate to have Lift Master SL585, min. 1 hp. (or approved equal)3. Manual gate to have pad locking system.4. Provide all components for a complete and operational system.5. Manufacturer of gate system shall provide certification stating the gate system includes the followingmaterial components that provide superior performance and longevity. Alternate designs builtto minimum standards that do not include these additional structural features shall not be accepted.a. Gate track system shall be keyed to interlock into gate frame member (providing 200% additionalstrength when compared to weld only keyless systems). When interlocked with andwelded to the "keyed" frame top member, gate track forms a composite structure.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 02821CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERb. Gate shall have a minimum counterbalance length of 50% opening width which provides a36% increase in lateral resistance (when compared to ASTM minimum of 40% counterbalance).If gate is ever to be automated, counterbalance section shall be filled with fabric orother specified material.c. To provide superior structural integrity, <strong>intermediate</strong> vertical members shall be used - withspacing between verticals to be less than 50% of the gate frame height.d. Entire gate frame (including counterbalance section) shall include 2 adjustable stainlesssteel cables (minimum 3/16”) per bay to allow complete gate frame adjustment (maintainingstrongest structural square and level orientation).e. Gate truck assemblies shall be tested for continuous duty and shall have plated steel bearingsmeeting ASTM B 117-07 salt spray test with no red rust after 790 hours (see 1.02 E).Bearings shall be specifically designed for roller applications with full compliment ballbearings, shock resistant outer races, and captured seals.f. Gate truck assemblies shall be supported by a minimum 5/8” plated steel bolt with selfaligning capability, rated to support a 2,000 # reaction load.g. Hanger brackets shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with a minimum 3/8” thickness that isalso gusseted for additional strength.h. Gate top track and supporting hangar bracket assemblies shall be certified by a licensedprofessional engineer to withstand a 2,000 lb. vertical reaction load without exceeding allowablestresses.6. Certifications:a. Gate in compliance with ASTM F 2200-05, Standard Specification for Automated VehicularGate <strong>Construction</strong> per section 2.01 C.b. If operated gate system, gate operator shall be in compliance with UL 325 as evidenced byUL listing label attached to gate operator.c. Gate manufacturer shall certify gate is manufactured in compliance with ASTM F 2200-05,Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate <strong>Construction</strong>. See 1.03 D.1.7. Gate Frame:a. The gate frame shall be fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy extrusions. The topmember shall be a 3" x 5" (76mm x 127mm) aluminum structural channel/tube extrusionweighing not less than 3.0 lb/lf (4.4kg/m). To maintain structural integrity this framemember shall be "keyed" to interlock with the “keyed” track member. If fabricated as asingle horizontal piece, the bottom member shall be a 2" x 5" (51mm x 127mm) aluminumstructural tube weighing not less than 2.0 lb/lf (2.9kg/m). If fabricated in two horizontalpieces, the bottom member shall be a 5" (127mm) aluminum structural channel weighingnot less than 2.6 lb/lf (3.8kg/m). When the gate frame is manufactured in two horizontalpieces or sections, they shall be spliced in the field (the gate frame shall be fabricated inone or multiple sections depending on size requirements or project constraints).8. Vertical Members (Chain Link):a. The vertical members at the ends of the gate frame shall be “P” shaped in cross sectionwith a nominal base dimension of no less than 2” x 2” (51mm x 51mm) and weighing notless than 1.6 lb/lf (2.3kg/m). Major 2” x 2” (51mm x 51mm) vertical members weighingnot less than 1.1 lb/lf shall separate each bay and shall be spaced at less than gate height intervals.b. Intermediate 1” x 2” (25mm x 51mm) vertical members weighing not less than .82 lb/lfshall alternate between 2” x 2” major members.9. Gate Track:a. The gate frame shall have a separate semi-enclosed “keyed” track, extruded from 6005A-T61 or 6105-T5 aluminum alloy, weighing not less than 2.9 lb/lf (4.2kg/m). The trackmember is to be located on only one side of the top primary. Welds to be placed alternatelyalong the top and side of the track at 9" (229mm) centers with welds being a minimumof 2" (51mm).b. All welds on the gate frame shall conform to Welding Procedure Specification and ProcedureQualification Record to insure conformance to the AWS D1.2 Structural WeldingCode. All individual welders shall be certified to AWS D1.2 welding code.2 - 02821CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER10. Gate Mounting:a. The gate frame is to be supported from the track by two (2) swivel type, self-aligning,4-wheeled, sealed lubricant, ball-bearing truck assemblies.b. The bottom of each support post shall have a bracket equipped with a pair of 3” (76mm)UHMW guide wheels Wheel cover protectors shall be included with bottom guides tocomply with UL325.c. Gap protectors shall be provided and installed, compliant with ASTM F 2200-05.11. Diagonal Bracing:a. Diagonal "X" bracing of 3/16" (5mm) minimum diameter stainless steel aircraft cable shallbe installed throughout the entire gate frame.b. The gate shall be completed by installation of approved filler as specified.12. Chain Link: 2” x 2” x 9 gauge aluminized steel chain link fabric shall extend the entire length ofthe gate (if operated gate, counterbalance must also have fabric to prevent reach through and complywith ASTM F2200, see 1.03 C.1) Fabric shall be attached at each end of the gate frame bystandard fence industry tension bars and tied at each 2” x 2” (51mm x 51mm) vertical memberwith standard fence industry ties. ASTM F2200 requires attachment method that leaves no leadingor bottom edge protrusions (cannot exceed 0.5 inch).13. Warranty: The truck assembly shall be warranted against manufacturing defects by the manufacturerfor a period of (5) five years from date of sale.14. Motorized gate: Lift Master SL585a. Min. 1 hp or as recommended by the manufacturer for the gate width and weight. Min.gate speed 11” / sec.b. Contractor shall provide and install all components for a complete and operational systemincluding but not limited to all concrete support pads, ground sensor/interrupt safety loop,photo eye, signage, radio receive/antennae, remotely mounted open / close button (mountedinside the building), grounding, brake, etc.c. The card reader will be provided by others, however the contractor shall provide and installall other components, controls, conduit, post etc for a complete and operational system.G. Swing Gates: ASTM F 900, with galvanized hardware and accessories.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567.B. Excavation: Drill post holes in size and depth shown on drawings, equally spaced, but not more than 10feet apart.C. Setting Posts: Set posts in holes approximately 4 inches above bottom of excavation. Align posts verticallyand align tops. Pour concrete footings with tops 2 inches above grade, troweled to a crown to shedwater.END OF SECTION 02821WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 - 02821CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, concrete mix designs, and laboratory test reports.B. Comply with ASTM C 94; ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete"; ACI 117, "Specificationsfor Tolerances for Concrete <strong>Construction</strong> and Materials"; and CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."C. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to design concrete mixes and provide compression testing.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.B. Steel Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheets not rolls.C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F.E. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded.F. Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C 1116, Type III, synthetic fibers, 1/2 to 1 inch. If recommended by StructuralEngineer.G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.H. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, water reducing.I. Vapor Retarder: Clear 8-mil- thick polyethylene sheet.J. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, clear, Type I, Class A,waterborne.K. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork.L. Repair Underlayment: Factory-packaged, portland or blended hydraulic cement-based, polymermodified,self-leveling underlayment with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4100 psi.M. Repair Topping: Factory-packaged, portland or blended hydraulic cement-based, polymer-modified, selflevelingtraffic-bearing topping with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5700 psi.2.2 MIXESWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 03300CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes to provide the following properties:1. Compressive Strength: 3500 psi.2. Slump Limit: 4 inches at point of placement.3. Air Content: 5.5 to 7.0 percent for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing, 2 to 4 percent elsewhere.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 CONCRETINGA. Construct formwork and maintain tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 117 limits of Class Afor concrete exposed to view and Class C for other concrete surfaces.B. Place vapor retarder on prepared subgrade, with joints lapped 6 inches and sealed.C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement.D. Install construction, isolation, and contraction joints where indicated. Install full-depth joint-filler stripsat isolation joints. All joints shall be caulked, see sealant section of specifications.E. Place concrete in a continuous operation and consolidate using mechanical vibrating equipment.F. Protect concrete from physical damage, premature drying, and reduced strength due to hot or coldweather during mixing, placing, and curing.G. Formed Surface Finish: Smooth-formed finish for concrete exposed to view, coated, or covered by waterproofingor other direct-applied material; rough-formed finish elsewhere.H. Slab Finishes: Troweled finish for floor surfaces and floors to receive floor coverings, paint, or other thinfilm-finish coatings, Nonslip-broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps.I. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing for at least seven days.J. Begin curing concrete slabs after finishing. Apply membrane-forming curing and sealing compound toconcrete.K. Protect concrete from damage. Repair surface defects in formed concrete and slabs.L. Repair slabs not meeting surface tolerances by grinding high areas and by applying a repair underlaymentto low areas receiving floor coverings and a repair topping to low areas to remain exposed.END OF SECTION 03300WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 03300CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MASONRY UNITSA. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Weight Classification, Normal Weight; Type II, nonmoisturecontrolled<strong>unit</strong>s.1. Special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, and other special conditions.2. Bullnose <strong>unit</strong>s for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.2.2 MORTAR AND GROUTA. Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification. Ready-mixed mortar, ASTM C 1142, may be used atContractor's option.1. Masonry Cement: Do not use masonry cement.2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.3. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.4. For interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other applicationswhere another type is not indicated, use Type N.B. Grout: ASTM C 476 with a slump of 8 to 11 inches.C. Refractory Mortar: Ground fireclay mortar or other refractory mortar acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.2.3 REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORSA. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.B. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951, hot-dip galvanized at both interior and exterior walls.1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148 inch.2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148 inch.3. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder design or truss design.C. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, withends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 04810UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIESA. Compressible Filler: Premolded strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability inmasonry wall; made from styrene-butadiene rubber or PVC.C. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV or X.D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 2; aluminum-foil faced.E. Job-Mixed Masonry Cleaner: 1/2-cup tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup laundry detergent dissolvedin 1 gal. of water.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Cut masonry <strong>unit</strong>s with saw. Install with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.B. Mix <strong>unit</strong>s for exposed <strong>unit</strong> masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniformblend of colors and textures.C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back <strong>unit</strong>s; do not tooth.E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry <strong>unit</strong>s with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.F. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height and install compressible filler in joint between top ofpartition and underside of structure above.G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated.H. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facingcavities flush.3.2 LINTELSA. Install steel lintels where indicated.B. Provide masonry lintels where shown. <strong>Us</strong>e precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry<strong>unit</strong>s in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or requiredto support loads indicated.C. Minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.3.3 CLEANINGWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 04810UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, remove large mortar particles, scrub, and rinse <strong>unit</strong>masonry.1. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner, then remove cleaner promptly byrinsing thoroughly with clear water.END OF SECTION 04810WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 - 04810UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEELBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTEPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and mill test reports.B. Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and PlasticDesign," RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints <strong>Us</strong>ing ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts," andAWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND ACCESSORIESA. Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon steel.B. Cold-Formed Structural-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.C. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 36/A 36M, unheaded rods.D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); nonhigh-strengthcarbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers, uncoated.E. Primer: Lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed.2.2 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications and tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of StandardPractice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.B. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3. Shop prime steel to a dry filmthickness of at least 1.5 mils. Do not prime surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar or to be fieldwelded.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 ERECTIONA. Erect structural steel according to AISC specifications and within erection tolerances of AISC's "Code ofStandard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."B. Set base and bearing plates on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges orshims flush with edge of plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 05120STRUCTURAL STEEL
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTEC. Bolted Connections: Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, unless high-strength bolts are indicated.Snug tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints <strong>Us</strong>ingASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1.END OF SECTION 05120WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 05120STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECKBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data product certificates.B. Comply with SDI Publication No. 29, "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck."C. Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, and as follows:1. Zinc-Coating Weight: G60.2. Grade: Grade 33.2.2 DECKINGA. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels from galvanized steel sheet without top-flange stiffening grooves and accordingto drawings.2.3 MISCELLANEOUSA. Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended roof deck accessory materials.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 DECK INSTALLATIONA. Install deck panels and accessories according to SDI Publication No. 29.B. Place, adjust, align, and bear deck panels on structure. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.C. Place deck panels flat and square and weld to structure without warp or deflection.D. Cut, reinforce, and fit deck panels and accessories around openings and projections.E. Roof Deck Accessories: Install finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels. Weldto substrate.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 05310STEEL DECK
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERF. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces with galvanized repair paint accordingto ASTM A 780.END OF SECTION 05310WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 05310STEEL DECK
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Shop Drawings showing details of fabrication and installation.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 METALSA. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.C. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M.D. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), black finish.2.2 GROUTA. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.2.3 FABRICATIONA. General: Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges. Formbent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.B. Welding: Weld corners and seams continuously. <strong>Us</strong>e materials and methods that minimize distortionand develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed connections, finish welds andsurfaces smooth with contour of welded surface matching those adjacent.C. Fabricate ladders for locations shown, complying with ANSI A14.3, welded steel construction.D. Fabricate loose lintels from steel angles and shapes. Size to provide bearing length at each side of openingsequal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches.E. Fabricate steel pipe columns with steel base and top plates drilled for anchor and connection bolts andwelded to pipe with continuous fillet weld same size as pipe wall thickness.1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch base plates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts and 1/4-inch top plates.2.4 STEEL AND IRON FINISHESWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 05500METAL FABRICATIONS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," and paintwith a rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metalfabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,and free of rack.B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, ordissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.END OF SECTION 05500WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 05500METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railings to withstand structuralloads required by ASCE 7.1. For glass-supported handrails and railings, support each section of top rail by a minimum of threeglass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.B. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, structural analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professionalengineer registered in the state where Project is located, and manufacturer's color charts showingthe full range of colors available for factory-applied finishes.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 METALSA. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40.D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500.E. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supportedrails, unless otherwise indicated.2.2 FABRICATIONA. Assemble railing systems in shop to the greatest extent possible. <strong>Us</strong>e connections that maintain structuralvalue of joined pieces.B. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending and by mitering at elbow bends.C. Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members by welding.D. Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connecthandrail and railing members to other construction.E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.2.3 FINISHESA. Stainless Steel Railings: No. 4, directional polished finish.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 05520HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERB. Steel Railings: Cleaned and shop primed.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.B. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation and free from rack.C. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core-drilling holes 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than OD ofpost. Fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.D. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.END OF SECTION 05520WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 05520HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRYBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: None .PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 LUMBER, GENERALA. Dressed lumber, S4S, 19 percent maximum moisture content for 2-inch thickness or less, marked withgrade stamp of inspection agency.2.2 TREATED MATERIALSA. Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA C2 lumber and AWPA C9 plywood, labeled by an inspectionagency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to 19 and15 percent moisture content, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:1. Wood members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.2. Concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.2.3 LUMBERA. Dimension Lumber: The following grades per inspection agency indicated.1. Framing: No. 2 : Douglas fir-larch: NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA; .2. Exposed Framing: No. 2, hand selected: Spruce-pine-fir: NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA; .B. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content: Eastern softwoods: No. 3 Common perNELMA rules; .C. Miscellaneous Lumber: No. 3 or Standard grade of any species for nailers, blocking, and similar members.2.4 PANEL PRODUCTSA. Wood-Based Structural-<strong>Us</strong>e Panels: DOC PS 2. Provide plywood complying with DOC PS 1, whereplywood is indicated.1. Factory mark panels evidencing compliance with grade requirements.2. Provide panels with span ratings required by support spacing indicated.3. Subflooring: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 06100ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, orin area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or ofType 304 stainless steel.1. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.2. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers.B. Metal Framing Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel of structural capacity, type, and size indicated.C. Sill-Sealer: Glass-fiber insulation, 1-inch thick, compressible to 1/32 inch.D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: APA AFG-01.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring,blocking, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.B. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complyingwith the following:1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.3. "-Fastening Schedule" of the International Building Code .C. Installation of Structural-<strong>Us</strong>e Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA FormNo. E30 and as follows:1. Sheathing: Nail to framing.END OF SECTION 06100WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 06100ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRYBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALS, GENERALA. Lumber Standards: DOC PS 20 and grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American LumberStandards Committee Board of Review.B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIMA. Interior Trim: C Select, Poplar.B. Wood Molding Patterns: Stock moldings made to patterns in WMMPA WM 7 and graded underWMMPA WM 4, , P-Grade for painted finish.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Condition finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing.B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit adjoiningwork. Refinish and seal cuts.C. Install standing and running trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces frommaximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns andmiter at corners.END OF SECTION 06200WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 06200FINISH CARPENTRY
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data for plastic laminate and granite materials, Shop Drawings and Samples showingthe full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish.B. Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work iscompleted, and HVAC system is operating.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.D. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.1. Formica, Wilsonart or equal.F. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Comply with ALA 1992.G. Granite: ASTM C 615.2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers orreferenced to this standard.B. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18for BHMA code number indicated.1. Finish: Satin Chrome: BHMA 626 or BHMA 652.C. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to 15 percentmoisture content.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 06402INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
2.3 INTERIOR WOODWORKBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Complete fabrication before shipping to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble only asneeded for shipping and installing. Where necessary for fitting at Project site, provide for scribing andtrimming.B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for memberswith ends exposed in finished Work.C. Laminate-Clad Cabinets (Plastic-Covered Casework): Custom grade.1. AWI Type of Cabinet <strong>Construction</strong>: Reveal overlay on face frame.2. Laminate Cladding: Horizontal surfaces other than tops, HGS; postformed surfaces, HGP; verticalsurfaces, HGS; Edges, PVC T-molding; semiexposed surfaces, thermoset decorative overlay.3. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood.4. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.D. Granite:1. Black Pearle, Santa Cecilia or similar2. Thickness: 1 ¼”3. Edge: Eased edge4. Sealer: Impregnated silicone sealer2.4 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKA. Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.B. Finish architectural woodwork at the fabrication shop; defer only final touch up until after installation.1. Apply one coat of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of woodwork.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Condition woodwork to prevailing conditions before installing.B. Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for grade specified.C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to atolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, seal cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.E. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces to the greatest extent possible.Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.F. Anchor countertops securely to base <strong>unit</strong>s. Seal space between backsplash and wall.G. Seal granite countertop / backsplash.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 06402INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER3.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULEA. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hospital hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal; B01361 forflush doors and B01521 for overlay doors.B. Pulls: Wire pulls, 4 inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter.C. Catches: Magnetic catches, B03141.D. Adjustable Shelf Standards: B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.E. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, complying withBHMA A156.9, Grade 1 and rated for the following loads:1. Drawer Slides: 45 lbf.F. Door Locks: E07121.G. Drawer Locks: E07041.END OF SECTION 06402WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 - 06402INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATIONBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, flame-spread ratings of 75 or less and smoke-developedratings of 450 or less.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTSA. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 2 .B. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A, foil-scrim-kraft, vapor-retarder membraneon one face with fibers manufactured from glass. Interior partitions and floor shall be Type I unfaced.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R-values indicated. Cut andfit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.END OF SECTION 07210WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07210BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLESBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.B. Identify each bundle of shingles with appropriate markings of UL or another testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Fire-Test-Response Classification: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A.2. Wind-Resistance-Test Characteristics: ASTM D 3161 or UL 997, passed.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 ASPHALT SHINGLESA. Fiberglass Shingles: Mineral-surfaced, self-sealing, laminated, multilayer, 3-dimensional, fiberglassbasedasphalt shingles; complying with ASTM D 3018, Type I.2.2 ACCESSORIESA. Waterproof Underlayment: Minimum 40-mil- thick, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheetmembrane; complying with ASTM D 1970.B. Sheet metal products fabricated from aluminum, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 H14 withpainted finish, minimum 0.024 inch thick.1. Metal Drip Edge: Brake-formed sheet metal with at least a 2-inch (50-mm) roof deck flange and a1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with a 3/8-inch (9.6-mm) drip at lower edge. Furnish in lengthsof 8 or 10 feet (2.5 or 3 m).2. Metal Flashing: Job-cut to sizes and configurations required.C. Asphalt Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586.D. Nails: Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel conventional roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate3/4 inch into solid decking or at least 1/8 inch through plywood sheathing.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with instruction in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" or NRCA's "The NRCASteep Roofing Manual."B. Apply waterproof underlayment under all shingle areas.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07311ASPHALT SHINGLES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERC. Install metal flashing and trim according to details and instructions of NRCA's "The NRCA Steep RoofingManual": Section "Asphalt Roofing," and ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual."D. Install flashing vents according to manufacturer's written instructions.END OF SECTION 07311WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 07311ASPHALT SHINGLES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 07531 - EPDM ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Shop Drawings of tapered insulation.B. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A.C. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's labor and material written warranty, without monetary limitation,signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting from defects in materialsor workmanship for the period of 20 years.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 ROOFING MATERIALSA. EPDM Sheet: ASTM D 4637, Type 1, Grade 1 or 2 and Class SR, scrim or fabric internal reinforced; 60mils thick; black.B. Auxiliary Materials: Recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and as follows:1. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM.2. Splice Materials as recommended by roofing manufacturer: .3. Thermal Barrier: ASTM C 1177, Type X, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board; 5/8 inch (16mm) thick or ASTM C 728, perlite, 1 inch thick.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Secure thermal barrier with at least 1 fastener for each 4 sq. ft. and at least 2 fasteners per board.B. Mechanically fasten each layer of insulation to deck with at least 1 fastener for each 4 sq. ft. and at least 2fasteners per board or per manufacturers recommendations.C. Install EPDM sheet according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:1. Adhered Sheet Installation: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet and allowto partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet.D. Seams: Install per manufacturers recommendations and firmly roll side and end laps of overlappingsheets. Seal exposed edges of sheet terminations.E. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates. Protect roofing fromdamage and wear during remainder of construction period.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07531EPDM ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERF. Correct deficiencies in or remove and reinstall roofing and sheet flashing that does not comply with requirements.END OF SECTION 07531WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 07531EPDM ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING AND SIDINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, applicable manufacturers installation details, and color Samples.B. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," unless otherwise indicated.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 SHEET METALSA. Roof (ADD ALT #G6): Kingzip Standing Seam Roof System, 3” panel thickness, R-25, 42” Width, fulllength panels (no seam), mechanically seamed sidelap, as manufactured by Kingspan Insulated Panels orapproved equal (1-877 638-3266 or www.kingspanpanels)B. Siding: ATAS BWG390 Belvidere Grand R panel, 13” rib spacing, smooth texture, 24 ga. KYNAR 500painted galv. steel, 39” wide panel, 1 ½” seam height, exposed s.s. fasteners, choice of 30 standard colors(or approved equal)2.2 ACCESSORIESA. Metal Accessories: Matching sheet metal roofing in finish and material required for a complete weathertightroofing system, including clips, flashings, ridge closure cap and strips, trim, copings, fascia and gutters.2.3 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural SheetMetal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of installation indicated.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Anchor roofing and siding securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Installwith concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Install following manufacturers installation recommendations.B. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or rubberized-asphalt underlayment.C. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed <strong>unit</strong>s true and accurate. Form exposed facesflat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks. Provide uniform, neat seams withminimum exposure of sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges,unless otherwise indicated.END OF SECTION 07610WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07610SHEET METAL ROOFING AND SIDING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples.B. Provide products that comply with applicable requirements of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet MetalManual," unless otherwise indicated.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 ROOF SPECIALTIESA. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275), 0.028inch (0.7 mm) thick,; prepainted with 2-coat fluoropolymer according to ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M),composed of inhibitive primer and color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluorideresin by weight, with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm).B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, unless harder temperis required for forming or performance; at least 0.0187 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate with installation of roof decks and other substrates to produce a watertight assembly capableof withstanding inward and outward loading pressures, and thermal and lateral loads.B. Coat back side of stainless-steel roof specialties with bituminous coating where they will contact wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.C. Expansion Provisions: Install running lengths to allow controlled expansion for movement of metalcomponents, to prevent water leakage, deformation, or damage.END OF SECTION 07710WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07710MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIESBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, physical samples with appropriate aluminum thicknesses for verification andcolor Samples.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alclad alloy 3005H25, or alloy and temper required to suit forming operations,with mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T52, or alloy and temper required to suit structural andfinish requirements, with mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.2.2 ROOF ACCESSORIESA. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports: Fabricate from 0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick, galvanized structuralsteel; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.1. Provide <strong>unit</strong>s with cant strips and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness and roofdeck slope.2. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs.3. Provide manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Installation: Unless otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction details ofNRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Coordinate with installation of roof deck, vapor barriers,roof insulation, roofing, and flashing to ensure combined elements are secure, waterproof, and weathertight.END OF SECTION 07720WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07720ROOF ACCESSORIES
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 JOINT SEALANTSA. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible withone another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions.B. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920.1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; <strong>Us</strong>es T, M, and O,with the additional capability to withstand 50 percent movement in both extension and compressionfor a total of 100 percent movement. <strong>Us</strong>e for building expansion joints,including floor expansionjoints and control joints.2. Single-component, nonsag polysulfide sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 12-1/2; <strong>Us</strong>es NT, M, G,A, and O. For general exterior use.3. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; <strong>Us</strong>es T, NT, M, G, A,and O. <strong>Us</strong>e for exterior traffic-bearing joints, where slope precludes use of pourable sealant.4. Single-component, pourable urethane sealant, Type S; Grade P; Class 25; <strong>Us</strong>es T, M, G, A, and O.<strong>Us</strong>e for exterior traffic-bearing joints.5. Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; <strong>Us</strong>es NT, G, A,and O; formulated with fungicide. <strong>Us</strong>e for interior sealant joints in ceramic tile, stone, and otherhard surfaces in kitchens and toilet rooms and around plumbing fixtures.C. Latex Sealant: Single-component, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion sealant complyingwith ASTM C 834. For interior use only at perimeters of door and window frames.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with ASTM C 1193.B. Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications.C. Completely seal with caulking compound:1. Joints around perimeter of frames of doors and other openings in exterior walls.2. Joints where masonry abuts other exterior surface finishes.3. Other joints indicated or required to be caulked.4. Joints where aluminum contact masonry.5. Control jointsWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 07920JOINT SEALANTS
6. Expansion jointsBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTEREND OF SECTION 07920WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 07920JOINT SEALANTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESPART I – GENERAL1.1 SUMMARYA. SECTION INCLUDES1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames, including transom frames,sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labeled and nonlabeled,as scheduled.B. RELATED DOCUMENTS1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.1.2 REFERENCESA. STANDARDS1. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows2. ANSI/SDI-100 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors an Frames3. SDI-105 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames4. SDI-107 – Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application)5. ANSI-A250.4 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance6. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door AssembliesB. CODES1. NFPA-101 – Life Safety Code2. IBC 2009 – International Building Code3. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and <strong>Us</strong>able Building and Facilities4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act1.3 SUBMITTALSA. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, GeneralRequirements.B. PRODUCT DATA1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. <strong>Inc</strong>lude details ofeach frame type, elevations of door and frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, locationand installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and details of joints and connections.Show anchorage and accessory items.C. SHOP DRAWINGS1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those onthe contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information:WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERa. Material thickness and/or gauge.b. Door core material.c. Mortises and reinforcements.d. Anchorage types.e. Locations of exposed fasteners.f. Glazed, louvered and paneled openings.g. Mounting locations of standard hardware.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. SUBSTITUTIONS1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1,General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant.B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute (SDI).C. FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES1. All labeled fire door assemblies to be of a type that have been classified and listed in accordance with the latestedition of NFPA80 and test in compliance with NFPA-252, and UL10C. A physical label is to be affixed to thefire door at an authorized facility; embossed labels are acceptable on standard 3 sided door frames.2. For openings required to be fire rated exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer’scertification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials andconstruction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-labelrequirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other doormanufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for PositivePressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreedupon beforehand. Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage. Provideadditional protection to prevent damage to any factory-finished doors. Mark all doors and frames with openingnumbers as shown on the contract documents and shop drawings.C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items areequal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods asdirected.D. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry and secure place.1. Place <strong>unit</strong>s on minimum 4” high wood blocking.2. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately.4. Provide 1/4” spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 - 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1.6 WARRANTYA. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials andworkmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance.PART II - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard hollow metal doors and frames by one of thefollowing:1. Ceco Corporation2. Curries Company3. Steelcraft Company2.2 MATERIALSA. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per ASTM-A366 andA568 general requirements; galvanized to A60 or G60 or galvanealed to A40 minimum coating weightstandard per ASTM-A924. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steelper ASTM-A569.B. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not less that 18-gauge sheet steel, galvanized where galvanizedframes are used.C. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inserts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized incompliance with ASTM-A153, Class C or D as applicable.D. Rust inhibitive enamel or paint primer shall be used, baked on, and suitable as a base for specified finishpaints complying with ANSI A224.1, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted SteelSurfaces on Steel Doors and Frames.”E. Provide all hollow metal doors and frames receiving electrified hardware with Molex wiring harness andconcealed plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate Molex connectorson end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge.2.3 DOORSA. Provide 1 3/4” thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI-100 grades and models specified below, or asindicated on drawings or schedules:1. Interior Doors: Level 2, Model 2 – Seamlessa. Interior doors shall be minimum 18-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of doorintermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door.1) Ceco: Regent-18-SEM2) Curries: 707N-183) Steelcraft: LF182. Exterior Doors: Level 3, Model 2 – SeamlessWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 3 - 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERa. Exterior doors shall be minimum 16-gauge galvanized or galvanealed steel with both lock andhinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door.Exterior doors shall be insulated with a solid slab of expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foampermanently bonded to the inside of each face skin. The top of all doors shall be closed flush bythe addition of a 16-gauge screwed-in top cap and sealed to prevent water infiltration. The bottomchannel shall include weep-holes.1) Ceco: Legion-16-SEM2) Curries: 707N-163) Steelcraft: LF16-PolystyreneB. All doors shall be reinforced for hardware as shown below where necessary to preclude the use of thrubolts.1. Exit Devices: 14-gauge2. Door Closers: 12-gaugeC. All doors shall be beveled 1/8” in 2” and shall have top and bottom channels of not less than 16-gauge,flush or inverted, welded to the face sheets. Doors shall have a full height 14-gauge hinge railreinforcement channel, or individual 10 gauge hinge reinforcements.D. All doors to conform to ANSI-A250.4 Level “A” criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000 operating cyclesand 23 twist tests. Certification of Level “A” doors is to be submitted with approval drawings by supplierupon request. Do no bid or supply any type or gauge of door not having been tested and passed thesecriteria.2.4 FRAMESA. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of typesand styles as shown on the drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated.1. Interior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge2. Exterior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge, galvanized or galvanealed3. Security Grade Frames: 14-gaugea. Ceco: SU Seriesb. Curries: M Seriesc. Steelcraft: F SeriesB. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fully weld the face joints, grind smooth, and re-prime thewelded areas. Finish product must be smooth and flat, with a neatly filed corner. Frames that areexcessively ground or “dished”, or that do not have neatly filed edges at the inside corner will be rejected.C. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements, 14-gauge lock strike reinforcing, and 12-gauge closer reinforcing.D. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames.E. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single framesand two (2) silencers on heads of double frames.F. Provide minimum 0.0179” thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts wheremortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 4 - 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER2.5 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate steel door and frame <strong>unit</strong>s to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle.Where practical, fit and assemble <strong>unit</strong>s in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot bepermanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply withANSI/SDI 100 requirements.1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8” at jambs and heads except between non fire rated pairs of doorswhich may be no more than 1/4.” Not more than 3/4” at the bottom of the doors.B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush <strong>unit</strong>s, from only coldrolledsteel sheet.C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- orhot-rolled steel sheet.E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposedscrews and bolts.F. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardwareschedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI-107and ANSI-A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-appliedhardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closersand exit devices.H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and HardwareInstitute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors andFrames."I. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel or 0.040-inch- thick aluminum.J. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass,louvers, and other panels in doors.K. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doorsPART III - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and asspecified.B. Comply with provisions of SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames,” unlessotherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely untilpermanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders,leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 5 - 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, placeframes before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hingejamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchorsand masonry T-shaped anchors.3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jambadjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames andsecure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices.4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-studpartitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.C. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. Install fire rateddoors with clearances specified in NFPA 80.3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup ofcompatible air-drying primerB. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.END OF SECTION 081113WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 6 - 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 081416 – FLUSH WOOD DOORSPART I – GENERAL1.1 SUMMARYA. SECTION INCLUDES1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing solid core doors (wood veneer faces and hardboard/MDF) lightframes, factory fitting and machining and factory finishing for fire labeled and non labeled wood doors.B. RELATED DOCUMENTS1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.1.2 REFERENCESA. STANDARDS1. NFPA-80 – Fire Doors and Windows2. NFPA-105 – Recommend Practice for Installation of Smoke Controlled Door Assemblies3. WDMA I.S. 1A – Wood Door Manufacturer’s Association, Flush Wood Door Performance Standards4. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door AssembliesB. CODES1. NFPA-101 – Life Safety Code2. IBC 2009 – International Building Code3. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and <strong>Us</strong>able Buildings and Facilities.4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act1.3 SUBMITTALSA. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, GeneralRequirements.B. PRODUCT DATA1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of wood doors. <strong>Inc</strong>lude details of door elevations,details of construction, location and installation requirements of doorC. SHOP DRAWINGS1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those onthe contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information:a. Door core material.b. Mortises and reinforcements.c. Glazed and louvered openings and material.d. Mounting locations of standard hardware.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 – 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS
D. SAMPLESe. Elevation drawings.BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Upon request submit the following samples:a. Corner sections of doors approximately 8” x 10” with door faces and edgings representing the typical rangeof color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.b. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8” x 10” inches, for each material andfinish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range ofcolor and grain to be expected in the finished work.c. Frames for light openings, 6” long, for each material, type, and finish required.d. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. SUBSTITUTIONS1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1,General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant.B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Wood Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA).2. Wherever possible obtain wood doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearanceand construction. All material supplied for this project to conform to WDMA I.S. 1A-97 for premium gradewood doors.C. FIRE RATED DOORS1. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-labelrequirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other doormanufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for PositivePressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.b. For <strong>unit</strong>s exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doorscomply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except forsize.2. A physical label to be permanently affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility. Furthermore, all 45, 60, and90 minute label fire doors are to have manufacturer’s standard laminated stiles for improved screw holding andsplit resistance capability.a. At stairwell enclosures and where otherwise indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmittedtemperature end point of not more than 250 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-testexposureWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 – 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Doors are to beshipped from manufacturer in individual polybags, and shall be inspected immediately upon arrival at jobsite for anydamage of defects.B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers that correlate with designation system used on shop drawingsand contract drawings for door, frames and hardware. <strong>Us</strong>e only temporary, removable, or concealed markings.C. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weather tight, wet-work is complete and dry, andHVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and relative humidity at occupancy level in storageand installation areas.1.6 WARRANTYA. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights the owner may have under the contractdocuments.B. Submit written warranty on manufacturer’s standard form signed by the manufacturer agreeing to replace or repairdefective doors which have:1. Delamination in any degree.2. Warp or twist of 1/4” or more in any 3’ x 6” x 7’ plane of door face.3. Telegraphing of stile, rail or core through face to cause surface variation in excess of 1/100” in any 3” spans.C. Contractor shall replace or refinish doors where contractor’s work contributed to rejection or voiding ofmanufacturer’s warranty.D. Solid core interior doors shall be warranted for the life of their installation.PART II - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood doors by one of the manufacturers as listed.2.2 FIRE RATED DOORS2.3 DOORS1. All fire rated doors shall be supplied to meet UL10C positive pressure standards for category “A” doors. Allrequired intumescent seals shall be concealed into the edge of the door; frame applied intumescent seals are notacceptable.A. FACES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH1. Doors shall have premium grade A faces with manufacturer’s standard five (5) ply construction; minimum 1/8”thick with stiles and rails bonded to the core.2. Faces shall be minimum 1/50” at 12% moisture content thick after finish sanding.a. Veneer Cut: Plain Slicedb. Face Assembly: Book Match, Running Matchc. Veneer Species: Select White BirchWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 3 – 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER3. Exposed vertical edges shall be of the same species as the face material.4. Doors shall have minimum 1” stiles on the hinge stile and 13/16” minimum on the lock stile; both stiles facesshall match the door veneer. Top and bottom rails shall be a minimum 13/16”; rails shall be mill optionhardwood or structural composite lumber (SCL).B. NON RATED AND 20 MINUTE DOORS1. Supply particleboard core complying with WDMA I.S. 1A and ANSI-A208.1, Grade 1-LD, bonded to the doorfaces, stiles and rails using a Type I adhesive. Components are to be assembled to meet or exceed 20 minute firedoor specifications for UL10C fire test requirements.a. Algoma: Super Novodor / FD 1/3b. Eggers: PC5 / PC5-20c. Graham: GPD PC5 / GPD PC5-20C. FIRE RATED DOORS OVER 20 MINUTES1. Supply fire resistive composite mineral core construction to provide the fire rating indicated, boned to doorfaces, stiles and rails using a Type I adhesive. Components are to be assembled to meet or exceed fire doorspecifications for UL10C fire test requirements.a. Algoma: FDb. Eggers: FGPc. Graham: GPD FD52. For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw holding capability approved for usein doors of fire ratings indicated as necessary to eliminate need for through-bolting hardware and as follows:a. Provide 5” top-rail blocking.b. Provide 4 1/2” x 10” lock blocks.c. Provide 5” mid-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices.3. At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holdingcapability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer.2.4 FACTORY FINISHINGA. Finish all doors to receive a transparent finish at the factory as indicated below; field finish doors indicated toreceive an opaque finish in accordance with Division 9, Finishes.1. Grade: Premium2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.3. Stain: Clear-coat only.4. Effect: Semi-filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores.B. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottomedges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.C. Finish doors using three (3) coats of water-clear 100% solids, modified acrylic urethane, cured immediately withultra-violet light.D. Factory seal transparent finish doors on all six (6) sides using manufacturer’s standard meeting these applications.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 4 – 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS
2.5 LIGHT FRAMESBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Provide wood beads for light openings in doors up to and including 20-minute rating; at 20-minute rated doorsprovide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use.1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.B. For fire-rated doors over 20-minute rated provide manufacturer's standard metal light frame formed of 0.048 inchthick cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-enamel or powder-coated finish approved for use in doors of fire ratingindicated.2.6 LOUVERSA. Provide manufacturer’s standard solid wood louvers unless otherwise indicated; species shall be the same as doorfaces.B. Provide metal louvers with vision-proof inverted V or inverted Y blades constructed of galvanized 0.040 inch thicksteel factory primed for paint finish with baked-enamel or power-coated finish.C. Provide metal louvers for fire-rated doors with fusible link and closing device listed and labeled for use in doorswith fire-protection rating of-1 1/2 hours or less. Subject to compliance with rating requirements, louverconstruction and material shall be the same as non-rated versions.2.7 FABRICATIONA. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unlessotherwise indicated:1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements ofNFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3.Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardwaretemplates.1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment beforefactory machining.2. Premachine metal astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.C. Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) ofdoor(s) required.1. Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.D. Provide all wood doors receiving electrified hardware with molex wiring harness and concealed plug connectors onone end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate molex connectors on end of the wiring harness to plugdirectly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 5 – 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART III - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics andhave been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.2. Reject doors with defects.B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.2 INSTALLATIONA. For hardware installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard and as indicated.1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.C. Align factory fitted doors in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTINGA. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deteriorationat the time of Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION 081416WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 6 – 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 08361 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS ADD ALT #G10PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings.B. Structural Performance: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20-lbf/sq. ft. windloadingpressure.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORSA. Manufacturer shall be Overhead Door Co., Clopay, Arm-R-Lite, Haas Door Co., Atlas Roll-Lite, or approvedequal. The following specifications are based on Overhead Door Co. 591 series Thermacore InsulatedSteel Doors.B. Sections: Sections shall be minimum .015”. Roll-formed hot dipped galvanized steel manufactured withfoamed in place polyurethane laminations resulting in a metal/foam/metal homogeneous section. Sectionsshall have a nominal thickness of 1-5/8"and will have an EPDM rubber thermal break to preventheat or cold conductivity. Insulation shall be foamed in place polyurethane core free of CFCs andHCFCs and be fully encapsulated in nonpermeable materials to prevent loss of thermal efficiency overtime, and have an R Value of 14.86. End stiles will be 16 ga. Steel. Deflection of the door in the horizontalposition shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. Provide insulated Glass lights per drawings.C. Operation: Connect new door to existing operator.D. A Pneumatic Sensing Edge extending the full width of the door and securely fastened to the edge of thedoor shall be installed on all doors, as provided by and following the instructions of the overhead doormanufacturer. Tracks & misc. Hardware: 3" standard track. Hardware shall be galvanized steel, Fullfloatingball-bearing rollers with hardened steel races. Roller sizes shall be adequate for design requirementsand limitations. Provide weatherstripping, bottom shall be flexible PVC and held in place by a retainerwhich also provides additional reinforcement, jambs shall have Sup-ur-Seal silicon rubber bulb sealor approved equal.E. Finish: Paint shall be a baked-on epoxy coating, matching existing overhead doors.F. Glazed Panel Inserts: 6-mm clear float glass.G. Exhaust Hose Port: 4” Cast AluminumPART 3 - EXECUTIONWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 08361SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS–(Add Alt G10)
3.1 INSTALLATIONBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head moldstrips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports, as required. The GC to provide all work for acomplete and operable system.B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Hang horizontal track from structuraloverhead framing with angle or channel hangers. Provide bracing and reinforcement as required forrigid installation of track and door.C. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortionand fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.D. Test and adjust controls and safeties.END OF SECTION 08361WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 08361SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS–(Add Alt G10)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples.1. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTSA. The following specifications have been based on the Kawneer 451T system, however similar windowframing systems by U.S. Aluminum Corp, Traco, or approved equal are acceptable manufacturers.B. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions.C. Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."D. Sealants and Joint Fillers: For joints at perimeter of systems as specified in Division 7 Section "JointSealants."E. Doors: Medium stile 350, 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded tubularrail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetrationand fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods, snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops,and preformed gaskets.1. Interior Doors: Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.16 silencers, three on strike jamb of single-doorframes and two on head of double-door frames.2. Exterior Doors: Provide 1” insulated glazing as specified in division “8” section glazing. Providecompression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather strippingretained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.3. Hardware: Manufacturers Heavy-Duty Hardware. Doors with offset pivots, surface mountedoverhead closers, bottom rail deadlocks, mortise deadlatches, Concealed Rod panic hardware withfull width crash bar, pull <strong>unit</strong>s, finished to match door finish, and as specified in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."F. Fasteners and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, andnonbleeding. <strong>Us</strong>e concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware.G. Fabrication: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Providesubframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factoryassemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary forshipment and installation.1. Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame <strong>unit</strong>s andfactory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame <strong>unit</strong>s for hardwareindicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 08411ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERH. Anodized Finish: Comply with NAAMMs "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products."Color anodic, Architectural Class I: AA-M12C22A42/A44 .1. Color: To be selected from manufacturers standard colors.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, bypainting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or primer, or by applying sealant or tape recommendedby manufacturer.B. Install components to provide a weatherproof system.C. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances:1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length.2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch. For surfaces meeting at corners,limit offset to 1/32 inch.3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.D. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points andsmooth operation.END OF SECTION 08411WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 08411ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 08710a – DOOR HARDWAREPART I – GENERAL1.1 SUMMARYA. SECTION INCLUDES1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviouslynecessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded fromthis section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames onwhich they are installed.B. RELATED DOCUMENTS1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.C. RELATED SECTIONS1. 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry2. 08 11 13 – Metal Doors and Frames3. 08 14 13 – Flush Wood Doors4. 08 41 00 – Entrances and Storefronts5. 28 13 00 – Access Control1.2 REFERENCESA. STANDARDS1. ANSI-A250.4 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance2. ANSI A156.1 – Butts and Hinges3. ANSI A156.2 – Bored Locks and Latches4. ANSI A156.3 – Exit Devices5. ANSI A156.4 – Door Controls – Door Closers6. ANSI A156.5 – Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products7. ANSI A156.6 – Architectural Door Trim8. ANSI A156.7 – Template Hinge Dimensions9. ANSI A156.8 – Door Controls – Overhead Holders10. ANSI A156.16 – Auxiliary Hardware11. ANSI A156.18 – Material and Finishes12. ANSI A156.26 – Continuous Hinges13. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door AssembliesB. CODES1. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code2. IBC 2009 – International Building Code3. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and <strong>Us</strong>able Buildings and Facilities4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities ActWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1.3 SUBMITTALSA. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements.B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into “hardware sets” indicatingcomplete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware scheduleshall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardwaresupplier. Furnish four (4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file use. Note any specialmounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the followinginformation:a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor plans and in doorand frame schedule.b. Handing and degree of swing of each door.c. Door and frame sizes and materials.d. Keying information.e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.f. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item.h. Fastenings and other pertinent information.i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedulej. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard.2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware.3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner’s final instructions onkeying of locks has been fulfilled.C. SAMPLES1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted. Samples are to remainundamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be returned to thesupplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements.D. TEMPLATES1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to contractor, fordistribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware.E. ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SYSTEMS1. Provide complete wiring diagrams prepared by an authorized factory employee for each opening requiringelectronic hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified. Provide a copy witheach hardware schedule submitted after approval.2. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardwaresubmittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the openingincorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted forapproval.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER3. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system componentswith respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted forapproval.4. Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange conference between supplier, installers and related trades toreview materials, procedures and coordinating related work.5. The electrical products contained within this specification represent a complete engineered system. If alternateelectrical products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing acomplete and working system including re-engineering of electrical diagrams and system layout, as well aspower supplies, power transfers and all required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer andelectrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring is coordinated to provide a complete and workingsystem.6. For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodateup to twelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door wiring harnesses, framewiring harnesses, electric locking devices and power supplies.7. Integrated Wiegand Access control locks/devices to be installed, tested and programmed via a trained andcertified integrator.F. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to theowner. Manuals to include the following items:a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule.b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions.c. Manufacturer’s written warranty information.d. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. SUBSTITUTIONS1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and time frame as outlinedin Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardwareconsultant.B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishinghardware in the project’s vicinity for a period of at least two (2) years.2. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project.3. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) whois available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about the project’s hardware andrequirements to the owner, architect and contractor.4. Hardware supplier must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein.1.5 FIRE-RATED OPENINGSWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) orWarnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of doors indicated.2. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-labelrequirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure thattotal opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of DoorAssemblies.a. Hardware required for fire doors shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for ratings specified.b. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. MARKING AND PACKAGING1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete with necessaryscrews and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting mortising tools. Contractor shallcheck deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage andcare. Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner.2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware supplier receives material fromvarious manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set and doornumbers to match the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in samecontainer.B. DELIVERY1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreedupon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractoruntil each is satisfied that count is correct.2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes with the locks.C. STORAGE1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling andinstallation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not bedelayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.1.7 WARRANTYA. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defectivematerials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion andacceptance. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner.1. Cylindrical locksets – Heavy Duty: Seven (7) years2. Exit Devices: Five (5) years3. Door closers: Ten (10) yearsWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20104 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART II – PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latchand locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.2.2 MATERIALSA. SCREWS AND FASTENERS1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriatemanner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where required by code and theappropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to preclude their use.B. HANGING DEVICES1. HINGESa. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oilimpregnatedbearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin) feature, at all exterior reversebevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for every 30” of door height.Hinges shall be a minimum of 4 1/2” high and 4” wide; heavy weight hinges (.180) shall besupplied at all doors where specified.1) Specified Manufacturer: McKinney2) Approved Manufacturers: Bommer, Hager2. ELECTRIC HINGESa. Electric hinges shall be provided with molex standardized plug connectors to accommodate up totwelve (12) wires. Plug connectors shall plug directly into molex through-door wiring harnessesfor connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number ofconcealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a mortar guardfor each electric hinge specified.1) Specified Manufacturer: McKinney QC Series2) Approved Manufacturers: None3. CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGESa. All hinges to be non-handed and completely reversible. Hinge line to be available in concealedflush mount with or without inset, full surface and half surface types as specified in the hardwaresets. All hinges to be made of extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy with polyacetal thrust bearings,anodized after cutouts are made for bearings. All concealed hinges to be fire-rated for 20, 45 and90 minutes when incorporated into proper door and frame labeled installations, withoutnecessitating the use of fusible-link pins. All concealed hinges to be available in standard, heavy,and extra heavy duty weights; all full surface and half surface hinges in standard and heavy dutyweights as specified in the hardware sets. All hinges to be factory cut for door size.1) Specified Manufacturers: McKinney2) Approved Manufacturers: Bommer, PemkoWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20105 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERC. FLUSH BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES1. All manual and automatic flush bolts to be furnished as specified.a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwoodb. Approved Manufacturers: McKinney, TrimcoD. CYLINDERS AND KEYING1. CYLINDERSa. All cylinders shall be removable core type. Provide construction master-keyed cylinders cores foruse during the construction period.2. KEYING1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent2) Approved Manufacturers: Nonea. All locks and cylinders shall be construction master-keyed. All locks and cylinders to be masterkeyedor grandmaster-keyed to the existing Sargent removable core key system as directed by theowner. The factory shall key all locks and cylinders. Furnish the following key amounts:1) Two (2) change keys per lock2) Three (3) grand master keys3) Six (6) master keys per master level4) Two (2) control keys (both permanent and construction)5) Fifty (50) patented key blanks6) Fifteen (15) construction/temporary keysb. Prior to ordering locks and cylinders, hold a keying meeting with the owner’s designated agent todetermine specific keying requirements. Obtain information on any existing key systems (registrynumber, keyway, master designations) so new cylinders can be properly integrated. Review thelock functions with the owner at this time, and advise the architect of any owner desired changes.c. General Contractor shall replace construction cores with permanent cores as instructed by theowner.3. KEY CABINETa. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips,receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standardmetal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locksrequired for the project.1) Specified Manufacturer: MMF Industries2) Approved Manufacturers: Lund, TelkeeE. LOCKING DEVICES1. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS – HEAVY DUTYWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20106 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERa. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Certified. Furnish with standard 2 3/4”backset. Lock housing shall be fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless steel. Latchboltshall be brass or stainless steel with a minimum 1/2” throw. Locks shall be non-handed and fullyfield reversible.1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 10 Line2) Approved Manufacturers: None2. LOCKSET STRIKESa. Strikes shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as required.Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection.F. EXIT DEVICES1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES – PUSH RAILa. All exit devices shall be ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 Certified and shall be listed by UnderwritersLaboratories and bear the UL label for life safety in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA101. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze noless than 0.072” thick. Push rails shall be constructed of 0.062” thick material. Lever trim shall beavailable in finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 80 Series2) Approved Manufacturers: Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series2. ELECTRIFIED DEVICESa. Electrified exit devices shall conform to all traditional exit device standards as specified above.All power requirements for exit devices used must utilize a continuous circuit electric hinge forclean design and no visible means of interrupting power to device.b. Where specified exit devices shall be provided with a switch to monitor push rail or signal remotelocation and latchbolt monitoring.G. DOOR CLOSERS1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent2) Approved Manufacturers: Corbin Russwin1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – HEAVY DUTYa. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All closers shall have aluminum alloybodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cyclesand adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnishedwith parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall bemounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Closers shall not beinstalled on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimumaesthetics.1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 351 Series2) Approved Manufacturers: LCN 4041 Series, Norton 7500 SeriesWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20107 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERH. DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less full width of door, or as specified. Push plates,pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule.a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwoodb. Approved Manufacturers: McKinney, TrimcoI. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPSa. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers shall beprovided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated.1) Specified Manufacturers: Rockwood2) Approved Manufacturers: McKinney, Trimco2. OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERSa. Where specified, overhead stops/holders as shown in the hardware sets are to be provided. Track,slide, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber springshall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be of non-handed design.1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson 1/2/9/10 Series2) Approved Manufacturers: Sargent 690/1530/590/1540 SeriesJ. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doorswhere indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as required to meet UL10C Standard forPositive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Provide only those <strong>unit</strong>s where resilient or flexibleseal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.2. Provide threshold <strong>unit</strong>s not less than 4” wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation whereindicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. All threshold <strong>unit</strong>s shallcomply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).a. Specified Manufacturers: Pemkob. Approved Manufacturers: McKinney, ReeseK. SILENCERS1. Furnish rubber door silencers all hollow metal frames; two (2) per pair and three (3) per single doorframe.L. ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES1. POWER SUPPLIESa. Power supplies shall furnish regulated 24VDC and shall be UL class 2 listed. LED’s shall monitorzone status (voltage/no voltage) and slide switches shall be provided to connect or disconnect theload from power; 1, 4 or 8 separate output circuit breakers shall be provided to divide the load.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20108 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER2.3 FINISHESPower supplies shall have the internal capability of charging optional 24VDC sealed lead acidbatteries in addition to operating the DC load. Power supplies shall be supplied complete requiringonly 120VAC to the fused input and shall be supplied in an enclosure. Power supplies shall beprovided with emergency release terminals that allow the release of all devices upon activation ofthe fire alarm system.1) Specified Manufacturer: Securitron BPS2) Approved Manufacturers: SargentA. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed inANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, andother qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referencedstandards for the applicable <strong>unit</strong>s of hardware.PART III – EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installinginterior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects.3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Mount hardware <strong>unit</strong>s at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specificallyindicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Doorand Hardware Institute (DHI.)2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, “Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.”B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an experiencedhardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted orfinished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protectionwith finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finisheshave been completed on the substrates involved.D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handlingand installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardwarelosses before and after installation.3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20109 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Prior to the installation of hardware, manufacturer's representatives for locksets, closers, and exit devicesshall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the properinstallation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held andwho is in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect and Owner.B. The hardware supplier shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardwarewas correctly installed and is in proper working order.3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATINGA. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function ofevery <strong>unit</strong>. Replace <strong>unit</strong>s that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for theapplication made.B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area,return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check andadjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore toproper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for finaloperation of heating and ventilating equipment.C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardwarefinishes and usage of any electronic devices.3.5 PROTECTIONA. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protectexposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latestpossible time frame.3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULEA. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider itas entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware heading,provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Hardware supplier is responsiblefor handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading. Quantities listed are for each pair ofdoors, or for each single door.B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:1. MC – McKinney2. NO – Norton3. RO – Rockwood4. PE – Pemko5. SA – Sargent6. SN – SecuritronWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201010 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #01Doors: 11 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD x SER12 x LAR CLEAR MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Exit Device Furnished by Security Specification 32D SA1 Motor Upgrade Kit Furnished by Security Specification 32D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Door Pull BF158 TYPE 12HD FASTENING US32D RO1 Closer 351 CPSH EN SA1 Drop Plate 351-D EN SA1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452 CNB TEK x LAR PE1 Threshold 2005 AT SS/MS&ES25 x LAR PE1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to retract exit device latch to allow doors to be pulled open. Inside, Freeegress at all times by exit device. Perimeter gasket by door / frame manufacturer.HARDWARE SET #02Doors: 41 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD x SER12 x LAR BL MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Exit Device Furnished by Security Specification 32D SA1 Motor Upgrade Kit Furnished by Security Specification 32D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Power Supply BPS-24-2 SN1 Door Pull BF158 TYPE 12HD FASTENING US32D RO1 Closer 351 CPSH EN SA1 Drop Plate 351-D EN SA1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452 DNB TEK x LAR PE1 Threshold 2005 AT SS/MS&ES25 x LAR PE1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to retract exit device latch to allow doors to be pulled open. Inside, Freeegress at all times by exit device. Perimeter gasket by door / frame manufacturer. New door and hardwareto be coordinated with existing frame.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201011 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #03Doors: 141 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD x LAR BL MC1 Exit Device 64 8804 LESS TRIM 32D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Pull BF158 TYPE 12HD FASTENING US32D RO1 Closer 351 CPSH EN SA1 Drop Plate 351-D EN SA1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452 DNB TEK x LAR PE1 Threshold 2005 AT SS/MS&ES25 x LAR PE1 Concealed Switch 3287 SANOTE: Perimeter gasket by door / frame manufacturer. New door and hardware to be coordinated withexisting frame.HARDWARE SET #04Doors: 181 Continuous Hinge MCK-25HD x SER12 x LAR CLEAR MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Exit Device Furnished by Security Specification 32D SA1 Motor Upgrade Kit Furnished by Security Specification 32D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Power Supply BPS-24-2 SN1 Door Pull BF158 TYPE 12HD FASTENING US32D RO1 Closer 351 CPSH EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Weatherstrip 303 AS TEK (Head & Jambs) PE1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452 CNB TEK x LAR PE1 Threshold 2005 AT SS/MS&ES25 x LAR PE1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to retract exit device latch to allow doors to be pulled open. Inside, Freeegress at all times by exit device.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201012 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #05Doors: 211 Continuous Hinge MCK-25HD x LAR CLEAR MC1 Exit Device 64 8804 LESS TRIM 32D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Pull BF158 TYPE 12HD FASTENING US32D RO1 Closer 351 CPSH EN SA1 Drop Plate 351-D EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Weatherstrip 303 AS TEK (Head & Jambs) PE1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452 CNB TEK x LAR PE1 Threshold 2005 AT SS/MS&ES25 x LAR PE1 Concealed Switch 3287 SAHARDWARE SET #06Doors: 305 Butt Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Electric Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 QC12 26D MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Set Automatic Bolts 1842 / 1962 US26D RO1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO1 Electrified Lockset Furnished by Security Specification 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Coordinator 1600 Series x 1601 Brackets PC RO2 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA2 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 1" LDW 4BE US32D RO2 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO1 Astragal S771 C x LAR PE1 Gasketing S88 D (Head & Jambs) PE1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock at active door allowing entry bylever. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201013 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #07Doors: 82 Butt Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Electric Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 QC12 26D MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Electrified Lockset Furnished by Security Specification 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO3 Door Silencers 608 GREY RO1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Freeegress at all times by lever.HARDWARE SET #08Doors: 2, 15, 34, 352 Butt Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Electric Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 QC12 26D MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Electrified Lockset Furnished by Security Specification 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Closer 351 PS EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO3 Door Silencers 608 GREY RO1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Freeegress at all times by lever.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201014 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #09Doors: 112 Butt Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Electric Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 QC12 26D MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Electrified Lockset Furnished by Security Specification 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO1 Gasketing S88 D (Head & Jambs) PE1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Freeegress at all times by lever.HARDWARE SET #10Doors: 123 Butt Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Storeroom Lock 28 64 10G04 LL 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Closer 351 PS EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Gasketing S88 D (Head & Jambs) PEHARDWARE SET #11Doors: 3, 31, 32, 33, 39, 40, 423 Butt Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC1 Office Lock 28 64 10G05 LL 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO3 Door Silencers 608 GREY ROWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201015 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #12Doors: 133 Butt Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC1 Passage Set 28 10U15 LL 26D SA1 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO1 Gasketing S88 D (Head & Jambs) PEHARDWARE SET #13Doors: 163 Butt Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Classroom Lock 28 64 10G37 LL 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Overhead Stop 10-046 630 RX3 Door Silencers 608 GREY ROHARDWARE SET #14Doors: 5, 6, 7, 17, 383 Butt Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC1 Classroom Lock 28 64 10G37 LL 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO3 Door Silencers 608 GREY ROHARDWARE SET #15Doors: 9, 103 Butt Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC1 Privacy Set 28 10U65 LL 26D SA1 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO1 Gasketing S88 D (Head & Jambs) PEWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201016 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #16Doors: 412 Butt Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC1 Electric Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 QC12 26D MC1 Frame Cable (15 Feet) QC-C1500P MC1 Electrified Lockset Furnished by Security Specification 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Cable QC-C*** (Length as Required) MC1 Closer 351 O/P9 EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO3 Door Silencers 608 GREY RO1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Freeegress at all times by lever. New hardware to be coordinated with existing door and frame.HARDWARE SET #17Doors: 431 Bi Fold Hardware HF4/100A A PEHARDWARE SET #18Doors: 191 Storeroom Lock 28 64 10G04 LL 26D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SANOTE: Balance of existing hardware to remain.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201017 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #19Doors: 201 Exit Device 64 8804 LESS TRIM 32D SA1 Permanent Core 6300 15 SA1 Door Pull BF158 TYPE 12HD FASTENING US32D RO1 Closer 351 CPSH EN SA1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE US32D RO1 Weatherstrip 303 AS TEK (Head & Jambs) PE1 Door Bottom Sweep 3452 CNB TEK x LAR PE1 Threshold 2005 AT SS/MS&ES25 x LAR PE1 Concealed Switch 3287 SANOTE: Balance of existing hardware to remain. New hardware to be coordinated with existing door andframe.HARDWARE SET #20Doors: 36, 371 Privacy Set 1 28 7U65 LL 26D SANOTE: Balance of existing hardware to remain.HARDWARE SET #21Doors: 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29NOTE: All hardware by door manufacturerEND OF SECTION 08710aWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 201018 – 08710aDOOR HARDWARE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 08710b – CARD ACCESS (BY OWNER & COORDINATED BY THE GC/ EC)PART I – CARD ACCESS COORDINATION WITH SECURITY SPECIFICATIONELECTRONIC HARDWARE SYSTEMS1. Provide complete wiring diagrams prepared by an authorized factory employee for each opening requiringelectronic hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified. Provide a copy witheach hardware schedule submitted after approval.2. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardwaresubmittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the openingincorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted forapproval.3. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system componentswith respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted forapproval.4. Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange conference between supplier, installers and related trades toreview materials, procedures and coordinating related work.5. The electrical products contained within this specification represent a complete engineered system. If alternateelectrical products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing acomplete and working system including re-engineering of electrical diagrams and system layout, as well aspower supplies, power transfers and all required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer andelectrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring is coordinated to provide a complete and workingsystem.6. For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodateup to twelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door wiring harnesses, framewiring harnesses, electric locking devices and power supplies.7. Integrated Wiegand Access control locks/devices to be installed, tested and programmed via a trained andcertified integrator.MANUFACTURERSA. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch andlocksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.1. INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL CYLINDRICAL LOCKSa. Integrated Proximity Card Key Locks: Wiegand compatible electronic access control ANSI Grade 1cylindrical lockset with integrated proximity card reader included in the trim. Lock consists of a hardwired, solenoid driven <strong>unit</strong> for locking/unlocking of the lever handle trim, door status switch monitoringand request-to-exit signaling. Door position switch reports Door in Frame (DPS) condition. Card reader isHID based technology programmable via third party networked access control software withoutrequirements for adding proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules.1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent H1- 10 Line2) Approved Manufacturers: NoneWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 – 08710bCARD ACCESS – (By Owner & Coordinated by GC/EC)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER2. INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL EXIT DEVICESa. Integrated Proximity Card Key Exit Devices: Wiegand compatible electronic access control ANSI 156.3Grade 1 exit device with integrated proximity card reader included in the trim. Device consists of a hardwired, solenoid driven <strong>unit</strong> for locking/unlocking of the exit trim, latchbolt and touchbar monitoring,request-to-exit signaling, and door status monitoring (separate switch). Card reader is HID basedtechnology programmable via third party networked access control software. Exit device wires directly tothird party access control panels without requirements for adding proprietary interface panels or modules.1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent H1- 80 Series2) Approved Manufacturers: Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series RNE1HARDWARE SET #01Doors: 11 Exit Device 64 H1-8876 x Reader Trim, Less Lever 32D SA1 Motor Upgrade Kit 55 M56A 32D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to retract exit device latch to allow doors to be pulled open. Inside, Free egressat all times by exit device. Perimeter gasket by door / frame manufacturer.HARDWARE SET #02Doors: 41 Exit Device 64 H1-8876 x Reader Trim, Less Lever 32D SA1 Motor Upgrade Kit 55 M56A 32D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to retract exit device latch to allow doors to be pulled open. Inside, Free egressat all times by exit device. Perimeter gasket by door / frame manufacturer. New door and hardware to be coordinatedwith existing frame.HARDWARE SET #04Doors: 181 Exit Device 64 H1-8876 x Reader Trim, Less Lever 32D SA1 Motor Upgrade Kit 55 M56A 32D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to retract exit device latch to allow doors to be pulled open. Inside, Free egressat all times by exit device.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 – 08710bCARD ACCESS – (By Owner & Coordinated by GC/EC)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #06Doors: 301 Electrified Lockset 28 64 H1-10G271 LL 26D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock at active door allowing entry by lever. Inside,Free egress at all times by lever.HARDWARE SET #07Doors: 81 Electrified Lockset 28 64 H1-10G271 LL 26D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Free egress atall times by lever.HARDWARE SET #08Doors: 2, 15, 34, 351 Electrified Lockset 28 64 H1-10G271 LL 26D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Free egress atall times by lever.HARDWARE SET #09Doors: 111 Electrified Lockset 28 64 H1-10G271 LL 26D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Free egress atall times by lever.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 – 08710bCARD ACCESS – (By Owner & Coordinated by GC/EC)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERHARDWARE SET #16Doors: 411 Electrified Lockset 28 64 H1-10G271 LL 26D SA1 Wiring Diagram WITH POINT TO POINT DRAWINGNOTE: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader (Integrated with trim, see securityspecification) signals power supply to release fail secure electric lock allowing entry by lever. Inside, Free egress atall times by lever. New hardware to be coordinated with existing door and frame.END OF SECTION 08710bWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20104 – 08710bCARD ACCESS – (By Owner & Coordinated by GC/EC)
SECTION 08800 - GLAZINGBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data .B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per NFPA 252 for doors andNFPA 257 for window assemblies; both labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 andANSI Z97.1.D. Comply with written instructions of glass product manufacturers; GANA's "Glazing Manual;" and publicationsof GANA, AAMA, and SIGMA as applicable to products indicated, unless more stringent requirementsare indicated.E. Insulating-Glass Units: Permanently mark with appropriate certification label of one of the inspectingand testing agencies indicated below:1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.2. Associated Laboratories, <strong>Inc</strong>..3. National Accreditation and Management Institute.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GLASSA. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear) , and Quality q3.B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition , Type I, Class 1 (clear) , Quality q3, Kind FT(fully tempered).2.2 FABRICATED GLASS PRODUCTSA. Sealed Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled <strong>unit</strong>s complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA <strong>unit</strong>s,with two 6.0-mm- thick sheets of glass separated by a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) dehydrated space filled withair.1. Inboard Lite: float glass all <strong>unit</strong>s, tempered glass glazing specified in section 3.1.C2. Outboard Lite: float glass all <strong>unit</strong>s, tempered glass glazing specified in section 3.1.C3. Low-Emissivity Coating: Second surface.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 08800GLAZING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazingmaterials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual."B. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.C. Provide tempered glass in all doors and fixed panels adjacent to a door where the nearest exposed edge ofthe glazing is within a 24” arc of either vertical edge of the door in a closed position and where the bottomexposed edge of the glazing is less than 60” from finished floor.END OF SECTION 08800WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 2 - 08800GLAZING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 METAL FRAMING AND SUPPORTSA. Partitions: Comply with ASTM C 645.1. Studs and Runners: In depth indicated and 25 gauge thick, unless otherwise indicated.2. Z-Furring: Z-shaped members with face flange of 1-1/4 inch, wall-attachment flange of 7/8 inch,and in depth indicated.3. Hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 653, G40 for framing members attached toand within 10 feet of exterior walls.2.2 GYPSUM BOARDA. Gypsum board products in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, 5/8 in thick, with manufacturer's standard edges. Regular type,unless otherwise indicated .2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047, formedfrom steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc or plastic.B. Gypsum Board Joint Treatment Materials: Comply with ASTM C 475. Paper reinforcing tape and drying-type,ready-mixed, all-purpose compounds.C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complyingwith ASTM C 834.D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced glass-fiber-blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665 forType I, all interior stud walls.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09260GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply toframing installation.1. Isolate steel framing from building structure, except at floor, to prevent structural movement fromtransferring loading to partitions.2. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gasketsbetween studs and wall.B. Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.1. Isolate the perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions where they abut structural elements,except floors, by providing a 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide space between gypsum board and thestructure. Trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Sealjoints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.2. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to metal framing supports with screwsand to wood supports with adhesive and supplementary screws.C. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies: Level 4 finish, unless otherwise indicated .END OF SECTION 09260WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 09260GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILEBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.B. Floor Tiles: Static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6, per ASTM C 1028.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 CERAMIC TILEA. Ceramic tile that complies with standard grade requirements of ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for CeramicTile."B. Floor Tile: porcelain tile1. Manufacturer: Cross tread, cross-grip and cross dot as manufactured by Crossville, <strong>Inc</strong>.2. Module Size: 12”x12”3. Color: Two colors to be selected from all available colorsC. Wall Tile: glazed ceramic tile.1. Manufacturer: Daltile or American Olean2. Module Size: 4 1/4”x4 1/4" or 6”x6”3. Color: Two colors to be selected from Price Group 1 or 2.4. Finish: matte or semi-gloss, as selected by architect5. Tiles mounted, by manufacturer's standard methodD. Tile trim <strong>unit</strong>s that match characteristics of adjoining flat tile.E. Where indicated, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by factory precoatingthem with a hot-applied continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax. Do not coat unexposed tilesurfaces.2.2 TILE SETTING ACCESSORIESA. Acceptable Manufacturer: Schluter Systems, L.P., 194 Pleasant Ridge Road, Plattsburgh, NY 12901-5841. ASD. Tel: (800) 472-4588. Fax (800) 477-9783. E-mail: emaicus@schluter.com. Web:www.schluter.com.B. Substitutions: Not permitted.C. Waterproofing Membrane for shower walls:1. Waterproofing Membrane for shower walls: Schluter-KERDI load bearing bonded waterproofmembrane with corner joiner and inside/outside corner pre-cut and trimmed <strong>unit</strong>s, meeting ANSIA118.10 and as referenced in TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09310CERAMIC TILE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER2. Sealing compound: Schluter-KERDI-FIX/G – Single component sealing and bonding compoundwith a silane-modified polymer base; Color Grey, 290 ml tubeD. Uncoupling Membrane1. Uncoupling Waterproofing Membrane for Tiled Floors: Schluter DITRA; 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick,orange, high-density polyethylene membrane with a grid structure of 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch (12 mmby 12 mm) square cavities, each cut back in a dovetail configuration, and a polypropylene anchoringfleece laminated to its underside. Conforms to definition for uncoupling membranes in theTile Council of North America Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation and is listed by cUPC tomeet or exceed the requirements of the “American national standard specifications for load bearing,bonded, waterproof membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone installationA118.10.”2. Waterproofing Seaming Membrane: Schluter-KERDI-BAND; Seams and Corners material 0.004inch (0.1 mm) thick, orange polyethylene membrane, with polypropylene fleece laminated on bothsides.a. Width:1) 5 inch (125 mm).2) 7-1/4 inch (185 mm.3) 10 inch (250 mm).2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALSA. Setting and Grouting Materials: Comply with material standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installationof Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.B. Setting-Bed Accessories: Comply with ANSI A108.1A.2.4 THRESHOLDSA. Schluter Reno – ADA CompliantPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with tile installation standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" thatapply to materials and methods indicated.B. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."1. Floor Tile Installation Method: TCA F122 (Thin set mortar bonded to Schluter-Ditra membranebonded to concrete slabC. Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor, base,walls, and trim are the same size.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 09310CERAMIC TILE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERD. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tileabutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.END OF SECTION 09310WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20103 - 09310CERAMIC TILE
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.B. Acoustical Panel Ceilings: ASTM E 1264, Class A materials, tested per ASTM E 84.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELSA. Type 1 - Cirrus #533, 24"x48"x3/4" square lay-in panel, by Armstrong or approved equal.2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Direct-hung; ASTM C 635, <strong>intermediate</strong>- duty structural classification.1. Prelude 15/16" Exposed Tee grid system, by Armstrong or approved equal, direct-hung suspensionsystem, with <strong>intermediate</strong>- duty structural classification according to ASTM C 635.B. Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung,unless otherwise indicated.C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel; ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.1. Wire Diameter: Sized for yield stress of wire to exceed 3 times the hanger design load(ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Ceiling Suspension System Installation: Comply with ASTM C 636.B. Ceiling Suspension System Installation Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with the following:1. UBC Standard 25-2.2. CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--SeismicZones 0-2."3. CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4."4. ASTM E 580.END OF SECTION 09511WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09511ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner at least 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type andcolor of resilient floor tile installed.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILEA. Manufacturer shall be Armstrong Cork Co., Azrock, Congoleum Nairn, <strong>Inc</strong>., or approved equal. Tileshall conform to FS LT-00345(1).1. Color and Pattern: As selected by architect. Contractor shall provide the architect with the manufacturersfull color selection..B. ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (through-pattern tile).C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.D. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (304.8 by 304.8 mm).F. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIESA. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- or blended hydrauliccement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrateconditions indicated.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tile widthsat opposite edges of room are equal to one another and are at least one-half of a tile.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09651RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERB. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured andpackaged. Lay tiles in basket-weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles.C. Provide ¼” luan underlayment with sanded / level compound on all joints under all VCT flooring onwood subfloorEND OF SECTION 09651WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 09651RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner at least 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, ofeach type and color of resilient wall base installed.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 WALL BASEA. Manufacturer shall be Azrock, Johnsonite, or approved equal.1. Color and Pattern: As selected.B. Type: Rubber, FS SS-W-40, Type I or Vinyl, FS SS-W-40, Type II.C. Style: Cove with top-set toe .D. Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).E. Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm).F. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m).G. Outside Corners: Premolded.H. Inside Corners: Premolded.I. Surface: Smooth.2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORYA. Manufacturer shall be Azrock, Johnsonite, or approved equal.1. Color: As selected.B. Material: Rubber or Vinyl.C. Description: Nosing for resilient flooring, Reducer strip for resilient flooring, Tile and carpet joiner, Sheetvinyl to resilient flooring transition.2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIESWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09653RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERA. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- or blended hydrauliccement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrateconditions indicated.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Adhesively install resilient wall base and accessories.B. Install wall base in maximum lengths possible. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and otherpermanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required.C. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed.END OF SECTION 09653WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 09653RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSection 09671a Epoxy Flooring Specification - (1/8” Decorative Quartz Floor)Part 1: General1.1 ScopeA. Provide all labor and materials for a seamless, epoxy flooring installation.1.2 Acceptable ProviderA. C.A. Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>. (800-462-6149), www.careed.com or equal.B. Provider must be a ‘single-source’ company that has technical qualifications and facilitiesto manufacture and install specified system. Installation crew shall be employees of the‘single-source’ company and no subcontractors shall be permitted.C. Provider must have written safety program, $6,000,000 liability and required workman'scompensation insurance. Insurance certificates must be submitted prior to job start-up.D. Provider must have at least ten (10) similar installations with this flooring system.Submit reference list with contact names, numbers, addresses, and size of project.1.3 Delivery and StorageA. Material must be delivered to job site in clean, clearly labeled containers and inspectedby installer prior to start of job.B. Material must be stored in a dry, enclosed area protected from the elements. Temperatureof storage area must be kept between 60-90 degrees F.1.4 Environmental RequirementsA. New concrete must be cured no less than 28 days under good conditions. Concretesubfloors on or below grade must be properly equipped with vapor barriers.B. Water, heat and lighting shall be supplied by GC/Owner. Only 110V/single phaseelectricity shall be made available to Installer.C. Work area shall be made free of other trades and traffic during and for a period of 48hours after completion of floor. Trucks can be moved back in and regular traffic canresume at this time.1.5 WarrantyA. Manufacturer/Installer to submit a single-source, one (1) year warranty against defects inmaterial and workmanship upon completion of installation.Part 2: Products2.1 1/8" Decorative Quartz Floor multiple component, heavy-duty epoxy flooring system asmanufactured by C.A. Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>. 1-800-462-6149.2.2 Color and texture shall be selected from submitted samples.2.3 Physical Properties:Compressive Strength ASTM C-579 11,500 psiHardness (Shore D) ASTM D-2240 80-84Weight @ 1/8”1.0 – 1.2 # per sq.ft.Tensile Strength ASTM C-307 2,400 psiWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 – 09671aEPOXY FLOORING -1/8” Decorative Quartz Floor
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERFlexural Strength ASTM C-580 4,300 psiBond Strength (Concrete) ACI-403 250 psi (concrete fails)Adhesive Strength MIL-D-24613 420 psiImpact Resistance MIL D-3134F 16 ft./lb. (no cracking)Abrasion Resistance ASTM-C-501 32 mgThermal Shock Resistance ASTM-C-884 passesWater Absorption MIL-D-24613 NilFlammability ASTM D-635 self-extinguishingCoefficient of Friction ASTM-D-2047 0.80Coefficient of Expansion ASTM-C-531 26 x 10 to the –6Curing Time (@ 70F)Light traffic 24 hrsHeavy traffic 48 hrs2.4 Product PackagingAll materials used must be precision mixed on site with approved mix and measure apparatus toensure a timely, accurate mix ratio.Part 3: Execution3.1 PreparationA. Concrete preparation to be performed through the use of a Blastrac (vacuum shotblaster)running off of Installer's 60K generator (power required for Blastrac machine will not besupplied by GC/Owner) in order to yield a clean, profiled substrate. Sawtec "dust-free"diamond grinding shall be performed along all edges and areas where shotblastingmachine is unable to reach.B. All termination points, including doorways and trench drains, shall be "keyed-in" in orderto provide smooth transitions.C. All cracks, sawcuts, gouges and holes shall be filled with a C.A. Reed #5100/fumed silicamixture prior to flooring installation.3.2 Product InstallationA. Floor installation must strictly adhere to Manufacturer/Installer’s current writteninstructions.B. Apply 20 mil base coat of C.A. Reed #5100 with a notched squeegee and back-roll with ahigh-quality, non-shed roller.C. Broadcast colored quartz granules to excess, and allow to cure.D. Sweep up excess quartz.E. Repeat steps B and C.F. Apply topcoat of C.A. Reed #5100 at 100 sq.ft. per gallon, allow to cure.G. Moving joints shall be recut and filled with a flexible sealant approved by C.A. ReedAssociates, <strong>Inc</strong>.END OF SECTION 09671aWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 – 09671aEPOXY FLOORING -1/8” Decorative Quartz Floor
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSection 09671b Epoxy Flooring Specification - (1/8” Epoxy Broadcast System)ADD ALT G4Part 1: General1.1 ScopeA. Provide all labor and materials for a seamless, epoxy flooring installation.1.2 Acceptable ProviderA. C.A. Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>. (800-462-6149), www.careed.com or equal.B. Provider must be a ‘single-source’ company that has technical qualifications and facilitiesto manufacture and install specified system. Installation crew shall be employees of the‘single-source’ company and no subcontractors shall be permitted.C. Provider must have written safety program, $6,000,000 liability and required workman'scompensation insurance. Insurance certificates must be submitted prior to job start-up.D. Provider must have at least ten (10) similar installations with this flooring system.Submit reference list with contact names, numbers, addresses, and size of project.1.3 Delivery and StorageA. Material must be delivered to job site in clean, clearly labeled containers and inspectedby installer prior to start of job.B. Material must be stored in a dry, enclosed area protected from the elements. Temperatureof storage area must be kept between 60-90 degrees F.1.4 Environmental RequirementsA. New concrete must be cured no less than 28 days under good conditions. Concretesubfloors on or below grade must be properly equipped with vapor barriers.B. Water, heat and lighting shall be supplied by GC/Owner. Only 110V/single phaseelectricity shall be made available to Installer.C. Work area shall be made free of other trades and traffic during and for a period of 48hours after completion of floor. Trucks can be moved back in and regular traffic canresume at this time.1.5 WarrantyPart 2: ProductsA. Manufacturer/Installer to submit a single-source, one (1) year warranty against defects inmaterial and workmanship upon completion of installation.2.1 1/8" Epoxy Broadcast System, multiple component, heavy-duty, firehouse flooring system asmanufactured by C.A. Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>. 1-800-462-6149.2.2 Color and texture shall be selected from submitted samples.2.3 Physical Properties:Compressive Strength ASTM C-579 11,500 psiHardness (Shore D) ASTM D-2240 80-84Weight @ 1/8”1.0 – 1.2 # per sq.ft.Tensile Strength ASTM C-307 2,400 psiWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 – 09671bEPOXY FLOORING -1/8” Epoxy Broadcast System –( Add Alt G4)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERFlexural Strength ASTM C-580 4,300 psiBond Strength (Concrete) ACI-403 250 psi (concrete fails)Adhesive Strength MIL-D-24613 420 psiImpact Resistance MIL D-3134F 16 ft./lb. (no cracking)Abrasion Resistance ASTM-C-501 32 mgThermal Shock Resistance ASTM-C-884 passesWater Absorption MIL-D-24613 NilFlammability ASTM D-635 self-extinguishingCoefficient of Friction ASTM-D-2047 0.80Coefficient of Expansion ASTM-C-531 26 x 10 to the –6Curing Time (@ 70F)Light traffic 24 hrsHeavy traffic 48 hrs2.4 Product PackagingPart 3: ExecutionA. All materials used must be precision mixed on site with approved mix and measureapparatus to ensure a timely, accurate mix ratio.3.1 PreparationA. Concrete preparation to be performed through the use of a 20-D Blastrac (vacuumshotblaster) running off of Installer's 60K generator (power required for Blastrac machinewill not be supplied by GC/Owner) in order to yield a clean, profiled substrate. Sawtec"dust-free" diamond grinding shall be performed along all edges and areas whereshotblasting machine is unable to reach.B. All termination points, including doorways and trench drains, shall be "keyed-in" in orderto provide smooth transitions.C. All cracks, sawcuts, gouges and holes shall be filled with a C.A. Reed #5100/fumed silicamixture prior to flooring installation.3.2 Product InstallationA. Floor installation must strictly adhere to Manufacturer/Installer’s current writteninstructions.END OF SECTION 09671bWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 – 09671bEPOXY FLOORING -1/8” Epoxy Broadcast System –( Add Alt G4)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSection 09671c Resinous Flooring Specification - (1/4” Industrial Epoxy Topping)ADD ALT G5Part 1: General1. 1 ScopeA. Provide all labor and materials for a seamless epoxy flooring installation.1.2 Acceptable ProviderA. C.A. Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>. (800-462-6149), www.careed.com or equal.B. Provider must be a ‘single-source’ company that has technical qualifications and facilities tomanufacture and install specified system. Installation crew shall be employees of the ‘singlesource’company and no subcontractors shall be permitted.C. Provider must have written safety program, $6,000,000 liability and required workman'scompensation insurance. Insurance certificates must be submitted prior to job start-up.D. Provider must have at least ten (10) similar installations with this flooring system. Submitreference list with contact names, numbers, addresses, and size of project.1.3 Delivery and StorageA. Material must be delivered to job site in clean, clearly labeled containers and inspected by installerprior to start of job.B. Material must be stored in a dry, enclosed area protected from the elements. Temperature ofstorage area must be kept between 60-90 degrees F.1.4 Environmental RequirementsA. New concrete must be cured no less than 28 days under good conditions. Concrete subfloors on orbelow grade must be properly equipped with vapor barriers.B. Electricity, water, heat and lighting shall be supplied by GC/Owner.C. Work area shall be made free of other trades and traffic during and for a period of 48 hours aftercompletion of floor. Trucks can be moved back in and regular traffic can resume at this time.1.5 WarrantyPart 2: ProductsA. Manufacturer/Installer to submit a single-source, one (1) year warranty against defects in materialand workmanship upon completion of installation.2.1 ¼” Industrial Epoxy Topping, multiple component, heavy-duty, trowelled-in-place epoxy flooring systemas manufactured by C.A. Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>. (800) 462-6149.2.2 Color and texture shall be selected from submitted samples.2.3 Physical Properties:Compressive Strength ASTM C-579 14,000 psiHardness (Shore D) ASTM D-2240 80-84Weight @ ¼”2.0 – 2.5 # per sq.ft.Tensile Strength ASTM C-307 2,400 psiFlexural Strength ASTM C-580 4,200 psiBond Strength (Concrete) ACI-403 300 psi (concrete fails)WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 – 09671cRESINOUS FLOORING -1/4” Industrial Epoxy Topping –( Add Alt G5)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERAdhesive Strength MIL-D-24613 420 psiImpact Resistance MIL D-3134F 16 ft./lb. (no cracking)Abrasion Resistance ASTM-C-501 50 mgThermal Shock Resistance ASTM-C-884 passesWater Absorption MIL-D-24613 NilFlammability ASTM D-635 self-extinguishingCoefficient of Friction ASTM-D-2047 0.80Coefficient of Expansion ASTM-C-531 26 x 10 to the –6Curing Time (@ 70F)16 hours for initial set of mortar, topcoattimes vary2.4 Product PackagingPart 3: ExecutionA. All materials used must be precision mixed on site with approved mix and measure apparatus toensure a timely, accurate mix ratio.3.1 PreparationA. Concrete preparation to be performed through the use of a Blastrac (vacuum shotblaster) runningoff of 60k generator (GC/Owner will not provide required electricity) in order to yield a clean,profiled substrate. Sawtec "dust-free" diamond grinding shall be performed along all edges andareas where shotblasting machine is unable to reach. Gasoline-powered equipment will not bepermitted, use only electric or propane-powered preparation equipment.B. All termination points, including doorways and trench drains, shall be "keyed-in" in order toprovide smooth transitions.C. All cracks, sawcuts, gouges and holes shall be filled with a C.A. Reed #5100 [2 component, 100%solids epoxy binder]/fumed silica mixture prior to flooring installation.3.2 Product InstallationA. Floor installation must strictly adhere to Manufacturer/Installer’s current written instructions.B. Apply primer coat of C.A. Reed #5100 [2 component, 100% solids epoxy primer] with a squeegeeand back-roll with a high-quality, non-shed roller.C. Apply mortar with screed box over tacky primer at ¼” thickness and power trowel smoothly andcompactly. Gasoline equipment will not be permitted, use only electric or propane poweredmixing and application equipment. Areas not accessible to power trowel shall be hand trowelled.Allow mortar to cure overnightD. Grind the mortar with Terrco diamond terrazzo grinders in order to remove defects and smooth thesurface. Vacuum thoroughly.E. Apply grout coat of #5100 [2 component, 100% solids epoxy binder] with a squeegee and allow itto penetrate into the mortar. Apply enough material in order to fill all voids in the mortar.F. Apply topcoat of C.A. Reed #5200 [2 component, 100% solids epoxy topcoat] at 150 sq.ft. pergallon, allow to cure. <strong>Inc</strong>orporate white aluminum oxide into topcoat in order to create desiredtexture.G. Moving joints shall be recut and filled with a flexible epoxy/urethane sealant approved by C.A.Reed Associates, <strong>Inc</strong>.END OF SECTION 09671cWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 – 09671cRESINOUS FLOORING -1/4” Industrial Epoxy Topping –( Add Alt G5)
SECTION 09680 - CARPETPART 1 - GENERALBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.B. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6, "Site Conditions."C. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner full-width carpet equal to 5 percent of each type and color carpet installed,packaged with protective covering for storage.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 CARPETA. Carpet shall be Controller II StaLok #7X273 by Shaw (or approved equal).1. Two (2) colors will be selected, see floor finish plan for locations.B. Fiber Content: 100% ECO solution Q premium.C. Surface Pile Weight: 28 oz./sq. yd. Excluding weight of backings.D. Total Weight: 75.5 oz/sq. yd.E. Density: 6503 oz/sq. yd.F. Primary Backing: Polypropylene.G. Secondary Backing: StaLocH. Width: 12’ wideI. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down."B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closedposition. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.C. Provide reducer strips at all changes in floor finishes and as directed by the Architect.D. Provide ¼” luan underlayment with sanded / level compound on all joints under all new mezzanine flooring.END OF SECTION 09680WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09680CARPET
SECTION 09910 - PAINTINGBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Summary: Paint all exposed surfaces as indicated1. Color code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.2. Do not paint prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, labels, and materials obviouslyintended to be left exposed such as tile.3. Unless otherwise indicated do not paint concealed surfaces.B. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.C. Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufactureras the finish coats.D. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner a 1-gal. container, properly labeled and sealed, of each color and typeof finish coat paint used on Project.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 PAINTA. Products shall be by Sherwin Williams Co. or approved equal.1. Colors: As selected.a. Up to six (6) colors may be selected.2. Interior paint shall be Sherwin Williams Co -- Harmony (Zero VOC) or approved equal.B. Material Quality: Manufacturer's best-quality of coating types specified.C. Material Compatibility: Complete system of compatible components that is recommended by manufacturerfor application indicated.D. <strong>Us</strong>e interior paints and coatings with Zero VOC (Sherwin Williams Co – Harmony) as applicable. If notapplicable, paints and coatings shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings: 150 g/L.3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 100 g/L.4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.E. Any other interior paints and coatings to meet SCAQMD, Rule 1113, Architectural coatings standards.WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 09910PAINTING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 APPLICATIONA. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, environmental and substrateconditions, product mixing, and application.3.2 EXTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULEA. Masonry: As follows:1. Sherwin Williams Conflex elastomeric paint with textured finish (and Loxon Conditioner): Twocoats over primer.B. Smooth Wood: As follows:1. Primer on wood that is to be covered with aluminumC. Ferrous Metal: As follows:1. Low-Luster Acrylic: Two coats over rust-inhibitive primer.D. Aluminum: As follows:1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.3.3 INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULEA. Concrete and Masonry: As follows:1. Flat Acrylic: Two coats over primer.B. Concrete Masonry Units: As follows:1. Flat Acrylic: Two coats over block filler.C. Gypsum Board: As follows:1. Low-Luster , Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.D. Woodwork and Hardboard: As follows:1. Low-Luster, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.E. Ferrous Metal: As follows:1. Low-Luster, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.END OF SECTION 09910WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 09910PAINTING
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 10265 - IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTIONPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.B. Provide impact-resistant finishes with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 25 or less and 450 orless, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84.C. Provide components with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of width when tested accordingto ASTM D 256, Test Method A.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Extruded Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC or acrylic-modifiedvinyl plastic; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of width whentested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5.C. Fasteners: Recommended by the manufacturer for use with material on the substrate indicated.2.2 WALL PROTECTIONA. Wall Protection System: Full height corner guard with continuous, 0.0625-inch- thick extrudedaluminumretainer and 0.085-inch- thick extruded-plastic cover and top/ bottom cap.1. Pro-Tek CG-20 as manufactured by Pawling Corp. or approved equal.2. Size and Profile: 2” x full wall height3. Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install components level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.END OF SECTION 10265WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 10265IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
SECTION 10431 - SIGNSBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and material Samples.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Acrylic Sheet: Cast methyl methacrylate sheet; clear, translucent, or opaque as indicated.2.2 SIGNSA. Unframed Panel Signs: Matte-finished opaque acrylic with adhesively applied vinyl film characters withbeveled edges and rounded corners.1. Provide signs for all rooms mounted on the wall beside the room door. <strong>Inc</strong>lude the room nameand all ADA required Braille.B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Cast-aluminum characters in 8 inch high baked enamel (submit colorrange and font for selection). <strong>Us</strong>e projected mounting.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Locate signs where indicated or directed by Architect. Install level, plumb, and at height indicated, withsign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. Prior to installing signs, verify that therequired blocking has been installed and that no obstructions are encountered.END OF SECTION 10431WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 10431SIGNS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 10520 - FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data.B. Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10, listed and labeled for the type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETSA. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Multipurpose dry-chemical type, UL-rated 2A-10B-C.1. Extinguishers by American Specialties <strong>Inc</strong>., Potter-Roemer, <strong>Inc</strong>., Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., GeneralFire Extinguisher Corp., Walter Kiddee & Co., or approved equal.B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Enameled steel, semirecessed in finished rooms only.1. Same manufacturer as fire extinguisher, or as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire extinguisher.2. Trim Style: Square trim.3. Door Glazing: Acrylic bubble.4. Door Style: Full bubble with frame .5. Accessories: Mounting brackets Identification lettering.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install cabinets and brackets at heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicableregulations of authorities having jurisdiction.END OF SECTION 10520WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 10520FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness,unless otherwise indicated.B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplatedcopper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory <strong>unit</strong>, tamper and theft resistantwhen exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provideminimum of six keys to Owner's representative.2.2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES -Furnish and install accessories in accordance with the drawingschedule, as made by American Specialties <strong>Inc</strong>., Bobrick, Gamco, Hallmark, or approved equal.1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) for heavy-duty applications.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by <strong>unit</strong> manufacturer.Install <strong>unit</strong>s level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according tomethod in ASTM F 446.B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly.Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.END OF SECTION 10801WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 10801TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
SECTION 12481 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMESBERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FLOOR MATSA. Abrasive Action, style #02578 by C&A (or approved equal.B. Floor Mat: Carpet-type mats, level-cut-pile nylon.1. Color: 2 colors. See floor finish plan for layout.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install following manufacturers recommendations.END OF SECTION 12481WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 12481FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.B. Provide blinds passing NFPA 701.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDSA. Blinds shall be by Hunter Douglas, Levolor, Bali, or approved equal.1. Color: Provide manufacturers full range for color selection.B. Louver Material: Aluminum .C. Louver Width: 1 inch (25 mm) (miniblinds) .D. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand .E. Headrail Mounting: Horizontal surface between window jambs .PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Provide Blinds on all new and existing interior and exterior windows with the exception of windows C &D.B. Install blinds level, plumb, and located not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass lites.C. Isolate metal parts from concrete or mortar to prevent galvanic action. <strong>Us</strong>e tape or another method recommendedby manufacturer.END OF SECTION 12491WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 2010 1 - 12491HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTERSECTION 13230 - BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEMADD ALT #G3 / E2PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTSA. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings.B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.C. Warranties: Provide standard manufacturer's written warranty, without monetary limitation,signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace components that fail in materialsor workmanship.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEMA. Products:1. Polar B-Air bus snow removal system by Cyclone Works <strong>Inc</strong>., 197 Washington St.,Waterford, Onterio, CA, ph. 519-718-3401.B. System:1. The entire system shall be provided thru the GC as a turnkey system complete and fullyoperational (except power shall be provided to an adjacent junction box by the EC)2. System shall be fully automatic, controlled by photo optic eyes so that the driver canremain in the vehicle or switched to manual mode.3. System shall be built on an “A” frame or “H” frame of 8x8-inch, ¼ wall steel forstrength, with gussets.4. Entire system shall be finish painted. Color selected by the owner.5. The electrical control panel shall be heated and fully waterproof with four contactors(with safeties) for each 575-volt motor, 3 phase power.6. 4 - 575 volt waterproof motors7. Concrete footings, 24inches wide by 24-inches high and 9-feet, 5-inches long and weigh7900 pounds a piece. GC / installer to level entire system as required.8. 12-foot wide by 14-foot high clear interior driving space.9. Blower shall be waterproof, fully adjustable and heated to not freeze.10. 2 Photo eyes located on two arms and allow the system to achieve full power before avehicle enters.11. Protective panels12. All stainless steel hardware13. All internal wiringWATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20101 - 13038BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM -- (ADD ALT #G3 / E2)
BERKS COUNTY INTERMEDIATE UNITMAINTENANCE AND TRANSPORTATION CENTER14. 4 adjustable nozzles for blowers and brackets.15. 4 motor protectorsPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install system level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions to tolerances indicated. Shim,as required, with concealed shims. GC to verify system requirements and the existing grade andprovide any and all work as required.B. Manufacturer shall include all set-up, testing and trainingEND OF SECTION 13230WATKINS ARCHITECT LTDJUNE 4, 20102 - 13038BUS SNOW REMOVAL SYSTEM -- (ADD ALT #G3 / E2)
SECTION 15000HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONINGGENERAL1. GENERAL1.1 Applicable requirements of the Contract Documents, preceding the TechnicalSpecifications, apply to this Section. In the event of conflict between the Specifications, the moststringent shall apply.1.2 Separation of these Specifications into Divisions and Sections is for convenience onlyand is not intended to establish limits of work.1.3 Consult index to be certain that set of Documents and Specifications is complete. Reportomissions or discrepancies to the Owner's Representative.1.4 The Contractor shall employ high standards of good workmanship and shall pay specialattention to the safety of the equipment. The installation of material and equipment shall be inconformance with the codes and standards listed in Paragraph: STANDARDS. The agency havingthe most stringent requirements shall be adhered to.1.5 The Contractor shall make a thorough examination of the site and shall make dueallowances for difficulties and contingencies to be encountered. All dimensions shall be checkedand verified by the Contractor at the site.1.6 The Contractor and all Sub-Contractors shall have a minimum of three years provenexperience on projects with similar levels of complexity and magnitude. Experience shall be basedon the experience as a company and not on the experience as individuals.1.7 The Drawings and Specifications are intended to function as a common set of documents.Anything shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications or mentioned in theSpecifications and not shown on the Drawings shall be equally binding as if both noted on theDrawings and called for in the Specifications.2. SCOPE2.1 The work covered by and included in these Specifications consists of the furnishing of allmaterials, all equipment, labor, tools and supervision and performing all operations necessary for theproper and complete execution of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning work in strictaccordance with the Specifications and the Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of theContract.3. DEFINITIONSProject #: 3894 15000 - 1
3.1 The term "Contractor" or "HVAC Contractor" or "Mechanical Contractor" when used inthis Specification refers to the Contractor responsible for all work under this Section.3.2 The term "Provide" refers to this Contractor purchasing, delivering and installing as apart of this Contract.3.3 The term "HVAC" refers to Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.3.4 The term "ATC" refers to Automatic Temperature Controls.4. STANDARDS4.1 Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the latest edition of allcodes and standards, as adopted by the local authority having jurisdiction, including those listed.4.1.1 Air Movement and Control Association Standards (AMCA)210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes230 Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Circulator Fans for Rating500-D Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating500-L Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating511 Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices4.1.2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, <strong>Inc</strong>.(ASHRAE)52 Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices <strong>Us</strong>ed in General Ventilation forRemoving Particulate Matter4.1.3 90-1 2004 Energy Efficient Design for New Building4.1.4 American National Standards Institute Standards (ANSI)ANSI/ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsANSI/ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings4.1.5 American Society for Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM)A-181 Carbon Steel Forgings For General Purpose PipingProject #: 3894 15000 - 2
A-234 Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel For Moderate andHigh Temperature ServiceA-53 Welded and Seamless Steel PipeB-88 Seamless Copper Water TubeE-84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC-411 Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature ThermalInsulation4.1.6 American Welding Society Standards (AWS)B3.0 Qualification Procedure4.1.7 International Mechanical Code 2006 (IMC)4.1.8 International Building Code 2006 (IBC)4.1.9 International Energy Conservation Code 2006 (IECC)4.1.10 National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)70 National Electrical Code (NEC)90AInstallation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials4.1.11 The Hydronics Institute Publications (HI) I=B=R Testing and Rating Code for FinnedTube (Commercial) Radiation (latest edition)4.1.12 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)4.1.13 Public Law 101-336, The Americans with Disabilities Act of 19904.1.14 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, <strong>Inc</strong>., Publication(SMACNA)HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards: Metal and Flexible, Second EditionSeismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines For Mechanical Systems, Second Edition4.1.15 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)Project #: 3894 15000 - 3
ANSI/ARI 210/240ANSI/ARI 410Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment and Air Source Heat PumpEquipmentForced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils4.1.16 Underwriters Laboratories Publication (UL)1025 Electric Air Heaters1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment4.1.17 Regulations of the Pennsylvania State Police, Fire Marshall Division4.1.18 Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry, Fire and Panic Regulations4.2 Should any change in the Drawings and/or Specifications be required to conform to thecodes, ordinances, regulations or laws mentioned above, the Owner's Representative shall benotified prior to the time of submitting bids.5. NOTIFICATION5.1 Trades that have work connected with the heating, ventilating and air conditioning workand trades that do preparatory work for heating, ventilating and air conditioning shall be notified forinstallation requirements and scheduling.5.2 The Owner's Representative shall be informed of the installation schedule to allowsufficient time for inspection without any work delay.5.3 All work shall be coordinated to avoid cutting of work in place and interfering with otheroperations.5.4 In compliance with Act 38, contact individual companies to have utility locations markedin the field and to otherwise locate underground objects as may be necessary prior to the start ofconstruction. Pennsylvania law requires three working days notice for the construction phase andten working days in design stage. Call Pennsylvania One Call System, <strong>Inc</strong>. (1-800-242-1776, as ofthis writing6. CONTRACT DRAWINGS6.1 Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the relation of piping, ductwork,connections and equipment. The Drawings do not indicate all offsets, elbows and fittings that maybe required. Therefore, the Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditionsaffecting the work. The Contractor shall furnish all offsets, elbows, fittings, hangers and accessoriesas may be required to meet these conditions at no additional cost to the Owner.Project #: 3894 15000 - 4
6.2 Do not scale the Drawings. The Contractor shall check conditions at the site fordimensions and sizes pertaining to the structure.6.3 Do not deviate from the Drawings without prior approval.7. LINES, GRADES AND SURVEYS7.1 All necessary surveys, lines, grades and measurements are the responsibility of theContractor desiring the information for the proper installation of his work. The Contractor isresponsible for the proper installation of the work with respect to other Contractors.7.2 Grades, elevations and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and theContractor shall check all such information on the site before proceeding with the work.8. WORKMANSHIP8.1 All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, fixtures, etc. shall be installed meeting theaccepted standards of the representative industry.8.2 All work to be performed shall be done by qualified mechanics. All mechanics in theemploy of this Contractor on this project shall be skilled in the phases of the work to which they areused. The mechanic's affiliation with labor organizations shall be acceptable to all trades employedon the project.9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES9.1 Transmit each submittal with an Owner's Representative's accepted form. <strong>Inc</strong>lude onecopy each for the Owner and the Owner's Representative in addition to copies required by theContractor.9.2 Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with analphabetic suffix.9.3 Identify Project, Contractor, Sub-Contractor or Supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet anddetail number and Specification Section number, as appropriate.9.4 Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification ofproducts required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work and coordination of information isin accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.9.5 <strong>Inc</strong>omplete submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of providing a complete andfunctional system.9.6 Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Coordinate submission of related items.Project #: 3894 15000 - 5
9.7 Submittals by the Contractor must be in complete compliance with the ContractDocuments unless exceptions are identified. Exceptions to the Contract Documents may only bemade to improve the project. Exceptions cannot be taken which would provide an incomplete and/ornonfunctional system.9.7.1 Exceptions must be included in/on the submittal in a separate paragraph or drawing blocklocated below the Contractor's stamp identified by the title "Exception to Contract Documents."Exceptions cannot be part of the standard Contractor's stamp.9.8 Provide space for Contractor and Owner's Representative review stamps.9.9 The Owner's Representative will return Shop Drawings with the following designations:A. Reviewed: Further submission not required.B. Reviewed as Noted: Corrections must be incorporated in final installation.Further submission not required unless specifically noted.C. Review Not Required: Placed in project files for information only.D. Revise and Resubmit: Make necessary changes and resubmit prior to fabrication.E. Rejected: Does not meet project requirements. Resubmit in accordance withContract Documents.9.10 Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previoussubmittal.9.11 Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties topromptly report any inability to comply with provisions.10. SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA10.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.10.2 Submit Shop Drawings and/or catalog cuts for all specified materials and equipment, andductwork layouts.10.3 Submit Shop Drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals ofrelated systems, products and accessories in a single submittal.10.4 Mark dimensions and values in <strong>unit</strong>s to match those specified.10.5 Show equipment sizes and locations, by dimensions, of ducts, equipment and other items.10.6 <strong>Inc</strong>lude wiring diagrams, hole location and sizes and other data that could affect work byother trades.10.7 Show manufacturer's names, trade names, catalog numbers, accessories, special featuresand rating data.Project #: 3894 15000 - 6
10.8 Indicate required clearances for operating parts, for removal and for servicing.10.9 Show performance data, including fan curves.10.10 Show sound power levels of all rotating equipment.10.11 Indicate efficiencies and air leakage rates for filters and filter housings.11. SUBSTITUTIONS11.1 Any bidder wishing to substitute "or equal" equipment may request a substitution.Manufacturers which are submitted as substitutions for approved equal status are considered to haveequipment of similar quality; however, the Contractor shall not assume that a piece of equipment bya manufacturer submitted as a "substitution" will be automatically accepted. Compliance with theDrawings and Specifications is still required. If the substituted material is considered to beunacceptable, the Contractor shall provide the equipment as originally specified.11.2 Substitutions are encouraged when there is significant cost savings or an improvement toproject. Submit reasons for changes with any requests for substitution. All requests for substitutionsmust be made within 30 days of contract award unless stated otherwise in the General Conditions.11.3 Bid alternates shall be clearly defined on the bid forms in order to be evaluated during thebidding process.11.4 By submitting an alternate or substitution, the Contractor automatically agrees to thefollowing:A. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any additional costsincurred by the Owner's Representative to review the substituted materials, inaccordance with the then current Owner's Representative's hourly rate.B. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any additional costsincurred by the Owner's Representative for field or office conferences caused bythe substituted materials in accordance with the then current Owner'sRepresentative's hourly rate.C. The consideration of alternates/substitutions does not obligate the Owner'sRepresentative to accept same.D. In the event a brand is approved and substituted, it is the responsibility of theContractor to so coordinate his substituted material into the original work at noextra cost to the Owner or any other Contractor.12. CUTTING AND PATCHINGProject #: 3894 15000 - 7
12.1 In new construction, the Contractor shall give the General Contractor completeinformation as to size of openings required in floors and walls, etc., so that such openings may beprovided as the project progresses. In existing construction, the Contractor shall do his own cuttingand patching required for the installation of his work.12.2 If openings are omitted or are incorrect through failure of the Contractor to follow theseinstructions, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, engage the trade, which originally installed thework, to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.12.3 All cutting and patching of every nature required in connection with this Contract shallbe done by the Contractor with mechanics experienced in their respective lines of work. Allpatching shall match adjacent finishes.12.4 All cutting in the building shall be done with great care so as not to leave an unsightlysurface, which may not be concealed by plates, escutcheons or other normal concealing construction.If such unsightly conditions occur, the Contractor shall be required, at his own expense, to engagethe General Contractor to replace the damaged materials with new materials.13. MATERIALS13.1 All materials and equipment provided by this Contractor shall be new, withoutimperfections and blemishes and shall be protected from the elements prior to installation inbuilding.13.2 All equipment shall be tested, listed and labeled by an approved authority (UL, AGA,ETL) and shall be installed in accordance with its listing. Installation instructions shall be availableat the job site.13.3 All equipment subject to specific requirements of the Owner's insurance company (gastrains, etc.) shall meet the insurance companies requirements.14. METHODS14.1 The HVAC Contractor shall confer with all other Contractors and shall apply for detailedand specific information regarding the location of all equipment as the final location may differ fromthat indicated on the Drawings. Ductwork, piping or equipment improperly placed because of theHVAC Contractor's failure to obtain this information shall be relocated and reinstalled by the HVACContractor without additional expense to the Owner.14.2 Each Contractor, upon request of the Owner's Representative shall expedite the work of aspecific area, section or part of the project to permit the installation of another part of the work.14.3 All ductwork, piping, accessories and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as topreserve access with sufficient space provided for proper operation and maintenance to any existingequipment or to any new equipment installed under this Specification or under other Specificationsor Contracts for this building.Project #: 3894 15000 - 8
14.4 This Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of other trades so that all work maybe installed in the most direct manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, equipment,architectural or structural features will be avoided. In the case interference results, the Owner'sRepresentative shall decide which work is to be relocated, regardless of which is first installed.Such relocation shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.14.5 All materials and equipment installed by the Contractor shall be firmly supported andsecured to the building structure where required.14.6 All items of labor, material and equipment not specified in detail or shown on theDrawings but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete and proper installation and properoperation of the work described herein or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall befurnished as if called for in detail by the Specifications or Drawings.14.7 The Contractor shall provide isolation valves and unions or flanges at all pieces ofequipment and at all branch take-offs serving five or more pieces of equipment (whether indicated ornot) to facilitate replacement or service of the equipment.14.8 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendationsand installation instructions. The manufacturer's installation recommendations and instructions shallbe considered part of this Contract.14.9 Any questions regarding means or methods of construction shall be addressed during thebidding phase of the project.15. SCHEDULING OF WORK15.1 The Contractor shall attend all planning meetings, provide scheduling information andwork with all trades to obtain a workable project schedule that meets the Owner's requirements.16. PROTECTION16.1 Each Contractor shall effectively protect his work and materials with tarpaulins or heavyplastic material against dirt, water, chemicals, plaster or damage during the entire period ofinstallation or until he is directed to remove the coverings by the Owner's Representative. Anydamaged material must be removed and replaced by the Contractor without additional costregardless of the cause of the damage. All openings in pipes, fittings, ductwork, etc. must beeffectively sealed to exclude dirt, sand and other foreign substances.17. PROTECTION OF OWNER'S EQUIPMENT17.1 The Contractor shall provide any temporary work required to protect the Owner'sequipment and to contain the dust generated during construction. Any measures taken by theContractor for the protection of equipment shall be installed to the satisfaction of the Owner or theOwner's Representative, which may include any and all provisions listed in DIVISION-1:Project #: 3894 15000 - 9
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and/or in accordance with the appropriate Technical Specificationsfor wood and plastics in DIVISION-6. An approved protection material is nylon reinforced flameretardant and anti-static Griffolyn T-75 ASFR 8 mil film. Telephone No. 1-800-231-6074.18. WORK IN THE EXISTING BUILDING18.1 The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly surveying the existingbuilding to determine the extent and cost of installing new equipment and materials in the existingbuilding.18.2 All new equipment and materials shall be installed in the existing building as hereinspecified.18.3 All Contractors, before starting any cutting of the present building, must first obtainapproval from the Owner’s Representative on the site before cutting at each location. ThisContractor shall provide any temporary work required to retain the dust generated by his work asmay be directed by the Owner's Representative. All dust found, which has escaped the area ofcutting, shall be properly removed by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.18.4 All openings cut into the exterior of the existing structure must be completely sealed andwaterproofed before leaving the job site each day. This shall be done by the Contractor responsiblefor the cutting.18.5 Contractor should not assume utilities can be installed as shown. Drawings arediagrammatic and utilities may need to shift to accommodate existing conditions. In some casesequivalent duct sizes may be required to be used or relocating and existing utility may expedite orsimplify construction. It is believed that in general the project can be constructed with utilities inapproximately the locations as shown.18.6 <strong>Construction</strong> phasing could require installation of some temporary feeds and systemshutdowns to accommodate construction.19. INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES19.1 The Contractor shall schedule his work to avoid any interruption of any utility services tothe operation areas of the building during normal working hours. Interruption of services shall bedone during off hours at no additional cost to the Owner.19.2 The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Owner's Representative at least three daysprior to any interruption of services. The scheduling of all interruptions shall be approved by theOwner.20. RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEANUPProject #: 3894 15000 - 10
20.1 Each Contractor is responsible for periodic removal of all rubbish resulting from hiswork. All surplus material, refuse, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the job site at completion ofContract. The Owner's Representative must be satisfied with the removal and cleanup.21. DELIVERING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT21.1 Deliver accessories, small-unmarked parts, adhesives and incidental items to the site inmanufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers.21.2 Store materials and equipment to prevent damage and injury. Store ferrous materials toprevent rusting. Store equipment to prevent staining and discoloring.22. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS22.1 During construction, the Contractor shall maintain a record set of red lined installationprints. He shall record on these prints, all deviations from the Contract Drawings in pipe sizing, ductsizing, equipment, pipe or duct location, depth of pipe cover and details.22.2 At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer this information onto one setof prints and onto computer generated construction documents and forward the as-built prints and anelectronic copy to the Owner's Representative. Electronic copies of mechanical drawings, withouttitle blocks, will be made available to the Contractor in AutoCAD version 2004.23. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS23.1 Prior to completion of this project, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner'sRepresentative for approval three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual consisting ofitems outlined hereinafter.23.2 The purpose of this manual is to assist the Owner in routine operation, maintenance,servicing, troubleshooting and procurement of replacement parts. All information in the manualshall be as-built and only material pertinent to the project shall be included.23.3 The manual shall include the following:23.3.1 Manuals shall be bound, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages and set in three-ring binders withdurable covers.23.3.2 Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS," title of project and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.All subject matter shall be in typewritten format.23.3.3 Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logicallyorganized as described below; with tab labeling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastictabs.Project #: 3894 15000 - 11
23.3.3.1 Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume with product or systemdescription identified, type on white paper.23.3.3.2 Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of Owner'sRepresentative, Contractor, Sub-Contractors and major equipment suppliers.23.3.3.3 Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided bySpecification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses and telephone numbers of Sub-Contractors and suppliers. Operating and start-up instructions shall be written in a concise step-bystepmanner. Maintenance instructions shall include maintenance schedules, procedures,adjustments and troubleshooting techniques. All non-pertinent information in the manuals shall beeither eliminated or crossed out in a neat and thorough manner. Identify the following:A. List of equipmentB. Parts list for each componentC. Operating instructionsD. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems23.3.3.4 Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:A. Corrected shop drawings and product dataB. Control wiring diagramsC. CertificatesD. Photocopies of warranties23.3.3.5 Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 30 days prior to final inspection.This copy will be returned after final inspection, with the Owner's Representative's comments.Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.23.3.3.6 Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after Owner's review.24. IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT24.1 Identify fans, air conditioning <strong>unit</strong>s and other equipment with permanent plates givingname of item, manufacturer's name and operating characteristics.24.2 Show, for items with moving parts, complete information regarding lubricating materialsand frequency of lubrication.25. PAINTING25.1 Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified; allmarred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished to a smooth and uniform finish.25.2 All exposed ferrous metalwork, pipe, supports, hangers, insulation, exterior equipmentincluding aluminum and other surfaces not factory painted shall be painted with one prime and twoProject #: 3894 15000 - 12
finish coats. Paint, surface preparation and application shall be as specified in Section: PAINTING.Colors shall match existing work or shall be as selected by the Owner's Representative.26. LAWS, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS26.1 All systems in all and/or part shall conform to all pertinent laws, ordinances andregulations of ALL bodies having jurisdiction, at all governing levels. In case of conflict betweengoverning levels, the more stringent law shall apply. As a minimum, all work shall comply withIMC, IBC, NFPA, OSHA, SMACNA and Pennsylvania Labor & Industry requirements.26.2 The Contractor shall pay all fees, prepare and submit all utility applications and obtainand pay for all permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work including L&I boilerroom plans and L&I inspections and approvals.27. BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS AND FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES27.1 Provide expansion joints in ductwork and piping where they cross building expansionjoints.27.2 Provide fire dampers in all penetrations through fire rated floors, walls and partitions andprovide ceiling radiation dampers in penetrations through fire rated ceiling assemblies as required tomaintain the necessary fire rating and/or UL rating of the assembly.27.3 Meet all requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories and all applicable codes formaintaining the integrity of all fire rated assemblies.27.4 Seal space around ducts, pipes or conduits with approved fireproof material where theypass through fire rated assemblies.28. ACCESS DOORS28.1 The Contractor shall provide access panels/access doors for access to dampers, valves,controllers or any other equipment or component requiring access for maintenance, adjustment orservice wherever these items are concealed in building walls, partitions or ceilings. Frames shall beanchored in walls, partitions or ceilings and shall be set true to lines of the building and flush withthe finished surfaces. Access panels/access doors shall be as specified in the General <strong>Construction</strong>Sections of the Specifications.29. FASTENING, SUPPORTS AND HANGERS29.1 All fastenings, supports, hangers, miscellaneous steel, clamps and anchors shall be of thetype made for the specific purpose for which they are to be used. Toggle bolts or machine boltfastenings shall be used for hollow tile, terra cotta or lath construction. Machine screws shall beused for structural steel fastenings. Lead expansion shield and machine screws or lag screws shallbe used for solid masonry fastening. Lag screws shall be used for wood fastening. All equipment,piping and ductwork shall be rigidly and firmly installed to prevent swaying, vibrating or sagging byProject #: 3894 15000 - 13
malleable or wrought steel hangers of standard design, pipe clamps or fabricated steel supports ofapproved design. Hangers of horizontal piping runs shall be adjustable clevis-type. Perforated strapiron hangers and caddy clips are not permissible.30. CONCRETE INSERTS30.1 The HVAC Contractor shall provide and install concrete inserts of an approved carbonsteel wedge-type for all hangers. Where two or more parallel pipes are installed continuous insertsmay be used. Where required to distribute the load on the inserts, a piece of reinforcing steel ofsufficient length shall be passed through the insert. Each insert shall include a knockout piece.Inserts shall have a minimum safety factor of five.31. SLEEVES31.1 The HVAC Contractor shall provide and install sleeves where required to protectequipment or facilities in the installation. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wallor partition and shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise required.31.2 Sleeves in bearing and masonry walls, floors and partitions shall be of standard weightsteel pipe, finished with smooth edges. For other masonry partitions, through suspended ceilingsand for concealed vertical piping, sleeves shall be No. 22 U.S.G. galvanized iron.31.3 All sleeves shall be properly installed and securely cemented in place.31.4 Floor sleeves shall extend one-inch above the finished floor. Space between floor sleevesand passing conduit shall be caulked with an approved graphite packing or waterproof caulkingcompound.31.5 Where pipes pass through waterproofed floors or walls, design of sleeves shall be suchthat waterproofing can be flashed into and around the sleeves.31.6 Where pipes, ducts or conduits pass through fire resisting portions of the structure, theannular space between the sleeve and the pipe, duct or conduit shall be filled with an approvedfireproof material as required to maintain the fire rating of that portion of the structure.31.7 See architectural drawings for fire ratings of building components.32. FIRE STOPPING32.1 The contractor shall be responsible to provide and install fire-stopping materials and/orsystems where his work penetrates fire and/or smoke rated portions of the building and non-fireresistance-rated assemblies. All materials used shall be manufactured such that they are intended toresist the spread of fire and the passage of smoke. This includes but is not limited to rated walls,floors, shafts, ceilings, and non-fire resistance-rated horizontal assemblies. All fire stoppingmaterials used shall have a fire resistance rating equal to or greater than the rated assembly forwhich they are installed.Project #: 3894 15000 - 14
32.2 For locations where the installed fire stopping material is exposed to normal view, thecontractor shall conceal the material with chrome-plated escutcheon plates or other materials thathave a flame-spread value of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, as determinedper ASTM E 84. The concealing device shall be approved by the owner's representative prior toinstallation. Provide shop drawings for each device.32.3 The contractor shall provide components/accessories for each fire-stopping system thatare needed to install fill materials and to comply with all system performance requirements asrecommended by the fire stopping material manufacturer. Accessories include but are not limited to:mineral wool insulation, ceramic fiber, sealants used to aid in the formation of the fire stoppingmaterials, fire-rated formboard, joint fillers and sealers, collars and steel sleeves.32.4 Fire stopping materials and systems shall include, but are not limited to, the following:fire barrier caulk and sealants, intumescent caulk, intumescent putty, intumescent wrap strips,silicone foams and sealants, fire barrier composite sheets and cast-in-place fire barrier systems.32.5 Fire stopping materials and systems shall as manufactured by 3M Fire ProtectionProducts , Hilti Corporation, ProSet Systems <strong>Inc</strong>.33. ANCHOR BOLTS33.1 The Contractor shall provide and set in place, at the time of pouring of concretefoundations, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the equipment called for in theseSpecifications. Anchor bolts shall be of the hook-type, of proper size and length to suit theequipment. Anchor bolts shall be set in pipe sleeves of approximately twice the bolt diameter andone half the embedded length of the bolt. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for propercoordination and placement of the bolts. Upon completion of equipment installation, pipe sleevesshall be caulked in accordance with Paragraph: "SLEEVES" in this Section of the Specifications.34. DEMOLITION34.1 The Contractor shall perform all demolition work as indicated on the Drawings and asdescribed below as part of this Contract.34.2 The Contractor shall cut and patch as required to perform the demolition work. Allopenings created must be repaired to match existing conditions.34.3 All cutting and patching shall be performed by mechanics experienced in their respectiveline of work. If the Owner's Representative is not satisfied with quality of work, the Contractor shallbe required, at his own expense, to engage the General Contractor to replace damaged materials withnew materials.34.4 The Owner shall be given the opport<strong>unit</strong>y to retain ownership of all removed materialsand equipment. All such items shall be carefully handled and protected and shall be stored by thisContractor at the site as directed by the Owner. Any such materials and equipment not desired byProject #: 3894 15000 - 15
the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed promptly from theproject site. Disposal shall be in accordance with the regulations of the authorities at the disposalsite.34.5 If the Contractor encounters or suspects hazardous or toxic material, the Contractor shalladvise the Owner immediately. The work in the affected area shall not be resumed by the Contractoruntil the hazardous material has been removed or rendered harmless by the Owner.35. WARRANTY35.1 The systems specified herein shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanshipand material under normal use and service for a period of one year (five years for all compressors)from date of substantial completion.35.2 If, within the aforementioned warranty period, any material specified herein is proven tobe defective in any way, it shall be replaced or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. Warrantyshall include providing of all labor and materials necessary for repair or replacement of anydefective components. The Contractor is responsible for costs of any services required byequipment suppliers that are not included in suppliers' warranties.35.3 The Contractor shall, after acceptance of the installation by the Owner or the Owner'sRepresentative, provide any service incidental to the proper performance of the systems under thewarranties outlined above for the time periods listed above.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15000 - 16
SECTION 15100HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONINGMATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 15000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIRCONDITIONING, GENERAL shall apply to this entire Section and shall have the same force andeffect as if fully included herein.1.2 The Contractor shall coordinate installation of all equipment, ductwork, piping, conduitand other work to prevent obstructions, which might interfere with filter removal. Initial installationshall include one complete set of air filters installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall alsofurnish one complete set of additional air filters for all filter housings for future installation.2. SCOPE2.1 The Contractor shall provide and install all material and equipment specified and shallfurnish all appurtenances necessary to properly install the equipment and place it in operation.3. MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTERS3.1 Motors shall be high efficiency type built in accordance with NEMA Specifications.3.2 Where motor starters are required to be provided by the HVAC Contractor by thefollowing paragraphs of these Specifications, the motor starters shall be provided with a controlpower transformer, a hand-off-automatic switch, and starter coil even where the starters are suppliedwith the equipment by the equipment vendor/manufacturer.4. NON-DUCTED SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (AH-1/CU-1)4.1 Split system air conditioner shall be a complete integrated systems with all the necessarycomponents, disconnects and controls required for complete operational installation. Units shall beprecharged with refrigerant and be complete with liquid line filter dryer, thermal expansion valvesand low ambient controls. Compressors shall carry five year extended warranties.4.2 Interior <strong>unit</strong> shall be wall mounted complete with fan, disconnect switch, refrigerant coil,filter, drain pan, condensate pump and controls.4.3 Exterior <strong>unit</strong> shall consist of a compressor, refrigerant coil and fan.4.4 System shall be provided with programmable night setback thermostat.Project #: 3894 15100 - 1
4.5 Route condensate piping concealed in wall. Coordinate final connection with PlumbingContractor.4.6 Split system air conditioner shall have the capacities listed on the Drawings and shall beas manufactured by Mitsubishi.5. FANS5.1 EF-1: Centrifugal roof exhaust fans shall have statically and dynamically balancedcentrifugal wheel, direct drive or adjustable v-belt drive as scheduled, heavy gauge aluminumweatherproof housing, birdscreen over the air outlet, self-acting backdraft damper and a ULapproved safety disconnect switch mounted and wired. V-belt drives shall be designed for not lessthan 150 percent of the connected driving capacity. Adjustable sheaves shall provide not less than20 percent speed variation. Sheaves shall be selected to drive the fan at such a speed to produce thespecified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Fan wheels andmotors shall be isolated from the fan base with vibration isolators. Motors shall be provided withintegral thermal overload protection. Fans shall be provided with matching 12-inch highprefabricated curb (where fans are being installed in the same location as existing curbs, existingcurbs may be utilized if dimensions match new fans). A variable speed controller shall be providedwhere scheduled. Fans shall carry the UL label and be rated in accordance with AMCA test code.Capacities shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Fans shall be as manufactured by the Loren CookCo., <strong>Inc</strong>. with model numbers as scheduled.6. PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (RTU-1, 2, 3, 4)6.1 Air conditioning <strong>unit</strong>s shall be self-contained, down discharge, packaged, factoryassembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burners,controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan,differential enthalpy economizer and roof curb.6.1.1 Cabinets shall be galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or removableaccess panels with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type. Structural members shall beminimum 18 gauge, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.6.1.2 Cabinet insulation shall be one-inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber on surfaces whereconditioned air is handled. Protect edges from erosion.6.1.3 Heat exchangers shall be aluminized steel of welded construction.6.1.4 Supply fans shall be forward curved, centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-beltdrives, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor.6.1.5 Air filters shall be two-inches thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames.Project #: 3894 15100 - 2
6.1.6 Roof curb shall be continuous under <strong>unit</strong> and 12-inches high.6.1.7 Burner6.1.7.1 Gas burners shall be forced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply,pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shutoff, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensingdevice and automatic 100 percent shutoff pilot.6.1.7.2 Gas burner safety controls shall energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame,prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energizeblower motor and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open.6.1.8 Evaporator coil shall provide copper tubes and aluminum fins with galvanized drain panand connection.6.1.9 Compressors shall be hermetic or semi-hermetic type, 3600 RPM maximum with lowpressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves, gaugeports, filter drier, and five minute timed off circuit shall delay compressor start.6.1.10 Condenser section shall have coils with copper tubes and aluminum fins with subcoolingrows. Fans shall be direct drive propeller type, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overloadprotection and shall be wired to operate with compressor.6.1.11 Dampers shall be tight fitting, automatic dampers with edge gaskets and shaft extensions.6.1.12 Filters shall be two-inch throwaway 30 percent (MERV 8) filters rated in accordancewith ASHRAE 52-68.6.1.13 Units shall be complete with differential enthalpy economizer sections, including 100percent modulating, low leak outside air dampers and hood, modulating return air dampers,barometric relief dampers and minimum position setting. Sequence of operation controls shall be asspecified in Section 15500.6.1.14 Units shall be factory run tested and shall have capacity indicated on the Drawings.7. ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS (ECH-1 & 2)7.1 Wall heaters shall have steel finned tubular elements, 18 gauge steel grille with epoxypolyesterpowder paint finish, electric disconnect, integral thermostat, automatic reset thermalcutout, and totally enclosed fan. Units shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.8. ELECTRIC DUCT COILS (EDC-1, 2, 3)Project #: 3894 15100 - 3
8.1 Electric duct coils shall be open coil type, completely wired with operating controls anddisconnects.8.2 Heaters and panelboards shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code andshall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for zero clearance to combustible surfaces.8.3 Heating elements shall be open coil, 80 percent nickel, 20 percent chromium, Type "A"resistance wire. Coils shall be machine crimped into stainless steel terminals extending at least oneinchinto the airstream and all terminal hardware shall be stainless steel. Coils shall be supported byceramic bushings.8.4 Heater frames and terminal boxes shall be aluminized steel. Terminal box shall beNEMA 1 with a hinged, latching cover.8.5 Heaters shall have disc type, automatic reset thermal cutout for primary over-temperatureprotection. Heaters shall also have disc type, load carrying manual reset thermal cutouts.8.6 Heaters shall also include thermal cutouts, airflow switch, control circuit transformer(where required) and built-in, snap-acting, door interlocked disconnect switch and proportionalelectronic duct thermostat with setpoint adjuster.8.7 Heaters shall be Indeeco, Model "QUA" or approved equal.9. ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT RAILS - SUPPORTS9.1 Rooftop equipment rails shall be galvanized steel <strong>unit</strong>ized construction with base plate,continuously welded corners, seams, pressure treated wood nailer, counterflashing and lag screws.Rails shall be suitable for installation on the roof deck type encountered, shall be 12-inches high andshall extend a minimum of six-inches beyond the equipment to be supported. Contractor shallprovide continuous insulation on rails. Rails shall be provided for all rooftop equipment notspecified with curbs and shall be as manufactured by the Pate Company.9.2 Rooftop pipe and duct support curbs shall be 12-inches high, minimum, constructed of 18gauge <strong>unit</strong>ized construction with integral base plate, continuously welded corner seams, pressuretreated wood nailer and counterflashing with lag screws. Curbs shall be installed perpendicular tothe duct or pipe and shall extend six-inches beyond the duct or pipe in either direction. Supportsshall be Model "ES" as manufactured by Pate Company with the style as required to match theexisting roof construction.9.3 All piping shall be attached to the rooftop support curbs by means of a pipe mountingpedestal. Pedestal shall be complete with steel slide channel with support bracket, lateral adjustspacer bracket, continuous threaded rods, pipe roller, pipe retainer bracket and stainless steel lagbolts. Pipe mounting pedestal shall be as manufactured by Roof Product and Systems Corporation.Project #: 3894 15100 - 4
9.4 Rooftop pipe penetrations shall consist of a continuous curb assembly consisting ofheavy gauge galvanized steel with <strong>unit</strong>ized construction, integral base plate, three-pound densityinsulation and two by two nailer. Curb shall be provided with an acrylic clad thermoplastic coverfastening screws and graduated step boots with stainless steel clamps.10. WASTE OIL FURNACE (WOF-1 & 2)10.1 Waste oil furnace shall be specifically designed to burn used oils. Furnace shall use aburner that pre-heats the oil and regulates and optimizes combustion. Furnace shall utilize nonweldedflue tubes for long service life. Burner door shall be hinged for maintenance.10.2 Provide an eight inch b-vent thru the roof with a roof thimble assembly in accordancewith the manufacture’s instructions.10.3 Waste oil furnace shall be as scheduled on the drawings.11. THERMOSTAT MOUNTING HEIGHT11.1 Provide all new thermostats shall be in accordance with ADA requirements.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15100 - 5
SECTION 15200HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONINGDUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 15000 - HEATING, VENTILATING ANDAIR CONDITIONING, GENERAL shall apply to this entire Section and shall have the same forceand effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipmentand services necessary for and incidental to the installation of all ductwork and accessories.3. DUCTWORK, VENTS, BREECHING AND PRESSURE WASHER EXHAUST PIPE3.1 Ductwork shall be fabricated and supported in accordance with the latest publication ofSheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, <strong>Inc</strong>., (SMACNA) manual. Allrectangular elbows shall have single thickness turning vanes. All branch ducts shall be constructedwith 45 degree take-offs with balancing dampers. All duct joints shall be sealed airtight with ductsealer manufactured by Hard Cast <strong>Inc</strong>orporated of Dallas, Texas. All duct devices shall beconstructed of the same material as the duct in which they are installed.3.2 Duct supplies to grilles, registers and diffusers shall be installed to provide uniformairflow to the outlet. Provide control grids, volume extractors and/or turning vanes where two ductdiameters of straight ductwork cannot be provided to the outlet.3.3 All supply air, outside air intakes, return air and general exhaust ductwork shall begalvanized steel, constructed and installed for pressures up to two-inches. The first ten feet ofsupply and return ductwork connecting to each packaged air conditioning <strong>unit</strong> or rooftop airhandling <strong>unit</strong> shall be a minimum of four gauges heavier than the thickness recommended bySMACNA for the designed pressure. All exhaust and combustion air intake ducts located in thewash bay shall be aluminum..3.4 Control grids shall be constructed with individually adjustable louvers, shall be springtensioned to hold their setting and provide rattle-free performance with minimum noise andturbulence. Control grids shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork and shall be asmanufactured by Tuttle & Bailey.3.5 Volume extractors shall be constructed from two sets of individually adjustable blades toequalize flow and control volume to diffusers or registers. Volume control shall be accomplished byProject #: 3894 15200 - 1
the upstream blades and the downstream blades shall be adjusted for uniform flow to the diffuser orregister. Volume extractors shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork and shall be asmanufactured by Tuttle & Bailey.3.6 Flexible ductwork shall be UL 181 Class 1 complete with a 1-1/2-inch thick, R-5,insulating fiberglass blanket, foil faced vapor barrier and designed to withstand pressures up to sixinchespositive pressure w.g. Flexible duct runs shall be a maximum of five feet in length and shallbe Type 5M-Insulated as manufactured by Flexmaster USA, <strong>Inc</strong>.3.7 Exhaust vents for gas-fired appliances shall be double wall Type "B" gas. Vent shall becomplete with ventilated roof thimble, weather hood flashing and bird proof vent cap. Gas ventshall be installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and allgoverning code requirements, including NFPA 54.4. DUCT ACCESS DOORS4.1 Duct access doors shall be provided at all coils, fire dampers, balancing dampers,automatic dampers, smoke detectors and other apparatus requiring service or inspection. Doors shallbe constructed for the same static pressure class as the duct in which it is installed. Doors shall be18 x 18 inches unless duct size will not accommodate this size; then, the doors shall be made aslarge as practical. Doors in insulated ducts shall be of the insulated type with a minimum of oneinchof fiberglass insulation. Doors shall be rigid with neoprene gaskets for frame-to-duct andframe-to-door, continuous piano hinges and cam locks. Doors shall be as manufactured by Ruskin.Label all access doors associated with smoke dampers or fire dampers or combined smoke/firedampers with letters not less than 0.5-inches in height reading: "Smoke Damper," or "Fire Damper,"or "Fire/Smoke Damper" respectively.5. DIFFUSERS5.1 Ceiling diffusers shall be constructed of steel and be complete with opposed bladedampers. Diffusers shall be of the sizes and configurations as indicated on the Drawings. Diffusersshall have a baked-on enamel finish with manufacturer and model as indicated on the drawings.6. REGISTERS AND GRILLES6.1 Exhaust and return registers shall have fixed horizontal fins and be complete withopposed blade damper and plaster frames where required. Registers shall be steel construction andshall have a baked on enamel finish with color as selected by the Owner's Representative. Registersshall be of the configurations and sizes indicated on the Drawings. Register manufacturer and modelshall be as indicated on the drawings.6.2 Return and exhaust grilles shall have fixed, heavy duty, horizontal face bars and plasterframes where required. Grilles shall be heavy duty all steel construction and shall have a baked onProject #: 3894 15200 - 2
white enamel finish. Grilles shall be of the configurations and sizes indicated on the Drawings andshall be as indicated on the drawings.7. DAMPERS7.1 Balancing dampers shall be multiple opposed blade type in square or rectangular ductsand butterfly type in round ducts. Damper shall be complete with locking quadrants and accessibleoperating mechanisms. Operating mechanisms shall be of the elevated type where located ininsulated ducts. Dial regulators shall be Ventlok type, complete with die cast core, heavy gauge dial,3/32-inch steel handle, 1/4-inch dial, open/shut identification and accessories and be manufacturedby Ventfabrics, <strong>Inc</strong>. or approved equal. Provide elevated standoffs, matching insulation thicknessfor insulated ducts. Dampers shall be constructed of the same material as the duct in which they areinstalled except they shall be two gauges heavier. Individual blades in opposed blade dampers shallnot exceed eight-inches in width.7.2 Backdraft dampers in ductwork shall be extruded aluminum type designed for velocitiesup to 3500 FPM. Dampers shall have adjustable counterbalances. 0.125-inch wall thickness frame,0.070-inch wall thickness blades with vinyl edge seals and Zytel bearings. Dampers shall be RuskinType CBD6.7.3 Automatic dampers, also referred to as motor operated dampers, shall be as specified inSection: AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS and shall be installed by the MechanicalContractor.7.4 Fusible link fire dampers shall be UL labeled dynamic shutter type with the blade storagesection completely out of the air stream, conforming to NFPA. Dampers shall be installed in amanner to maintain the integrity of the fire partition. Dampers shall be complete with 22 gauge rollformed steel frame, 22 gauge steel blades, replaceable 165 degrees F fusible link, closure spring, andblade lock. All fire dampers shall be as manufactured by Air Balance <strong>Inc</strong>.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15200 - 3
SECTION 15400HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONINGINSULATION1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 15000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIRCONDITIONING, GENERAL shall apply to this entire Section and shall have the same force andeffect as if fully included herein.1.2 All insulations shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville, Owens Corning orArmstrong. The execution of the work shall be under the direct control and supervision of theinsulation manufacturer or his authorized representative, in strict accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions and recommendations, the best practice of the trade and the intent of theseSpecifications. All insulation shall be tested for Fire and Smoke Hazard Classification ratings inaccordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. Ratings shall not exceed FHC 25/50.1.3 Do not omit insulation where piping passes through sleeves or hangers. Provide agalvanized sheet metal protector on the exterior of the bottom half of the covering, between thecovering and the hanger, to prevent the hanger band from cutting into the insulation. High densityinsulation shall be used at each hanger. All piping shall be tested before insulation is applied orjoints left uncovered until the tests have been performed.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipmentand services necessary for and incidental to the installation of all insulation and accessories.3. ITEMS TO BE INSULATED ARE AS FOLLOWS:3.1.1 All refrigerant piping.3.2 Ductwork3.2.1 Supply ductwork and plenums.3.2.2 Return ductwork and plenums.3.2.3 Outside air ductwork and plenums.3.2.4 Exhaust air ductwork and plenums with ten feet of the roof penetration.4. INSULATION THICKNESSES SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:Project #: 3894 15400 - 1
4.1 PipingPIPE SIZETHICKNESSSYSTEMINCHESINCHESRefrigerant ≤ 1.5 14.2 DuctworkSYSTEMLOCATION INSULATION THICKNESS R VALUETYPE INCHESSupply Ductwork Concealed Blanket 2.0 6.0Supply DuctworkThe first ten feet ofsupply and return Duct Lining 1.5 6.0ductwork at all RTU’sSupply Plenums All Board 1.5 6.8Return Ductwork Concealed Blanket 2.0 6.0Return DuctworkThe first ten feet ofsupply and return Duct Lining 1.5 6.0ductwork at all RTU’sReturn Plenums All Board 1.5 6.8Exhaust Air Ductwork Concealed Blanket 2.0 6.0*Unconditioned space includes attics, crawl spaces and mechanical rooms.5. PREPARATION5.1 Surfaces prepared to receive insulation shall be clean, dry and free from extraneousmaterials. Do not apply insulation until systems have been tested, are free from leaks and have beenapproved.6. INSULATING MATERIALS6.1 Piping6.1.1 Refrigerant piping shall be insulated with a flexible closed cell insulation having athermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu-In/(Hr-Ft 2 -ºF) at 75 degree F mean temperature. Insulation shall beArmacell AP Armaflex pipe insulation. All joints and longitudinal seams shall be sealed withArmacell Armaflex 520 adhesive. Exterior pipe insulation shall be the same as interior insulationexcept insulation shall be painted with two coats of Armacell WB Armaflex finish.6.2 DuctworkProject #: 3894 15400 - 2
6.2.1 Concealed ducts shall be insulated with flexible fiberglass blanket insulation having analuminum foil facing reinforced with fiberglass scrim. Insulation shall have an installed R-value of3.0 per inch thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature and a density of one-pound per cubic foot.Insulation shall be secured to the duct with Childers CP-85 adhesive or mechanical fasteners. Jointsshall be sealed with sealing tape and adhesive. Insulation shall be Microlite Type 100 with FSKfacing.6.2.2 Plenums and exposed ducts shall be insulated with non-flexible fiberglass boardinsulation having an aluminum foil facing reinforced with fiberglass scrim. Insulation shall have athermal conductivity of 0.22 Btu-In/(Hr-Ft 2 -ºF) at 75 degrees F mean temperature and a density ofsix-pounds per cubic foot. Insulation shall be secured to ducts with adhesive or mechanicalfasteners. Joints shall be secured with sealing tape and Childers CP-85 adhesive or mechanicalfasteners. Insulation shall be 817 Spin-Glas with FSK facing.6.2.3 Duct acoustical lining shall be semi-rigid bonded board of glass fiber coated with a blackfire-resistant, acrylic polymer coating on the side toward the airstream. Insulation shall have athermal conductivity of 0.25 Btu-In/(Hr-Ft 2 -ºF) at 75 degrees F mean temperature and a density ofone and one-half-pounds per cubic foot. Lining shall be suitable for duct velocities up to 6,000 fpmand temperatures up to 250 degrees F. Duct acoustical lining shall meet the requirements of NFPA90-A with a flame spread rating less than 25 and a smoke spread rating less than 50 and bePermacote Linacoustic Standard as manufactured by Johns Manville. Dimensions of lined ductsgiven on the Drawings indicate the inside dimensions of duct after the lining has been installed.Duct lining shall be installed in accordance with the NAIMA "Duct Liner Installation Standard".Duct lining shall be adhered by 100 percent coverage of a fire retardant adhesive which conforms toASTM C 916. Duct lining shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners, which shallcompress the duct liner sufficiently to hold it in place. Mechanical fasteners shall be located withinthree-inches of a transverse joint, at a maximum of six-inches on center around the perimeter of theduct, except that they shall be placed not more than four-inches from a longitudinal joint of the liner.Mechanical fasteners shall not pierce the duct walls. The pins shall be cut off flush, washers shallbe used and installation made so that no gaps or loose edges occur in the insulation where the ductsare installed. Top pieces shall be supported by the sidepieces. Provide insulated built out frames forattaching turning vanes where required. All abutting edges of duct lining shall be caulked and allexposed edges shall be installed with sheet metal nosings.6.2.4 Duct insulation terminating at insulated and uninsulated sheet metal and equipmentsurfaces, supports, damper fittings, access doors, walls and similar penetration and constructionpoints shall be sealed with outdoor vapor-barrier coating. Where lengths exceeding 24-inches areinvolved, insulation shall be flashed with glass-cloth tape and sheet metal trimming. Glass-clothtape shall provide not less than three-inches overlap, shall be in two layers and shall be imbedded innot less than 1/16-inch dry-film thickness of outdoor vapor-barrier coating. Sheet metal trimmingshall be installed after glass-cloth jacket is in place.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15400 - 3
SECTION 15500HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONINGAUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS1 GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 15000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIRCONDITIONING, GENERAL shall apply to this entire section and shall have the same force andeffect as if fully included herein.1.2 Furnish and install an electronic Automatic Temperature Controls. The system shall becomplete in all respects including labor, materials, equipment and services necessary and shall beinstalled by personnel employed by the Control Manufacturer.1.3 All wiring for controls shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Unless notedotherwise, this Contractor shall furnish and install all control devices together with control wiring,conduit and all appurtenances and accessories necessary to perform the sequence of operationspecified. Wiring materials and installation shall conform to the National Electric Code.1.3.1 All input and output low voltage control wiring to the control <strong>unit</strong>s shall be #20 twistedcable.1.3.2 All cable splices shall have joints soldered and taped including the shield. Nomechanical connections will be acceptable.1.3.3 No digital input or output points shall be more than 250 feet from its respective panel.1.3.4 All connections within the panels must be made with connectors of appropriate size anddesign for the terminals being applied.1.3.5 All low voltage (30V and below) wiring above accessible, concealed and dry locationsmay be run in plenum-rated cable without conduit. All other wiring (low or high voltage) must berun in electric metallic tubing (EMT), 3/4-inch or greater.1.3.6 All wiring associated with the installation will be the responsibility of this Contractor,unless otherwise directed herein. The term "wiring" is construed to include furnishing of wire,conduit, miscellaneous material and labor as required to install a total working system.2 SCOPE2.1 This section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipmentand services necessary for and incidental to the installation of all automatic temperature controls.3 EQUIPMENTProject #: 3894 15500 - 1
3.1 Transformers shall be provided for electric or electronic controls. Each transformer shallbe connected to an electric circuit, which serves no other equipment. Spare circuits in electric panelsmay be used for controls. Control wiring shall not be connected to lighting circuits. When controlsserve an individual air handling <strong>unit</strong>, transformers may be connected to fan motor leads of the <strong>unit</strong>controlled. Controls shall be powered from circuits that are connected to emergency power circuits.3.2 Automatic Dampers3.2.1 Automatic dampers shall be factory fabricated and shall be provided by the temperaturecontrol manufacturer. The control damper shall be installed by the Contractor. All dampers shall befull duct/louver size unless indicated otherwise. All damper frames shall be constructed of 12 gaugegalvanized sheet metal or extruded aluminum of 12 gauge, 0.081-inch minimal thickness and shallhave flanges for duct mounting. The blades shall be parallel or opposed, as required and suitable forthe air velocities to be encountered in the system. Replaceable edge and end seals shall be providedwith damper, installed along the top, bottom and sides of the frame and each blade. Seals andbearings shall be able to withstand temperatures ranging from minus 40 degrees F to plus 200degrees F. Dampers shall be rated for leakage in the full closed position, at 50-pounds per squareinch torque applied by the control operator. Dampers shall not leak air at more than 20 CFM persquare foot at four-inch static pressure water gauge.3.3 Damper Actuators3.3.1 Actuators shall be of the push-pull type for either modulating or two-position control.Actuators shall stroke by a rotating motion of an overload-proof synchronous motor. Controlvoltage shall be either 24 VAC or zero to 20 VDC as required by the application. Actuators shall beavailable with spring return to the fully extended position upon power failure. Three point, floatingactuator shall be available with adjustable end switches. Minimum/maximum manual positionersshall be available for proportional motors.3.4 Thermostats3.4.1 Each rooftop <strong>unit</strong> shall be controlled by its own wall-mounted thermostat. Eachthermostat shall be seven day programmable type and shall have outputs for controlling othersystem components. Thermostat shall be model 7350 as manufactured by Honeywell.3.4.2 Provide new seven day programmable thermostats for new waste oil furnaces (WOF-1 & 2 – ADD ALTERNATE #M2).3.4.3 Provide new manual thermostats for all existing gas-fired infrared heaters. Test andrepair control wiring as required.3.4.4 Thermostats shall be mounted in accordance with ADA requirements.Project #: 3894 15500 - 2
4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION4.1 Rooftop <strong>unit</strong> RTU-1:4.1.1 When RTU-1 is in the ‘occupied’ mode, the outside air damper shall be open to itsminimum position, its supply fan shall run continuously and the heating and cooling sectionsshall function as required to maintain the space temperature. When RTU-1 is in ‘unoccupied’mode, the outside air damper shall close and the supply fan shall run with the heating andcooling sections as required to properly condition the space.4.1.2 The cooling portion of the thermostat shall actuate the compressor through the A/Cshut-off relay (provided by the E.C., installed by the M.C.) such that the compressor shall notfunction when the emergency generator is ‘on’ and is providing emergency back-up power to thebuilding. When the generator is ‘on’, the supply fan shall still function (cooling mode) andheating mode shall function normally.4.2 Rooftop <strong>unit</strong> RTU-2:4.2.1 When RTU-2 is in the ‘occupied’ mode, the outside air damper shall be open to itsminimum position, its supply fan shall run continuously and the heating and cooling sectionsshall function as required to maintain the space temperature. When RTU-2 is in ‘unoccupied’mode, the outside air damper shall close and the supply fan shall run with the heating andcooling sections as required to properly condition the space.4.2.2 The cooling portion of the thermostat shall actuate the compressor through the A/Cshut-off relay (provided by the E.C., installed by the M.C.) such that the compressor shall notfunction when the emergency generator is ‘on’ and is providing emergency back-up power to thebuilding. When the generator is ‘on’, the supply fan shall still function (cooling mode) andheating mode shall function normally.4.3 Rooftop <strong>unit</strong> RTU-3:4.3.1 When RTU-3 is in the ‘occupied’ mode, the outside air damper shall be open to itsminimum position, its supply fan shall run continuously and the heating and cooling sectionsshall function as required to maintain the space temperature. When RTU-3 is in ‘unoccupied’mode, the outside air damper shall close and the supply fan shall run with the heating andcooling sections as required to properly condition the space.4.3.2 The cooling portion of the thermostat shall actuate the compressor through the A/Cshut-off relay (provided by the E.C., installed by the M.C.) such that the compressor shall notfunction when the emergency generator is ‘on’ and is providing emergency back-up power to thebuilding. When the generator is ‘on’, the supply fan shall still function (cooling mode) andheating mode shall function normally.4.4 Rooftop Unit RTU-4 and Exhaust Fan EF-1Project #: 3894 15500 - 3
4.4.1 When RTU-4 is in the ‘occupied’ mode, EF-1 shall run continuously, the RTU-4outside air damper shall be open to its minimum position, its supply fan shall run continuouslyand the heating and cooling sections shall function as required to maintain the space temperature.When RTU-4 is in ‘unoccupied’ mode, EF-1 shall be ‘off’, the RTU-4 outside air damper shallclose and the supply fan shall run with the heating and cooling sections as required to properlycondition the space.4.4.2 The cooling portion of the thermostat shall actuate the compressor through the A/Cshut-off relay (provided by the E.C., installed by the M.C.) such that the compressor shall notfunction when the emergency generator is ‘on’ and is providing emergency back-up power to thebuilding. When the generator is ‘on’, the supply fan shall still function (cooling mode) andheating mode shall function normally.4.5 Provide a smoke detector in the return air duct of RTU-2 and 4 to shutdown these<strong>unit</strong>s upon detection of smoke.4.5.1 Safety Controls: Duct smoke detectors shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor andinstalled by the Mechanical Contractor. Where a duct smoke detector is located more than ten feetfrom the mechanical <strong>unit</strong> motor starter the Electrical Contractor shall provide a fire alarm controlmodule near the motor starter. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide protected wiring from theduct smoke detector or control module to the mechanical <strong>unit</strong> motor starter and interlock the motorstarter with the fire alarm system to shutdown the mechanical <strong>unit</strong> on detection of smoke. Theinterlock shall not be able to be overridden by the HOA switch, the ATC system or other controls.4.6 Wall fans and associated louvers: When wall fans are turned ‘on’, the respectiveautomatic air dampers on intake louvers in the room shall open fully. When the fan is ‘off’, theassociated automatic air dampers shall be closed.4.7 Compressor room fan: Provide a new wall mounted thermostat to control the exhaustfan in this room. When the room temperature is above 80 degrees F, the exhaust fan shall turn‘on’ and the associated louver on the intake louver shall open fully. When the room temperaturefalls to below 78 degrees F, the exhaust fan shall be ‘off’ and the associated automatic airdamper shall close.5 INSTRUCTION AND ADJUSTMENT5.1 On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall have completely adjusted theentire control system. Instruction on system operation shall be provided to the Owner'sRepresentative.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15500 - 4
SECTION 15600HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONINGCOMPLETION, TESTING AND BALANCING1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 15000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIRCONDITIONING, GENERAL shall apply to this entire section and shall have the same force andeffect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials andaccessories necessary for, but not limited to, the completion of the Contract, the required start up andfield service requirements and the testing and balancing of all equipment specified in the Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Sections of the Specification.3. SERVICE3.1 The Contractor shall, after acceptance, provide any service incidental to the properperformance of the systems during the warranty period outlined in Section 15000.3.2 The Contractor shall, upon completion of the installation, during the warranty period,make available to the Owner an annual Service Agreement covering all labor and material requiredto efficiently maintain the control system.4. FINAL CLEANING4.1 Remove soil, stain and adhered extraneous materials, caused by heating, ventilating andair conditioning work, from adjacent surfaces.4.2 Remove and replace items or materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned.5. BALANCING AND TESTING5.1 General5.1.1 The Contractor shall employ a balancing Contractor specializing in total system air andhydronic balancing, testing and commissioning. This balancing Contractor shall be certified byAssociated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environment Balancing Bureau (NEBB) andshall provide all labor, engineering and test equipment required to adjust and balance all heating,ventilating and air conditioning and exhaust systems as hereinafter specified. All personnel involvedin the execution of the work under the balancing contract shall be experienced and factory trainedProject #: 3894 15600 - 1
specifically in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of thebalancing Contractor. Balancing contractor shall review the drawings during the bid period.5.2 The air systems shall be balanced and reports issued as follows:5.2.1 Test and adjust blower RPM to design requirements.5.2.2 Test and record motor full load amperes.5.2.3 Traverse main supply ducts and obtain design airflows at fans.5.2.4 Test and adjust design outside airflow.5.3 Test and record the following for each coil:A. Entering air temperatures (DB heating/cooling)B. Entering air temperatures (WB cooling)C. Leaving air temperatures (DB heating/cooling)D. Leaving air temperatures (WB cooling)5.4 Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design airflow.5.5 Adjust all zones to proper design supply and return airflow.5.6 Test and adjust each diffuser and register to within ten percent of design requirements.5.7 Provide and balance with branch duct balancing dampers where needed to prevent noisewhen balancing the system.5.8 Identify each grille, diffuser and register as to location, size and type. Manufacturer'sratings on all equipment shall be used for required calculations.5.9 Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required FPM velocityand rest resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments.5.10 In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representatives setting adjustments ofautomatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated and/or noted.5.11 All diffuser, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas.5.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for any changes in pulleys, belts and dampers at noadditional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish and install additional dampers as requiredfor correct balance as recommended by the air balance company.Project #: 3894 15600 - 2
5.13 Three certified copies of the final balancing report bearing the seal of the supervisor ofthe certified firm shall be submitted on applicable report forms for review. Each individual finalreport form submitted shall bear the name of the person who recorded the data.6. EQUIPMENT START-UP6.1 Provide equipment start-up report, including checklist confirming manufacturer'sstart-up procedure has been followed in its entirety.7. COMPLETION7.1 Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all his excess materials,machinery and equipment from the premises and replace all filters.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15600 - 3
SECTION 15700PLUMBINGGENERAL1. GENERAL1.1 Applicable requirements of the Contract Documents, preceding the technicalSpecifications, apply to this Section. In the event of conflict between the Specifications, the moststringent shall apply.1.2 Separations of these Specifications into divisions and sections is for convenience onlyand is not intended to establish limits of work.1.3 Consult index to be certain that set of documents and Specifications is complete. Reportomissions or discrepancies to the Owner’s Representative.1.4 The Contractor shall employ high standards of good workmanship and shall pay specialattention to the safety of the equipment. The installation of material and equipment shall be inconformance with the codes and standards listed in Paragraph: STANDARDS. The agency havingthe most stringent requirements shall be adhered to.1.5 The Contractor shall make a thorough examination of the site and shall make dueallowances for difficulties and contingencies to be encountered. All dimensions shall be checkedand verified by the Contractor at the site.1.6 The Contractor and all Sub-Contractors shall have a minimum of three years provenexperience on projects with similar levels of complexity and magnitude. Experience shall be basedon the experience as a company and not on the experience as individuals.1.7 The Drawings and Specifications are intended to function as a common set of documents.Anything shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications, or mentioned in theSpecifications and not shown on the Drawings, shall be equally binding as if both noted on theDrawings and called for in the Specifications.2. SCOPE2.1 The work covered by and included in these Specifications consists of the furnishing of allmaterials, all equipment, labor, tools and supervision and performing all operations necessary for theproper and complete execution of the Plumbing work in strict accordance with the Specificationsand the Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.3. DEFINITIONSProject #: 3894 15700 - 1
3.1 The term "Contractor" or "Plumbing Contractor" when used in this Specification refers tothe Contractor responsible for all work under this Section.3.2 The term "Provide" refers to this Contractor purchasing, delivering and installing as apart of this Contract.3.3 The term "ATC" refers to Automatic Temperature Controls.4. STANDARDS4.1 Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the latest edition of allcodes and standards, as adopted by the local authority having jurisdiction, including those listed.4.1.1 American National Standards Institute Standards (ANSI)4.1.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)4.1.3 American Society for Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM)4.1.4 American Welding Society Standards (AWS)4.1.5 American Water Works Association (AWWA)4.1.6 International Plumbing Code 20094.1.7 National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)4.1.8 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)4.1.9 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, <strong>Inc</strong>. (SMACNA)4.1.10 Underwriter's Laboratories Publication (UL)4.1.11 Regulations of the Pennsylvania State Police, Fire Marshall Division4.1.12 Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry, Fire and Panic Regulations4.1.13 Public Law 101-336, The Americans with Disabilities Act of 19904.2 Should any change in the Drawings and/or Specifications be required to conform to thecodes, ordinances, regulations or laws mentioned above, the Owner’s Representative shall benotified prior to the time of submitting bids.5. NOTIFICATIONProject #: 3894 15700 - 2
5.1 Trades that have work connected with the Plumbing work and trades that do preparatorywork for Plumbing shall be notified for installation requirements and scheduling.5.2 The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the installation schedule to allowsufficient time for inspection without any work delay.5.3 All work shall be coordinated to avoid cutting of work in place and interfering with otheroperations.5.4 In compliance with Act 38, contact individual companies to have utility locations markedin the field and to otherwise locate underground objects as may be necessary prior to the start ofconstruction. State law requires three working days notice for the construction phase and tenworking days in design stage. Call Pennsylvania One Call System, <strong>Inc</strong>. (1-800-242-1776, as of thiswriting).6. CONTRACT DRAWINGS6.1 Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the relation of piping, ductwork,connections and equipment. The Drawings do not indicate all offsets, elbows and fittings that maybe required. Therefore, the Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditionsaffecting the work. The Contractor shall furnish all offsets, elbows, fittings, hangers and accessoriesas may be required to meet these conditions at no additional cost to the Owner.6.2 Do not scale the Drawings. The Contractor shall check conditions at the site fordimensions and sizes pertaining to the structure.6.3 Do not deviate from the Drawings without prior approval.7. LINES, GRADES AND SURVEYS7.1 All necessary surveys, lines, grades and measurements are the responsibility of theContractor desiring the information for the proper installation of his work. The Contractor isresponsible for the proper installation of the work with respect to other Contractors.7.2 Grades, elevations and locations shown on the Drawing are approximate and theContractor shall check all such information on the site before proceeding with the work.8. WORKMANSHIP8.1 All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, fixtures, etc. shall be installed meeting theaccepted standards of the representative industry.8.2 All work to be performed shall be done by qualified mechanics. All mechanics in theemploy of this Contractor on this project shall be skilled in the phases of the work to which they areused. The mechanic's affiliation with labor organizations shall be acceptable to all trades employedon the project.Project #: 3894 15700 - 3
9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES9.1 Transmit each submittal with an Owner’s Representative accepted form. <strong>Inc</strong>lude onecopy each for the Owner and the Owner’s Representative in addition to copies required byContractor.9.2 Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals shall have original number withan alphabetic suffix.9.3 Identify Project, Contractor, Sub-Contractor or Supplier; pertinent drawing sheet anddetail number and specification section number, as appropriate.9.4 Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification ofproducts required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work and coordination of information isin accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.9.5 <strong>Inc</strong>omplete submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of providing a complete andfunctional system.9.6 Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Coordinate submission of related items.9.7 Submittals by the Contractor must be in complete compliance with the ContractDocuments unless exceptions are identified. Exceptions to the Contract Documents may only bemade to improve the project. Exceptions cannot be taken which would provide an incomplete and/ornonfunctional system.9.7.1 Exceptions must be included in/on the submittal in a separate paragraph or drawing blocklocated below the Contractor's stamp identified by the title "Exception to Contract Documents."Exceptions cannot be part of the standard Contractor's stamp.9.8 Provide space for Contractor and Owner's Representative review stamps.9.9 The Owner’s Representative will return shop drawings with the following designations:A. Reviewed: Further submission not required.B. Reviewed as Noted: Corrections must be incorporated in final installation.Further submission not required unless specifically noted.C. Review Not Required: Placed in project files for information only.D. Revise and Resubmit: Make necessary changes and resubmit prior to fabrication.E. Rejected: Does not meet project requirements. Resubmit in accordance withContract Documents.9.10 Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previoussubmittal.Project #: 3894 15700 - 4
9.11 Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties topromptly report any inability to comply with provisions.10. SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA10.1 Submit shop drawings and/or catalog cuts for all specified equipment.10.2 Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of relatedsystems, products and accessories in a single submittal.10.3 Mark dimensions and values in <strong>unit</strong>s to match those specified.10.4 Show equipment sizes and locations, by dimensions, of ducts, equipment and other items.10.5 <strong>Inc</strong>lude wiring diagrams, hole location and sizes and other data that could affect work byother trades.10.6 Show manufacturer's names, trade names, catalog numbers, accessories, special featuresand rating data.10.7 Indicate required clearances for operating parts, for removal and for servicing.10.8 Show performance data, including pump curves.10.9 Show sound power levels of all rotating equipment.11. SUBSTITUTIONS11.1 Any bidder wishing to substitute "or equal" equipment may request a substitution.Manufacturers which are submitted as substitutions for approved equal status are considered to haveequipment of similar quality; however, the Contractor shall not assume that a piece of equipment bya manufacturer submitted as a "substitution" will be automatically accepted. Compliance with theDrawings and Specifications is still required. If the substituted material is considered to beunacceptable, the Contractor shall provide the equipment as originally specified.11.2 Substitutions are encouraged when there is a significant cost savings or an improvementto the project. Submit reasons for changes with any requests for substitution.11.3 Bid alternates shall be clearly defined on the bid forms in order to be evaluated during thebidding process.11.4 By submitting an alternate or substitution, the Contractor automatically agrees to thefollowing:Project #: 3894 15700 - 5
A. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any additional costsincurred by the Owner’s Representative to review the substituted materials, inaccordance with the then current Owner’s Representative's hourly rate.B. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any additional costsincurred by the Owner’s Representative for field or office conferences caused bythe substituted materials shall be paid by the Contractor in accordance with thethen current Owner’s Representative's hourly rate.C. The consideration of alternates/substitutions does not obligate the Owner’sRepresentative to accept same.D. In the event a brand is approved and substituted, it is the responsibility of theContractor to so coordinate his substituted material into the original work at noextra cost to the Owner or any other Contractor.12. CUTTING AND PATCHING12.1 In new construction, the Contractor shall give the General Contractor completeinformation as to size of openings required in floors and walls, etc., so that such openings may beprovided as the project progresses. In existing construction, the Contractor shall do his own cuttingand patching required for the installation of his work.12.2 If openings are omitted or are incorrect through failure of the Contractor to follow theseinstructions, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, engage the trade which originally installed thework, to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.12.3 All cutting and patching of every nature required in connection with this Contract shallbe done by the Contractor with mechanics experienced in their respective lines of work. Allpatching shall match adjacent finishes.12.4 All cutting in the building shall be done with great care so as not to leave an unsightlysurface, which may not be concealed by plates, escutcheons or other normal concealing construction.If such unsightly conditions occur, the Contractor shall be required at his own expense, to engagethe General Contractor to replace the damaged materials with new materials.13. CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORK13.1 Unless otherwise noted, all concrete bases, reinforcing, etc. and masonry work requiredto install the respective Contract Work shall be furnished and installed by the respective Contractor.13.2 The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and tools necessary tocomplete concrete work.13.3 All concrete work shall comply with the requirements of the ACI Building Code (ACI318), the ACI Detailing Manual (ACI 315) and the Specifications for Structural Concrete forBuildings (ACI 301).Project #: 3894 15700 - 6
13.4 All reinforcing steel shall be manufactured from high strength billet steel conforming toASTM Designation A-615, Grade 60. WWF shall comply with ASTM A-185.14. MATERIALS14.1 All materials and equipment provided by this Contractor shall be new, withoutimperfections and blemishes and shall be protected from the elements prior to installation in thebuilding.14.2 All equipment shall be tested, listed and labeled by an approved authority (UL, AGA,ETL) and shall be installed in accordance with its listing.14.3 All equipment subject to specific requirements of the Owner's insurance company (gastrains, etc.) shall meet the insurance companies requirements.15. METHODS15.1 The Plumbing Contractor shall confer with all other Contractors and shall apply fordetailed and specific information regarding the location of all equipment as the final location maydiffer from that indicated on the Drawings. Piping or equipment improperly placed because of thePlumbing Contractor's failure to obtain this information shall be relocated and reinstalled by thePlumbing Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.15.2 Each Contractor, upon request of the Owner’s Representative, shall expedite the work ofa specific area, section or part of the project to permit the installation of another part of the work.15.3 All piping, accessories and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to preserveaccess with sufficient space provided for proper operation and maintenance to any existingequipment or to any new equipment installed under this Specification or under other Specificationsor Contracts for this building.15.4 This Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of other trades so that all work maybe installed in the most direct manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, equipment,architectural or structural features will be avoided. In the case interference results, the Owner’sRepresentative shall decide which work is to be relocated, regardless of which is first installed.Such relocation shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.15.5 All materials and equipment installed by the Contractor shall be firmly supported andsecured to the building structure where required.15.6 All items of labor, material and equipment not specified in detail or shown on theDrawings but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete and proper installation and properoperation of the work described herein or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall befurnished as if called for in detail by the Specifications or Drawings.Project #: 3894 15700 - 7
15.7 The Contractor shall provide isolation valves and unions or flanges at all pieces ofequipment and at all branch take-offs serving five or more pieces of equipment to facilitatereplacement or service of the equipment.15.8 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendationsand installation instructions. The manufacturer's installation recommendations and instructions shallbe considered part of this Contract.15.9 Any questions regarding means or methods of construction shall be addressed during thebidding phase of the project.16. SCHEDULING OF WORK16.1 The Contractor shall attend all planning meetings, provide scheduling information andwork with all trades to obtain a workable project schedule that meets the Owner's requirements.17. PROTECTION17.1 Each Contractor shall effectively protect his work and materials with tarpaulins or heavyplastic material against dirt, water, chemicals, plaster or damage during the entire period ofinstallation or until he is directed to remove the coverings by the Owner’s Representative. Anydamaged material must be removed and replaced by the Contractor without additional costregardless of the cause of the damage. All openings in pipes, fittings, etc., must be effectively sealedto exclude dirt, sand and other foreign substances.18. PROTECTION OF OWNER'S EQUIPMENT18.1 The Contractor shall provide any temporary work required to protect the Owner'sequipment and to contain the dust generated during construction. Any measures taken by theContractor for the protection of equipment shall be installed to the satisfaction of the Owner or theOwner’s Representative, which may include any and all provisions listed in DIVISION-1 GeneralRequirements and/or in accordance with the appropriate technical specifications for wood andplastics in DIVISION-6. An approved protection material is nylon reinforced flame retardant andanti-static Griffolyn T-75 ASFR 8 mil film.19. PROTECTION OF EXTERIOR PIPING19.1 Water, sanitary and stormwater piping installed below grade outside the building shall beinstalled with a minimum cover as stated in the plumbing code and/or in accordance with all localrequirements.19.1.1 As a minimum, water piping shall be installed six inches below the frost line.19.1.2 As a minimum, sanitary, stormwater, fuel gas and fuel oil piping shall be installed withtwenty-four inches of cover.Project #: 3894 15700 - 8
20. WORK IN THE EXISTING BUILDING20.1 The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly surveying the existingbuilding to determine the extent and cost of installing new equipment and materials in the existingbuilding.20.2 All new equipment and materials shall be installed in the existing building as hereinspecified.20.3 All Contractors before starting any cutting of the present building, must first obtainapproval from the Owner’s Representative on the site before cutting at each location. ThisContractor shall provide any temporary work required to retain the dust generated by his work asmay be directed by the Owner’s Representative. All dust found, which has escaped the area ofcutting, shall be properly removed by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.20.4 All openings cut into the exterior of the existing structure must be completely sealed andwaterproofed before leaving the job site each day. This shall be done by the Contractor responsiblefor the cutting.20.5 Contractor should not assume utilities can be installed as shown. Drawings arediagrammatic and utilities may need to shift to accommodate existing conditions. It is believed thatin general the project can be constructed with utilities in approximately the locations as shown.20.6 <strong>Construction</strong> phasing could require installation of some temporary feeds and systemshutdowns to accommodate construction.21. RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP21.1 Each Contractor is responsible for periodic removal of all rubbish resulting from hiswork. All surplus material, refuse, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the job site at completion ofContract. The Owner’s Representative must be satisfied with the removal and clean-up.22. DELIVERING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT22.1 Deliver accessories, small unmarked parts, adhesives and incidental items to site inmanufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers.22.2 Store materials and equipment to prevent damage and injury. Store ferrous materials toprevent rusting. Store equipment to prevent staining and discoloring.23. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS23.1 During construction, the Contractor shall maintain a record set of red lined installationprints. He shall record on these prints, all deviations from the Contract Drawings in pipe sizing, ductsizing, equipment, pipe or duct location, depth of pipe cover and details.Project #: 3894 15700 - 9
23.2 At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer this information onto one setof prints and onto computer generated construction documents and forward the as-built prints and anelectronic copy to the Owner's Representative. Electronic copies of mechanical drawings, withouttitle blocks, will be made available to the Contractor in AutoCAD version 2004.24. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS24.1 Prior to completion of this project, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner'sRepresentative for approval three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual consisting ofitems outlined hereinafter.24.2 The purpose of this manual is to assist the Owner in routine operation, maintenance,servicing, troubleshooting and procurement of replacement parts. All information in the manualshall be as-built and only material pertinent to the project shall be included.24.3 The manual shall include the following:24.3.1 Manuals shall be bound, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages and set in three-ring binders withdurable covers.24.3.2 Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS," title of project and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.All subject matter shall be in typewritten format.24.3.3 Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logicallyorganized as described below; with tab labeling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastictabs.24.3.3.1 Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume with product or systemdescription identified, type on white paper.24.3.3.2 Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of Owner'sRepresentative, Contractor, Sub-Contractors and major equipment suppliers.24.3.3.3 Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided byspecification section. For each category, identify names, addresses and telephone numbers of Sub-Contractors and suppliers. Operating and start-up instructions shall be written in a concise step-bystepmanner. Maintenance instructions shall include maintenance schedules, procedures,adjustments and trouble-shooting techniques. All non-pertinent information in the manuals shall beeither eliminated or crossed out in a neat and thorough manner. Identify the following:A. List of equipmentB. Parts list for each componentC. Operating instructionsD. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systemsProject #: 3894 15700 - 10
24.3.3.4 Part 3: Project Documents and certificates, including the following:A. Corrected shop drawings and product dataB. Control wiring diagramsC. CertificatesD. Photocopies of warrantiesE. Valve tag list24.3.3.5 Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 30 days prior to final inspection.This copy will be returned after final inspection, with the Owner's Representative’s comments.Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.24.3.3.6 Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after Owner's review.25. IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT25.1 Label concealed and exposed piping not more than 25 feet on centers and adjacent to allvalves and equipment for easy identification. This does not apply to control compressed air,underground pipe or pipe located within walls. Show flow arrows and medium conveyed in thepipe. Labels shall conform to ANSI A13.1 for color, letter size and marker length.25.2 Identify equipment with permanent plates giving name of item, manufacturer's name andoperating characteristics.25.3 Show, for items with moving parts, complete information regarding lubricating materialsand frequency of lubrication.25.4 Valve tags shall be provided on all valves. Tags shall be two inches in diameter, brass,Style 300-BL as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation. Each tag shall be securelyfastened to the valve stem with brass "S" hooks. Additional tags shall be fastened on ceiling tiles oraccess doors to further identify concealed valves.25.4.1 Each tag shall be stamped showing the system name, valve identification number,function and position (i.e., N.O., N.C., Balancing Two-Way, Modulating, etc.).25.4.2 The Contractor shall provide a typewritten valve list segregated by systems, showingvalve number, equipment served or system function and location in building by room and nearestcolumn. The list should be on 8-1/2 x 11 inch paper bound in plastic binder and three copiessubmitted to the Owner or the Owner’s Representative for approval and after approval, six copies forfinal information.26. PAINTING26.1 Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified; allmarred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished to a smooth and uniform finish.Project #: 3894 15700 - 11
26.2 All exposed ferrous metalwork, pipe, supports, hangers, insulation and other surfaces notfactory painted shall be painted with one prime and two finish coats. Paint, surface preparation andapplication shall be as specified in Section: PAINTING. Colors shall match existing work or shallbe as selected by the Owner’s Representative.27. LAWS, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS27.1 All systems in all and/or part shall conform to all pertinent laws, ordinances andregulations of ALL bodies having jurisdiction, at all governing levels. In case of conflict betweengoverning levels, the more stringent law shall apply. As a minimum, all work shall comply withIMC, IBC, NFPA, OSHA and Pennsylvania Labor and Industry requirements.27.2 The Contractor shall pay all fees, prepare and submit all utility applications and obtainand pay for all permits, inspections andcertifications required for his work, including L&I pressurevessel installation plans, inspections and approvals.28. BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS AND FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES28.1 Provide expansion joints in piping where they cross building expansion joints.28.2 Meet all requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories and all applicable codes formaintaining the integrity of all fire rated assemblies.29. ACCESS DOORS29.1 The Contractor shall provide access panels/access doors for access to valves, balancingvalves or cocks, water hammer arrestors, cleanouts or any other equipment or component requiringaccess for maintenance, adjustment or service wherever these items are concealed in building walls,partitions or ceilings. Frames shall be anchored in walls, partitions or ceilings and shall be set trueto lines of the building and flush with the finished surfaces. Access panels/access doors shall be asspecified in the General <strong>Construction</strong> Sections of the Specifications.30. FASTENING, SUPPORTS AND HANGERS30.1 All fastenings, supports, hangers, miscellaneous steel, clamps and anchors shall be typemade for specific purpose to be used; toggle bolts or machine bolt fastenings shall be used forhollow tile, terra cotta or lath construction; machine screws shall be used for structural steelfastenings; lead expansion shield and machine screws or lag screws shall be used for solid masonryfastening; lag screws shall be used for wood fastening; all equipment and piping shall be rigidly andfirmly installed to prevent swaying, vibrating or sagging by malleable or wrought steel hangers ofstandard design, pipe clamps or fabricated steel supports of approved design; hangers of horizontalpiping runs shall be adjustable clevis type; perforated strap iron hangers and caddy clips are notpermissible.31. SOUND PARTITIONSProject #: 3894 15700 - 12
31.1 Contractor shall be responsible to identify all sound partitions indicated on thearchitectural plans. Contractor shall seal all penetrations through the wall to maintain the soundabsorption integrity of the partition. Note: the ceiling of the air compressor room is insulated tominimize sound transmission; seal all pipe penetrations.32. CONCRETE INSERTS32.1 The Plumbing Contractor shall provide and install concrete inserts of an approved carbonsteel wedge-type for all hangers. Where two or more parallel pipes are installed continuous insertsmay be used. Where required to distribute the load on the inserts, a piece of reinforcing steel ofsufficient length shall be passed through the insert. Each insert shall include a knockout piece.Inserts shall have a minimum safety factor of five.33. SLEEVES33.1 The Plumbing Contractor shall provide and install sleeves where required to protectequipment or facilities in the installation. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wall,or partition and shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise required.33.2 Sleeves in bearing and masonry walls, floors and partitions shall be of standard weightsteel pipe finished with smooth edges. For other masonry partitions, through suspended ceilings andfor concealed vertical piping, sleeves shall be No. 22 U.S.G. galvanized iron.33.3 All sleeves shall be properly installed and securely cemented in place.33.4 Floor sleeves shall extend one inch above the finished floor. Space between floor sleevesand passing conduit shall be caulked with an approved graphite packing or waterproof caulkingcompound.33.5 Where pipes pass through waterproofed floors or walls, design of sleeves shall be suchthat waterproofing can be flashed into and around the sleeves.33.6 Where piping or conduits pass through fire resisting portions of the structure, the annularspace between the sleeve and the pipe or conduit shall be filled with an approved fire stoppingmaterial as required to maintain the fire rating of that portion of the structure.33.7 See architectural drawings for fire ratings of building components.34. FIRE STOPPING34.1 The contractor shall be responsible to provide and install fire-stopping materials and/orsystems where his work penetrates fire and/or smoke rated portions of the building and non-fireresistance-rated assemblies. All materials used shall be manufactured such that they are intended toresist the spread of fire and the passage of smoke. This includes but is not limited to rated walls,floors, shafts, ceilings, and non-fire resistance-rated horizontal assemblies. All fire stoppingProject #: 3894 15700 - 13
materials used shall have a fire resistance rating equal to or greater than the rated assembly forwhich they are installed.34.2 For locations where the installed fire stopping material is exposed to normal view, thecontractor shall conceal the material with chrome-plated escutcheon plates or other materials thathave a flame-spread value of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, asdetermined per ASTM E 84. The owner's representative prior to installation shall approve theconcealing device. Provide shop drawings for each device.34.3 The contractor shall provide components/accessories for each fire-stopping system thatare needed to install fill materials and to comply with all system performance requirements asrecommended by the fire stopping material manufacturer. Accessories include but are not limited to:mineral wool insulation, ceramic fiber, sealants used to aid in the formation of the fire stoppingmaterials, fire-rated formboard, joint fillers and sealers, collars and steel sleeves.34.4 Fire stopping materials and systems shall include, but are not limited to, the following:fire barrier caulk and sealants, intumescent caulk, intumescent putty, intumescent wrap strips,silicone foams and sealants, fire barrier composite sheets and cast-in-place fire barrier systems.34.5 Fire stopping materials and systems shall as manufactured by 3M Fire ProtectionProducts, Hilti Corporation, ProSet Systems <strong>Inc</strong>.35. ANCHOR BOLTS35.1 The Contractor shall provide and set in place, at the time of pouring of concretefoundations, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the equipment called for in theseSpecifications. Anchor bolts shall be of the hook type, of proper size and length to suit theequipment. Anchor bolts shall be set in pipe sleeves of approximately twice the bolt diameter andone half the embedded length of the bolt. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for propercoordination and placement of the bolts. Upon completion of equipment installation, pipe sleevesshall be caulked in accordance with Paragraph, "Sleeves," in this Section of the Specifications.36. DEMOLITION36.1 The Contractor shall perform all demolition work as indicated on the Drawings and asdescribed below as part of this Contract.36.2 The Contractor shall cut and patch as required to perform the demolition work. Allopenings created must be repaired to match existing conditions.36.3 All cutting and patching shall be performed by mechanics experienced in their respectiveline of work. If the Owner’s Representative is not satisfied with the quality of work, the Contractorshall be required, at his own expense, to engage the General Contractor to replace the damagedmaterials with new materials.Project #: 3894 15700 - 14
36.4 The Owner shall be given the opport<strong>unit</strong>y to retain ownership of all removed materialsand equipment. All such items shall be carefully handled and protected and shall be stored by thisContractor at the site as directed by the Owner. Any such materials and equipment not desired bythe Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed promptly from theproject site. Disposal shall be in accordance with the regulations of the authorities at the disposalsite.37. WARRANTY37.1 The systems specified herein shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanshipand material under normal use and service for a period of one year (five years for all compressors)from date of substantial completion.37.2 If, within the aforementioned warranty period, any of the materials specified herein isproven to be defective in any way, it shall be replaced or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.The warranty shall include the providing of all labor and materials necessary for repair orreplacement of any defective components. The Contractor is responsible for the costs of anyservices required by equipment suppliers that are not included in the suppliers' warranties.37.3 The Contractor shall, after acceptance of the installation by the Owner or the Owner’sRepresentative, provide any service incidental to the proper performance of the systems under thewarranties outlined above for the time periods listed above.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15700 - 15
SECTION 15750PLUMBINGVEHICLE MAINTENANCE SYSTEMSCOMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMSMATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 15700 - PLUMBING, GENERAL shall applyto this entire Section and shall have the same force and affect as if fully included herein.1.2 All equipment of like kind shall be of one manufacturer and shall be installed in strictaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.1.3 The Contractor shall make final connections between all piping and equipment furnishedunder this Contract with services furnished under another Contract or with existing services, as thecase may be.1.4 Due to the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings,access panels and similar parts, which may be required. The Drawings are generally diagrammaticand indicative of the work to be installed. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structuraland finish conditions affecting the work and arrange all work accordingly furnishing necessary partsand equipment as may be required to meet the various conditions.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specification includes all equipment and materials described hereinand/or shown on the Drawings that are necessary for the complete Plumbing System. Equipmentand materials shown on the Drawings or necessary for the proper installation and/or functioning ofthe equipment shown on the Drawings, or described hereinafter but not specifically mentioned inthese Specifications, shall be construed to be a part of the Contract.2.2 The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, tools, accessories and labor toinstall all equipment properly. He shall make all final connections to equipment furnished underother Contracts or by Owner which require connections normally a part of plumbing work.3. PIPING MATERIALS3.1 COMPRESSED AIR3.1.1 Galvanized Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A53.3.1.1.1 Fittings: Galvanized Malleable iron, ASME B16.3; forged steel (welded), ASTM A234.Project #: 3894 15750 - 1
3.1.1.2 Joints: Threaded or welded.3.2 VEHICLE MOTOR OIL PIPING3.2.1 Seamless steel tubing (5/8”x.035)3.2.1.1 Fittings: all steel compression, as manufactured by Weatherhead Ermetto series orParker. No “o” ring or split sleeves may be used. All 90-degree transitions will have a radius bend.90-degree compression elbows may be utilized where necessary.3.2.1.2 Joints: compression3.3 VEHICLE CHASSIS GREASE PIPING3.3.1 Seamless steel tubing (5/8”x.083)3.3.1.1 Fittings: all steel compression, as manufactured by Weatherhead Ermetto series orParker. No “o” ring or split sleeves may be used. All 90-degree transitions will have a radius bend.90-degree compression elbows may be utilized where necessary.3.3.1.2 Joints: compression3.4 WASTE OIL PIPING3.4.1 Seamless Schedule 40 black steel ASTM A-106 Grade B for piping above grade andSchedule 80 black steel ASTM A-106 Grade A or Type K soft copper for piping below grade.3.4.1.1 Fittings for Schedule 40 pipe shall be 150 pound butt welding seamless steel ASTMA 234 and 300 pound butt welding seamless steel ASTM A234 for Schedule 80 pipe.3.4.1.2 Pipe below grade shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter by wire brushing andsolvent cleaning and then coated with hot applied bituminous coal tar.4. VALVES AND DEVICES4.1 Check valves shall be all bronze, 'Y'-pattern type with renewable seat and disc, sweatedor threaded ends, suitable for 200 PSI working pressure.4.2 Provide a heavy-duty, in-line compressed air pressure regulator at each point of useconnection. Regulator shall be completely adjustable to accurately supply the proper air pressure.Regulator adjustment shall be lockable to prevent accidental adjustment. Provide a pressure gaugeto read pressure downstream of the regulator for each installation. Coordinate regulator type andfinal adjustment pressure requirements with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations(coordinate with owner in the field). Regulators shall have a working pressure of 200 PSI minimum.Project #: 3894 15750 - 2
4.3 Automatic drain trap assembly model T-O manufactured by Zeks Compressed AirProducts or equal. Install with a manual shut-off to isolate drain trap from the system formaintenance without taking the air system component out of service.4.4 Pressure gauges shall be commercial/industrial grade type with a four inch diameter face(2.5 inch at connection to equipment at point of use), 304 stainless steel face, liquid filled,polycarbonate window, black figures and black aluminum pointer on a white background, 0.25 inchNPT brass connection, 0 to 250 PSI scale with brass gauge cock for use with compressed airsystems.4.4.1 Provide gauges on all pressure vessels, inlet and outlet of each pressure reducingvalve, pump and where indicated.4.5 Medium pressure hose reels shall be heavy duty rated for extreme use and will beconstructed utilizing double side arm supports, double journal bearings with full flow portingthrough the hub. The reel will have a minimum of 16-locking positions. The outlet hose guidearm shall be tangential.4.5.1 The reel assembly shall include 50’x1/2” 3,000 psi working pressure dispense hose,2’x1/2” 3,000 psi working pressure inlet connecting hose for motor oil4.5.2 The reel assembly will include 50’x3/8” 4,000 psi working pressure dispense hose,2’x3/8” 4,000 psi working pressure inlet connecting hose for chassis grease4.5.3 The reel assembly will include60’x1/2” 3,000 psi working pressure dispense hose,2’x1/2” 3,000 psi working pressure inlet connecting hose for compressed air4.5.4 Ball Valves for compressed air: FS WW-V-35, brass or bronze body, double-sealball valves with replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and stem seals for minimum 300 PSIworking pressure, flange or union mounting, labeled for intended service; Model 5595,manufactured by NIBCO or approved equal.4.5.5 The grease shutoff valve shall be high-pressure needle.4.5.6 The motor oil reels (2) shall include a mechanical preset dispense meter (nobatteries). Both meters to include a semi-automatic dispense nozzle.4.5.7 The grease control will be heavy-duty all-steel construction and will include a “z”swivel and a 18” whip hose with coupler. The reels (2-total for mo, 2-total for chassis grease &5-total for air) and related accessories will be as manufactured by balcrank corp model number2111-011(oils), 2111-007 (chassis grease) and 2111-012 (air) or approved equal.5. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT5.1 Simplex two-stage, air-cooled reciprocating type air compressor with ASME ratedtank shall be Model HRA-25-12, manufactured by Champion. Compressor shall be completeProject #: 3894 15750 - 3
with a mounted air-cooled aftercooler.5.2 Air compressor shall be capable of delivering 90.1 CFM at 175 PSIG. Air receivershall be ASME rated and shall be a vertical type with 125 gallon capacity. Compressors andmotor shall be mounted to the top of the tank and shall be complete with one air pressure gauge(0-300 PSIG), one ASME safety relief valve, one air discharge service valve and two manualdrain valves (side and bottom).5.3 Compressor shall be driven by a 25 HP motor. Each motor shall run at 770 RPM andshall be 208V, three phase, 60 cycles. Motor/compressor drive assembly shall be complete withan OSHA drive guard. Each motor shall have a magnetic motor starter mounted on thecompressor assembly.5.4 Accessories:5.4.1 A refrigeration type air dryer shall be used to further remove moisture from thesupply air. Dryer shall be Model HTB-100, manufactured by Zeks. Air dryer shall be 2/3 HP,115V, single phase.5.4.2 In-line filters shall be Model ZTF-100-P (pre-coalescing) and Model ZTF-100-G(coalescing), manufactured by Zeks. Provide four additional replacement elements for eachfilter.5.4.3 Provide 4” housekeeping pad and vibration isolator pads for air compressor and allequipment.5.4.4 Provide four additional filter cartridges for each filter assembly.6. VEHICLE MOTOR OIL DISPENSING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT6.1 Motor oil #1 – Utilize the existing 1500 gallon lube cube tank, provide modifications asrequired for connection of distribution piping and pump set.6.2 Motor oil #2 - Furnish a 280 gallon UL-142 double-wall, rectangular Lube Tank, 5’1.0”long x 2’4.5” wide x 3’3.5” deep. Tank shall conform to and be labeled in accordance withUnderwriters Laboratories Standard UL-142 for double-wall tanks.6.2.1 Double-wall tank shall be of all welded construction, fabricated of 12 gauge thick mildcarbon steel for the inner tank. Standard construction utilizes lap joints with continuous filletweld on all outside seams only. Tank shall include five 2" forged steel fittings and one 4" or 6"forged steel fitting or an 18" loose-bolt manhole for emergency venting.6.2.2 Tank will include a swing arm level gauge, leak detection gauge, (2) emergency ventsand a lockable fill/vent cap.6.2.3 Fabrication shall include 2" high supports welded to the tank underside, providing groundProject #: 3894 15750 - 4
clearance for visual inspection.6.2.4 Standard tank coating is red primer.6.2.5 Highland tanks are air tested at the factory but MUST be retested at the jobsite by theinstaller prior to installation.6.2.6 Highland Tank shall fabricate tank: Stoystown, PA; Manheim, PA; Watervliet, NY; orGreensboro, NC.6.3 MOTOR OIL DISPENSING PUMP SYSTEM6.3.1 Pumps for motor oil 1 and motor oil 2 shall be pneumatically driven 5:1 ratio carbon steelstub design. The pump will include built-in exhaust and pressure relief. The air valve will bemechanical driven with no external “spool” valving. The air motor will be 2.50” diameter with amin of 5.5 gpm free flows. The air piston rod will be stainless steel and the pump will have a 5-year warranty. the pump will mount to the tank bung utilizing a double tap bushing which willfacilitate future pump service. The pumps will include ¼” filter, regulator w/gauge andlubricator; 3’ air hose, 5’ fluid outlet hose, air coupler & nipple, air & fluid shutoff valves, andsuction tube and suction check valve. The pump and related accessories shall be as manufacturedby Balcrank Corporation, Model number 1130-016 or approved equal.7. VEHICLE GREASE DISPENSING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT7.1 Furnish a 55-gallon storage tank.7.2 Furnish a lube oil dispensing pump system7.2.1 Pump for chassis grease shall be pneumatically driven 50:1 ratio carbon steelconstruction. The air valve will be mechanical driven with no external “spool” valving. The airmotor will be 2.44” effective diameter with a delivery of 3.4 lbs per min. The air piston rod willbe stainless steel and the pump will have a 5-year warranty. The pump will include a drum coverand a weighted follower plate with lifter for a factory 400lb drum product, ¼” filter, regulatorwith gauge and lubricator, 5’ air hose, 10’ connecting hose, air coupler & nipple and air and fluidshutoff valves. The pump and related accessories shall be as manufactured by BalcrankCorporation, Model number 1151-006 or approved equal.8. WASTE OIL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT8.1 Furnish a 1,500 gallon UL-142 Type S double-wall, rectangular waste oil storage tank,8’1.5” long x 5’0.5” wide x 5’0.5” deep. Tank shall conform to and be labeled in accordancewith Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL-142 for double-wall tanks.8.1.1 Double-wall tank shall be of all welded construction, fabricated of 7-gauge thick mildcarbon steel for the inner tank. Standard construction utilizes lap joints with continuous filletweld on all outside seams only. Tank shall include five 2" forged steel fittings and one 4" or 6"Project #: 3894 15750 - 5
forged steel fitting or an 18" loose-bolt manhole for emergency venting.8.1.2 Tank will include a swing arm level gauge, leak detection gauge, (2) emergency ventsand a lockable fill/vent cap.8.1.3 Fabrication shall include 2" high supports welded to the tank underside, providing groundclearance for visual inspection.8.1.4 Standard tank coating is red primer.8.1.5 Highland tanks are air tested at the factory but MUST be retested at the jobsite by theinstaller prior to installation.8.1.6 Highland Tank shall fabricate tank: Stoystown, PA; Manheim, PA; Watervliet, NY; orGreensboro, NC.8.2 Waste oil evacuation will be performed by (1) station centrally located and will include a1” dual diaphragm pump, wall mount and 20’ suction hose assembly, outlet connecting hose, ¼”filter - regulator w/gauge, inlet strainer and dry-break coupler. provide a tank level line shutoff(not pump air shutoff) to protect against tank over-fill. the system will include led’s for power(green), tank near full caution (yellow) and line shutoff (red). the main control will be locatedwithin the managers office. Provide a remote indicator light, which will be located at theevacuation pump location to alert the operator of near full caution (yellow) and line shutoff (red).the pumps and related accessories will be as manufactured by balcrank corp model number1120-013 and the tank level line shutoff system as manufactured by haldeman equipmentcompany. Provide a low profile waste oil truck drain with matching dry-break coupler and nipplefor evacuation. the drain will have a minimum capacity of 26 gallons and will include internalbaffles and upper screen. the drain and accessories will be as manufactured by balcrank corpmodel number 4120-006 or approved equal.9. UNIONS9.1 Unions shall be installed adjacent to all equipment, special valves or wherever theirpresence will facilitate the removal of such equipment. Provide dielectric type unions betweendissimilar piping materials.10. ESCUTCHEONS10.1 All exposed plumbing short branch connections to fixtures and/or equipment passingthrough walls or floors shall be equipped with pressed brass, chromium plated, solid-typeescutcheons.11. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS11.1 Compressed Air, Motor Oil, Grease and Waste Oil Piping:Project #: 3894 15750 - 6
11.1.1 Shall conform to pipe manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM F708.11.1.2 Hangers for pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 inches shall be malleable iron or carbon steel,adjustable, split ring type.11.1.3 Hangers for pipe sizes two inches and larger shall be carbon style, adjustable, clevis type.11.1.4 Trapeze hangers shall be steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.11.1.5 Wall support for pipes up to three inches shall be cast iron hooks.11.1.6 Wall support for pipes larger than three inches shall be a welded steel bracket andwrought steel clamp.11.1.7 Vertical support shall be a steel riser clamp.11.1.8 Floor support shall be a cast iron pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange and concretepier or steel support.11.1.9 Copper pipe support shall be an adjustable carbon steel ring, copper plated.11.1.10 All hangers and supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated.11.1.11 Perforated straphangers shall not be permitted.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15750 - 7
SECTION 15800PLUMBINGMATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 15700 - PLUMBING, GENERAL shall applyto this entire Section and shall have the same force and affect as if fully included herein.1.2 All equipment of like kind shall be of one manufacturer and shall be installed in strictaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.1.3 The Contractor shall make final connections between all piping and equipment furnishedunder this Contract with services furnished under another Contract or with existing services, as thecase may be.1.4 Due to the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings,access panels and similar parts, which may be required. The Drawings are generally diagrammaticand indicative of the work to be installed. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structuraland finish conditions affecting the work and arrange all work accordingly furnishing necessary partsand equipment as may be required to meet the various conditions.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specification includes all equipment and materials described hereinand/or shown on the Drawings that are necessary for the complete Plumbing System. Equipmentand materials shown on the Drawings or necessary for the proper installation and/or functioning ofthe equipment shown on the Drawings, or described hereinafter but not specifically mentioned inthese Specifications, shall be construed to be a part of the Contract.2.2 The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, tools, accessories and labor toinstall all equipment properly. He shall make all final connections to equipment furnished underother Contracts or by Owner which require connections normally a part of plumbing work.3. PIPING MATERIALS3.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING - INSIDE THE BUILDING3.1.1 "L" and "K" Type copper, ASTM-B-88, hard drawn. Type "K" copper shall be used onall underground piping.3.1.1.1 Fittings: Wrought copper.3.1.1.2 Joints: Soldered (lead-free); ASTM B32, B813. Brazed; AWS A5.8.Project #: 3894 15800 - 1
3.2 SANITARY AND VENT PIPING - UNDERGROUND, WITHIN THE BUILDING3.2.1 Service weight cast iron hub and spigot, ASTM A74.3.2.1.1 Fittings: Service weight cast iron, (DWV pattern, long sweep elbows) ASTM A74.3.2.1.2 Joints: Hub and spigot with neoprene push-on compression gaskets, ASTM C564 andASTM C1563.3.2.1.3 Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast IronSoil Pipe Institute.3.2.2 DWV Copper, ASTM B306.3.2.2.1 Fittings: Wrought copper; cast brass.3.2.2.2 Joints: Soldered (lead-free); ASTM B32, B813. Brazed; AWS A5.8.3.2.3 Schedule 40 PVC**, ASTM-D2665, D2949.3.2.3.1 Fittings: PVC.3.2.3.2 Joints: Solvent weld.3.2.3.3 All thermoplastic pipe installed underground shall be installed in accordance with ASTMD 2321.3.3 SANITARY AND VENT PIPING - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN THE BUILDING3.3.1 Service weight cast iron, ASTM A74, No-Hub service weight cast iron ASTM A888 orCISPI 301.3.3.1.1 Fittings: Service weight cast iron (DWV pattern, long sweep elbows) ASTM A74. No-Hub (DWV pattern, long sweep elbows) ASTM A888 or CISPI 301.3.3.1.2 Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast IronSoil Pipe Institute.3.3.1.3 Joints: ASTM A1277, CISPI 3010 No-Hub with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeveand stainless steel shield and clamp assembly.3.3.2 DWV Copper, ASTM B306.3.3.2.1 Fittings: Wrought copper; cast brass.3.3.2.2 Joints: Soldered (lead-free); ASTM B32.Project #: 3894 15800 - 2
3.3.3 Schedule 40 PVC*,**, ASTM-D2665, D2949.3.3.3.1 Fittings: PVC.3.3.3.2 Joints: Solvent weld.3.4 EXTERIOR SANITARY PIPING - BELOW FINISHED GRADE3.4.1 Service weight cast iron hub and spigot, ASTM A74.3.4.1.1 Fittings: Service weight cast iron (DWV pattern, long sweep elbows) ASTM A74.3.4.1.2 Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast IronSoil Pipe Institute.3.4.1.3 Joints: Hub and spigot with neoprene push-on compression gaskets; ASTM C564 andASTM C1563.3.5 PUMPED SANITARY PIPING - INSIDE THE BUILDING3.5.1 Galvanized steel, Schedule 40; ASTM A53.3.5.1.1 Fittings: Galvanized steel, screwed.3.5.2 DWV Copper, ASTM B306.3.5.2.1 Fittings: Wrought copper; cast brass.3.5.2.2 Joints: Soldered (lead-free); ASTM B32, B813.*PVC piping shall not be used in return air plenum ceilings or fire-rated ceiling assemblies. TheContractor shall review the architectural and mechanical Drawings to determine these locations.**PVC pipe shall not be used without written authorization from the authority having jurisdictionand the local fire marshal.3.6 FUEL GAS PIPING - ABOVE FINISHED GRADE, OUTSIDE THE BUILDING3.6.1 Steel, Schedule 40; ASTM A53 with factory applied protective coating.3.6.1.1 Fittings: Malleable iron; ASME B16.3 with factory field wrap protective coatings andwrapping.3.6.1.2 Joints: Screwed for pipe sizes up to three inches I.D. Flanged and bolted for pipe sizesgreater then three inches I.D. Welded.Project #: 3894 15800 - 3
NOTE: All piping and joints on exterior fuel gas piping shall be protected againstcorrosion in an approved manner per 2006 International Fuel Gas Code. (Zinccoatings and galvanizing are not deemed adequate.)3.7 FUEL GAS PIPING - INSIDE THE BUILDING (ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR/GRADE)3.7.1 Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A-53.3.7.1.1 Fittings: Malleable iron, ASME B16.3 (in accordance with the National Fuel Gas Code).3.7.1.2 Joints: Screwed up to three inches I.D., flanged for piping larger than three inches I.D.Welded; brazed in concealed areas (in accordance with the National Fuel Gas Code).3.7.2 All hangers and supports for fuel gas piping shall be in accordance with National FuelGas Code (NFPA 54).3.7.3 All fuel gas piping materials, joints and installation requirements shall be in accordancewith the National Fuel Gas Code and all local requirements.NOTE: All gas piping sizes listed on the Drawings are piping I.D.4. VALVES AND DEVICES4.1 Ball valves up to two (2) inches for water distribution piping systems shall be two-piece,full-port ball valves with brass construction, PTFE seats, chrome-plated brass ball, sweated orthreaded ends suitable for 125 PSI working pressure.4.2 Gate valves up to four (4) inches for water distribution piping systems shall be full-port,non-rising stem gate valves with brass body, brass trim, screwed union bonnet, soldered or threadedends and suitable for 125 PSI working pressure.4.3 Check valves shall be all bronze, 'Y'-pattern type with renewable seat and disc, sweatedor threaded ends, suitable for 125 PSI working pressure.4.4 Circuit setters shall be of the bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and carbonfilled TFE seat rings. Valves shall have integral valved read-out ports across valve seat area,adjustment knob and calibrated nameplate with memory stop indicator and positive stopconstruction. Circuit setter shall be Bell & Gossett, Model CB (or approved equal).4.5 Gas shutoff valves shall have a quarter-turn operation and shall be AGA approved forsystem pressure. Install in accordance with the National Fuel Gas Code requirements.4.6 Gas pressure regulating valves shall be the size and type required by the appliance andthe local gas supplier. Valves shall be AGA approved.Project #: 3894 15800 - 4
4.7 Gas pressure regulating valves for gas systems that exceed 14 inches W.C. (0.5 PSIG): Agas pressure regulating valve is required to be installed, in addition to the regulator supplied with theequipment, for each piece of equipment that is connected to the gas piping system (unless notedotherwise on the Drawings). A regulator shall be installed at each piece of equipment just upstreamof the regulator that is supplied with the equipment. Each regulator shall be capable of reducing thehigh pressure in the supply line down to 11 inches W.C. Each regulator shall be individually ventedto outside the building in accordance with the National Fuel Gas Code and all local requirements.Gas pressure regulating valves shall be as manufactured by Maxitrol (or approved equal) and shallbe sized in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.4.8 Vacuum relief valve (water heaters only) shall be bronze construction with a siliconedisc. Maximum water pressure, 200 pounds; maximum water temperature, 250 degrees F; Model36A, manufactured by Watts.4.9 Pressure gauges shall be commercial/industrial grade type with a four inch diameter face, 304 stainless steel face, liquid filled, polycarbonate window, black figures and black aluminumpointer on a white background, 0.25 inch NPT brass connection, zero (0) to 200 PSI scale with brassgauge cock for use with pressurized systems. All gauges shall be provided with a brass gauge cock.As Manufactured by U.S. Gauge, Moeller, Weiss or approved equal.4.9.1 Provide gauges on all pressure vessels, inlet and outlet of each pressure reducingvalve, pump and where indicated.4.10 Thermometers shall be separable-socket type, seven inch scale, industrial glass type,with scales suitable for the intended service, and provided with extension necks where surfacesare insulates; as manufactured by U.S. Gauge , Moeller, Weiss or approved equal.4.10.1 Provide thermometers on the outlet of circulating pumps, hot water heaters, andwhere indicated on the drawings.5. VACUUM BREAKERS5.1 Where a water supply to a fixture is installed below the overflow or there is a possibilityof back siphonage, the water supply shall be installed with a vacuum breaker.6. UNIONS6.1 Unions shall be installed adjacent to all equipment, special valves or wherever theirpresence will facilitate the removal of such equipment. Provide dielectric type unions betweendissimilar piping materials.7. TRAPS (FOR DRAINS)7.1 Separate deep seal "P" traps shall be installed for all drains, fixtures, etc., that are not of atype with integral traps or are not called for to be supplied with a trap. Traps located undergroundshall be provided with cleanouts extended to the finished floor.Project #: 3894 15800 - 5
8. ESCUTCHEONS8.1 All exposed plumbing short branch connections to fixtures and/or equipment passingthrough walls or floors shall be equipped with pressed brass, chromium plated, solid-typeescutcheons.9. TRAP PRIMER9.1 Provide trap seal primer valve where deemed necessary by the local authority. Theinstallation of a sealing component on the fixture drain outlet to reduce trap seal loss shall bepermitted in lieu of a trap primer where approved by the local authority.9.1.1 Trap primers shall be Model PR-500 ("Prime-Rite"), manufactured by PrecisionPlumbing Products, <strong>Inc</strong>. Trap primer distribution <strong>unit</strong>s shall be used where one trap primer is toserve more than one trap. Distribution <strong>unit</strong>s shall be Model DU Series manufactured byPrecision Plumbing Products, <strong>Inc</strong>. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.9.2 Trap sealing component shall be ProSet Trap Guard, manufactured by ProSet Systems.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.10. CLEANOUTS10.1 As a minimum, provide cleanouts every 50 feet on storm and sanitary drains which arefour inches and smaller. Provide cleanouts at 100 feet maximum spacing on all drains larger thanfour inches.10.2 Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast iron ferrule with bronze plug, bronze access frameand non-skid cover; Model ZB-1400-HD or ZB-1402-HD, manufactured by Zurn. Mount in 12 x 12x 8 inch block of concrete.10.3 Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron, gas and water tight bronze plug, twopiece body and adjustable nickel bronze top, round with scoriated cover in service areas and roundwith depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas; Model ZN-1400-BP; Z-1400-BP-X, manufactured by Zurn.10.4 Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round gas andwater tight cover, bronze plug and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw;Model Z-1441, manufactured by Zurn.10.5 Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type of the same material asthe pipe. Cleanout plug shall be gas and watertight.10.6 All cleanouts shall be installed in accordance with the plumbing code enforced by theauthority having jurisdiction.Project #: 3894 15800 - 6
11. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS11.1 ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable foroperation in temperature range -100 degrees F to 300 degrees F and maximum 125 PSIG workingpressure; Series Z-1700, manufactured by Zurn. Water hammer arrestors shall be installed atlocations shown on the Drawings and at all water lines serving fixtures and equipment that utilizequick-closing valves (i.e.: flush valve water closets and urinals, washing machines, dishwashers,etc.). All water hammer arrestors shall be installed in accessible locations to allow easy access forrepair or replacement. Provide an access door when water hammer arrestor is located behind a wallor above a hard ceiling.12. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS12.1 Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosionresistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with<strong>intermediate</strong> atmospheric vent; Model 709, manufactured by Watts.13. INSULATION13.1 All cold water, hot water, hot water recirculation, fittings, backflow preventers, valvesand strainers shall be insulated with materials having a "K" factor of 0.27 at 75 degrees F meantemperature, a flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. Allinsulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM E-84. All insulation shall be continuous athangers and supports (the pipe shall not contact the hanger or support) except where pipe anchorsand guides are installed. At these locations the anchor and/or guide shall be completely insulatedback to a distance that is at least four pipe diameters from the pipe. Insulation shields shall be usedto keep the insulation from compressing significantly under the weight of the pipe.Thickness:- Cold Water and Hot Water Runouts up to 2" = 1/2" thick- Cold Water Mains up to 1" = 1/2" thick- Cold Water Mains 1-1/4"-2" = 3/4" thick- Hot Water Mains up to 2" = 1" thickMaterials:- Vapor barrier all service jacketed fiberglass with fittings covered with pre-shapedplastic covers.- Foamed cellular flexible elastomeric insulation with miter cut fittings with vaporbarrier jacket (for thickness up to one inch).equal.Manufacturers:- Certainteed, Manville, Owens Corning, Knauf, Armstrong, Rubatex or approved14. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSProject #: 3894 15800 - 7
14.1 Cold Water, Hot Water, Hot Water Recirculation, Sanitary, Vent and Gas Piping:14.1.1 Shall conform to pipe manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM F708.14.1.2 Hangers for pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 inches shall be malleable iron or carbon steel,adjustable, split ring type.14.1.3 Hangers for pipe sizes two inches and larger shall be carbon style, adjustable, clevis type.14.1.4 Trapeze hangers shall be steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.14.1.5 Wall support for pipes up to three inches shall be cast iron hooks.14.1.6 Wall support for pipes larger than three inches shall be a welded steel bracket andwrought steel clamp.14.1.7 Vertical support shall be a steel riser clamp.14.1.8 Floor support shall be a cast iron pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange and concretepier or steel support.14.1.9 Copper pipe support shall be an adjustable carbon steel ring, copper plated.14.1.10 All hangers and supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated.14.1.11 Insulation shields shall be used at all hangers and supports used to support insulated pipe.All shields shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be 18 gauge by twelve inches long forpiping up to three inches, 16 gauge by twelve inches long for piping four inches in diameter, 16gauge by eighteen inches long for piping six inches in diameter, fourteen gauge by twenty fourinches long for piping eight inches in diameter and twelve gauge by twenty four inches long forpiping larger than eight inches in diameter.14.1.12 Perforated strap hangers shall not be permitted.14.1.13 All piping located on the roof shall be supported by rooftop pipe support curbs, 12 incheshigh, minimum, constructed of 18 gauge <strong>unit</strong>ized construction with integral base plate, continuouslywelded corner seams, pressure treated wood nailer and counterflashing with lag screws. Curbs shallbe installed perpendicular to the pipe and shall extend six inches beyond the pipe in either direction.Supports shall be Model ES as manufactured by Pate Company with the style as required to matchthe existing roof construction. All rooftop piping supports shall be approved by the roofingmanufacturer to maintain the roof warranty.14.2 All piping shall be attached to the rooftop support curbs by means of a pipe mountingpedestal. Pedestal shall be complete with steel slide channel with support bracket, lateral adjustProject #: 3894 15800 - 8
spacer bracket, continuous threaded rods, pipe roller, pipe retainer bracket and stainless steel lagbolts. Pipe mounting pedestal shall be as manufactured by Roof Product and Systems Corporation.15. FLASHING15.1 All pipes passing through roof shall be flashed in accordance with the roofingmanufacturer's recommendations. Flashing as described will be the responsibility of this Contractor.16. GAS WATER HEATER16.1 Furnish and install commercial gas water heater where shown on the drawings inaccordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Water heater shall be UL listed andAGA certified as an automatic storage type <strong>unit</strong> and ASME stamped working pressure. Water heaterstorage tank shall meet or exceed the thermal efficiency and standby loss requirements of ASHRAEstandard 90.1b-200116.2 Commercial gas-fired direct vent water heater shall be automatic, natural gas-fired,vertical storage type with glass lined welded steel tank; inspection port; thermally insulated to meetASHRAE standard 90A-1980 with minimum one inch glass fiber, encased in corrosion-resistantsteel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs; brass water connections and dip tube;drain valve; high-density magnesium anode and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.Unit shall be approved by AGA as automatic storage water heaters. Units shall have automaticthermostats with temperature ranges adjustable from 100 degrees F to 180 degrees F; gas pressureregulators, multi-ribbon or tubular burners, 100 percent safety shutoffs; flue baffle; draft hood;intermittent electric ignition and automatic flue damper with interlock to prevent operation withdamper closed.16.3 The water heater shall be suitable for sealed combustion direct venting using a four inchdiameter ABS air intake pipe and four inch diameter ABS exhaust pipe for a total distance of 75equivalent feet of vent and 75 equivalent feet of intake. The power direct vent closed combustion<strong>unit</strong> shall utilize external air for combustion and exhaust directly to the outside through a separatetwo-pipe system, which shall be capable of being vented unbalanced up to 20 feet. The heater shallbe factory assembled and tested.16.4 The water heater to have storage capacity of not less than 65 gallon, a minimum gas inputof 65,000 BTU/HR and a minimum recovery of 63 GPH at 100 degrees F rise. Water heater shall beModel PDX-65S-3N as manufactured by Bradford White, Set water heater to operate at 140 degreesF.17. EXPANSION TANK17.1 Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME specifications, rated forworking pressure of 125 PSIG, with flexible diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.For use with potable water systems.17.2 Model ST-12X-C manufactured by Amtrol.Project #: 3894 15800 - 9
18. HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP18.1 In-line circulating pump with bronze body, glass filled polypropylene impeller, stainlesssteel shaft and carbon sleeve bearings 52 watts, 115 volts, single phase; Model Series NBF-10S/LW,manufactured by Bell and Gossett. Pump shall be capable of pumping 1 GPM at 13.5 feet totaldynamic head.18.2 Pump control shall be by an adjustable seven-day line voltage time clock and aquastat.Aquastat shall be line voltage and shall be adjustable from 100 degrees F to 150 degrees F.Coordinate wiring with the Electrical Contractor.19. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE19.1.1 Thermostatic tempering valve shall be constructed of solid brass. The valve shallfeature paraffin-based actuation technology and have union connections for ease of maintenance.All internal parts shall be corrosion-resistant. Valve shall feature integral checks to preventcross-flow and inlet screens to filter out debris. The valve assembly shall be capable ofmaintaining water temperature to set point within the parameters set forth in ASSE 1017. Valveshall perform to a minimum flow of 0.5-gpm and control temperature between 60 degree F to120 degree F.20. OIL SEPARATOR (ADD ALTERNATE #P5)20.1 Oil separator shall be constructed of welded steel with integral waste oil storagecompartment, Model OST-5658-500, as manufactured by Rockford Sanitary Systems, <strong>Inc</strong>. with 525static holding capacity and 500 gallon integral oil storage compartment, 350 GPM intermittent flow,optional four inch inlet and outlet and three inch vent connections, adjustable oil draw-off, visibledouble-wall outside trap seal, removable filter screen, non-removable separator screen, 3/8 inchnonskid diamond tread plate cover for flush-with-floor installation reinforced for light traffic, coversecured with stainless steel bolts, extra heavy leak proof gasket. Acid resistant coating inside andbituminous coating outside. Separator shall be installed with the following options: hold-down slab,sediment basket, integral extension, and 120-volt high-level sensor alarm.21. HOT WATER PRESSURE WASHER21.1 Base Bid: Provide service and reconditioning of the existing gas-fired hot waterwasher <strong>unit</strong>. All work shall be performed by factory service technicians of the Hotsy EquipmentCompany, contact Mr. Jim Turley, 1-800-344-6879. This work shall include reconnecting bothcold and hot water washers and reinstalling two cable trolley systems, one for each pressurewasher.21.2 Add Alternate #P2: Provide new gas-fired hot water pressure Washer, Model 992SS,and cable trolley system, model 50.0331, as manufactured by the Hotsy Equipment Company.22. PLUMBING FIXTURES - GENERALProject #: 3894 15800 - 10
22.1 Fixtures shall be of the type and quality indicated. Fixtures shall be complete with allnecessary trim and appurtenances necessary for a complete installation. All exposed trim and pipingshall be 17-gauge chrome-plated brass. Trim includes one-piece chrome-plated escutcheons on allexposed water supply and waste piping penetrating walls or floors. All supply piping shall bevalved at each fixture. Stop valves shall be chrome-plated brass with 'T'-handle and loose-keyoperator for all fixtures located in an area accessible to the general public.22.2 Fixtures shall be set plumb and square. Unless otherwise indicated, fixtures shall be purewhite finish.22.3 Fixtures shall be turned over to the Owner in a new and cleaned condition.22.4 FIXTURES AND MISCELLANEOUS TRIM22.4.1 Water Closet (P-1)22.4.1.1 ANSI A112.19.2; vitreous china floor mounted fixture with close coupled tank (1.6GPF), elongated siphon action jetted bowl, three inch non-adjustable flapper-free flush valve, fullyglazed trapway, china bolt caps and 16.5 inch rim height; Model 2386.010, manufactured byAmerican Standard.22.4.1.2 Seat: Solid white plastic with open front.22.4.1.3 Fixture shall be in accordance with ADA requirements.22.4.2 Lavatory (P-2)22.4.2.1 Basin: ANSI/ASME A117.1/a112.19.2 - shall be American Standard Lucerne, Model0355.012, 20 x 18 wall hung, white vitreous china lavatory with front overflow, d-shaped bowl, selfdrainingdeck with contoured back and side splash shields and faucet ledge with faucet holes on 4-inch centers.22.4.2.2 Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with aerator, hard-wired, sensoroperation; Model ETF - 600, manufactured by Sloan. Faucet shall be hard-wired through a lowvoltage transformer plug-in transformer (Sloan Model ETF-233), to be provided by contractor.Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor.22.4.2.3 Provide a 17-gauge chrome-plated trap and waste piping with escutcheon and chromeplatedbrass grid strainer fitting with tailpiece. Provide chrome-plated hot and cold water supplies,stop valves and escutcheons.22.4.2.4 Insulate trap, waste piping and water supplies below fixture with Trubro "Handi-Lav-Guard" (or approved equal) in accordance with ADA requirements.22.4.2.5 Fixture and trim installation shall be in accordance with ADA requirements.Project #: 3894 15800 - 11
22.4.3 Shower (P-3)22.4.3.1 Enclosure: By General Contractor22.4.3.2 Trim: Pressure balance mixing valve with checkstops, hand shower, flexible hose, 36inch chrome grab bar/slide bar system and vacuum breaker; Model P910-2-W, manufactured byPowers. Mount in accordance with ADA requirements.22.4.3.3 Trim: Furnish and install a stainless steel curtain rod. Shower shall be in accordance withADA requirements.22.4.4 Sink (P-4)22.4.4.1 Bowl: ANSI A112.19.3; single compartment 25 x 22 x 8 inch outside dimensions, 18gauge, Type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming with undercoating, 3-1/2 inch drain opening, withthree faucet holes; Model LR-2522, manufactured by Elkay.22.4.4.2 Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, with aerator,single lever handle; Model LK-4100, manufactured by Elkay.22.4.4.3 Trim: Provide a 17-gauge chrome-plated trap and waste piping with escutcheon. Providechrome-plated hot and cold water supplies, stop valves and escutcheons.22.4.4.4 Trim: Stainless steel drain and strainer shall be Model LK-99, manufactured by Elkay.22.4.5 Electric Water Cooler (P-5)22.4.5.1 Fountain: ARI 1010; Self-contained two station wall hung electric water cooler, selfclosingeasy-touch controls on front, left and right of each <strong>unit</strong>, stainless steel basin, galvanizedstructural steel chassis with stainless steel shrouds, Safety bubbler with Flexi-Guard infused antimicrobialstream guard, automatic stream regulator, mounting bracket, refrigerated with integral aircooled condenser; capacity of eight gallons/min. of 50 degrees F water (based upon 80 degrees Finlet water and room temperature of 90 degrees F) with 370 watts compressor; Model EZSTL8C,manufactured by Elkay.22.4.6 Service Sink (P-6)22.4.6.1 Bowl: ANSI A112.19. Relocate/reinstall existing vitreous china service sink, clean andrefurbish per the manufacturers instructions for cleaning and re-glazing as required.22.4.6.2 Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; provide a new chrome-plated, backsplash mounted service sinkfaucet with built-in stops, vacuum breaker, lever handles, wall brace, 3/4 inch hose outlet and pailhook; Model B-0665-BSTP, manufactured by T & S Brass and Bronze Works, <strong>Inc</strong>.Project #: 3894 15800 - 12
22.4.6.3 Trim: Provide new grid drain and 3-inch trap standard. Provide new loose key supplystops.22.4.7 Floor Drain (P-7)22.4.7.1 Dura-coated cast iron body with two inch bottom outlet, seepage pan, trap primerconnection, six inch diameter Type "B" nickel-bronze strainer, Model ZN-415-P, manufactured byZurn.22.4.8 Hydrant (P-8)22.4.8.1 Exposed freestanding yard hydrant to match existing or similar. Two pipe with 2-inchouter shell protecting water supply pipe. High quality grey iron and brass castings and loose leverhandle. "Anti-freezing-valve" shall be located below frost line and be capable of being removedfrom above grade for maintenance. 3/4-inch inlet and outlet with hose threads. Ground to top ofHydrant, 22 inches. Supply shall drain after each operation. Paint outer casing in color as selected bythe Architect; Model E-123, manufactured by Murdock.23. POTABLE WATER SUPPLY23.1 This contractor shall field verify existing service equipment and water meter location andcoordinate any service entrance equipment upgrade requirements with the water supplier.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15800 - 13
SECTION 15850PLUMBINGSANITARY SEWER CLEANING AND INSPECTION1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 15700 - PLUMBING, GENERAL shall applyto this entire Section and shall have the same force and affect as if fully included herein.1.2 Due to the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings,access panels and similar parts, which may be existing. The Drawings are generally diagrammaticand indicative of the work to be completed. The Contractor shall make a thorough examination ofthe site and shall make due allowances for difficulties and contingencies to be encountered.1.3 The Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven experience on projects withsimilar levels of complexity and magnitude. Experience shall be based on the experience as acompany and not on the experience as individuals. Contractor shall be licensed, bonded and insured.2. SCOPE2.1 The work shall consist of the furnishing of all materials, all equipment, labor, tools andsupervision and performing all operations necessary for the proper and complete execution of thesanitary sewer system cleaning & inspection.2.2 Clean and inspect all existing sanitary piping below floor and/or grade to the house trap.Also clean and inspect all exterior piping from the house trap to the connection to the sewer main.Contractor shall provide all openings in piping to facilitate this work and repipe sections of pipingafter cleaning and inspection work has been completed and approved.2.3 Clean and inspect all existing trench drainage piping below floor and/or grade to theexterior sediment and/or oil interceptor. Also clean and inspect all exterior piping from the sedimentand/or oil interceptor to the connection to the building sewer line. Contractor shall provide allopenings in piping to facilitate this work and repipe sections of piping after cleaning and inspectionwork has been completed and approved.3. DRAINAGE SYSTEMS CLEANING & INSPECTION3.1 Clean and inspect the sanitary sewer systems for entire building. The building isapproximately 25 years old. The sanitary piping material is cast iron (field verify). In general,the existing sanitary piping is functional and is believed to be in good condition. Refer to thedrawings for piping sizes and lengths. Horizontal fixture branch drains are not included in thescope of work.Project #: 3894 15850 - 1
3.1.1 Clean (jetting method with root cutting and obstruction removal as required) theexisting drainage piping systems.3.2 If any deficiencies are encountered, provide a written report that outlines allproblems. The report shall identify problems including specific locations and evaluation of eachproblem and recommendations for repair. Each problem location shall be assigned a uniqueidentification number. Identified problems shall include, but not be limited to, cracked or brokenpipe, collapsed pipe, offset joints, joint separation, reverse slope inverts, obstructions, corrosion,etc.3.3 Provide marked-up plans locating dimensionally each problem location with itsunique identification number.3.4 Provide a fixed fee for cleaning, inspecting and reporting.3.5 Upon award of contract and notice to proceed, Contractor shall complete all cleaningand inspection work for the building including the written report within four weeks of award ofcontract.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15850 - 2
SECTION 15900PLUMBINGEARTHWORK, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 15700 - PLUMBING, GENERAL shall apply tothis entire Section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.1.2 Unless otherwise noted, the respective Contractor shall provide all earthwork, excavationand backfill required to install the respective Contract work.1.3 The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and tools necessary tocomplete all earthwork, excavation and backfill.1.4 Each Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of other Contractors to insureproper incorporation and provision for all items to be furnished and placed by others. Scheduling ofthis work shall be adjusted and timed to avoid unnecessary delays to others.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment,machinery and services necessary to perform the excavation and backfill required for the properinstallation of below grade plumbing piping and/or plumbing equipment indicated on the Drawingsor specified in Sections 15700 - 15950.3. METHODS3.1 Furnish and install all shoring and bracing necessary to prevent cave-ins until thebackfilling is completed. Also furnish, erect and maintain guardrails, lights and such otherprotection as may be necessary for safety and for the protection of others. Sheet piling of wood orsteel, including bracing, shoring and sheeting as required or necessary to conduct the work in a safemanner, retain the banks, and complete the work, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractorwho shall assume full and complete responsibility for this work or any damage caused thereby.3.2 Basis for Excavation - Refer to the excavation section of the Specifications for theGeneral <strong>Construction</strong> Work for the basis for excavation.3.3 No piping shall be bedded on rock. Where rock is encountered, the trench shall be overexcavatedsix inches and the piping shall be concrete encased or placed in 2B aggregate fill asdirected by the Owner’s Representative.3.4 All excavation shall be done with sufficient working space to permit placing, inspectionand completion of all work, included in the Contract. All excavations must have solid, level,Project #: 3894 15900 - 1
undisturbed bottoms, subject to approval by the Owner’s Representative before the piping is placed.Should bottoms become soft or wet before piping is placed, all such unsuitable bottoms must beremoved at no additional cost to the Owner and filled with concrete. No sloping bearing will bepermitted.3.5 The Contractor shall do all pumping required to keep his excavations free of water. Thewater shall be conveyed in piping or watertight troughs a sufficient distance so that it will flow fromthe site and not affect other work being performed.3.6 The Contractor shall backfill all excavations performed under his Contract as required tosatisfy finish grade requirements. No backfilling shall be done until directed by the Owner’sRepresentative. Any cave-in of excavating that may occur or any backfill placed before inspectionsare completed shall be removed as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Do not use topsoil asearth fill material in this Contract. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the settlement ofearth fills and all building damages resulting from faulty compaction of these earth fills. All earthused for earth fills shall be free of debris, large stones and organic matter. If site earth is used, itshall be that material obtained from the deeper excavations. Earth fill brought to the site must beapproved material and none shall be transported to the site until the Owner's Representative givesapproval and the General Contractor agrees to its use as fill. Earth fills shall be spread in six (6)inch layer thicknesses maximum, dry material shall be sprayed as required to a moisture content ofapproximately 12 percent by weight and each layer shall be compacted to a density of 95 percent orthe maximum density at the optimum moisture content. The Contractor shall closely supervise allearth filling and compaction work as it occurs to assure correct and reliable earth fills free ofsettlement.3.7 All backfilling and filling operations occurring in areas that have been filled previouslyby the General Contractor shall be done in accordance with the Specification requirements for theGeneral <strong>Construction</strong> if these requirements are more stringent than those for backfilling under thisContract. In areas on the interior of the building where Test Controlled Compaction must beperformed under the General <strong>Construction</strong> Specifications, backfilling by this Contractor shall followTest Controlled Compaction methods. This Contractor shall review the General <strong>Construction</strong>Specifications to determine his responsibility for work within areas filled by the General Contractor.All costs of labor, materials, equipment and testing to meet this responsibility shall be borne by thisContractor.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15900 - 2
SECTION 15975PLUMBINGCOMPLETION, TESTING AND BALANCING1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 15700 - PLUMBING, GENERAL shall apply tothis entire Section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials andaccessories necessary for, but not limited to, the completion of the Contract and the testing andbalancing of all equipment specified in the Plumbing sections of the Specifications.3. TESTS OF DRAINAGE SYSTEM3.1 The systems of soil, waste, drain and vent piping, installed by this Contractor must betested with water or air, as hereinafter described, and proven tight to the satisfaction of the localauthority having jurisdiction and Owner’s Representative. The Plumbing Contractor must furnishtesting instruments.3.2 Tests must be made with water, except when there is danger from freezing, then testsmust be made with air. Wooden plugs are not to be used in making tests. All tests must complywith local Authority requirements, where applicable.3.3 All plumbing and drainage piping above the ground floor line must have the openingsplugged where necessary and be filled with water to the level of the tops of vent pipes. The watershall be allowed to stand at least 30 minutes for inspection, after which, if the lines prove to be tight,the water shall be drawn off and the fixtures connected.3.4 When air is used for testing, a pressure of not less than 20 inches of mercury must bemaintained without leakage for at least 15 minutes. A mercury column gauge shall be used inmaking air tests.4. TESTING OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING4.1 All water lines shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure equal to 1-1/2 times the maximumoperating pressure but never less than 100 PSI. The system shall be without leaks at this pressurefor 24 hours. The Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner shall conduct the test beforeinsulation or concealment.Project #: 3894 15975 - 1
4.2 All pipes, fittings, valves, joints, etc., shall be carefully examined during the tests. Anyjoint showing leakage shall be made tight. The Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner shallreplace any defective pipes, etc.. Caulking of threaded joints, which show leakage is not acceptable.5. STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM5.1 Before being placed in service, all domestic water lines shall be chlorinated using amethod that is satisfactory to the water authority or the authority having jurisdiction. In the absenceof a prescribed method, the procedure listed in AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as describedbelow shall be used.5.2 Prior to chlorination, all dirt and foreign matter shall be removed by a thorough flushing.This shall be done after the pressure test and leakage test.5.3 A chlorine hypochlorite solution shall be applied by means of a solution feed device orthe gas shall be fed directly from a chlorine cylinder equipped with proper devices for regulating therate of flow and the effective diffuse of gas within the pipe.5.4 Water shall be controlled to flow slowly into the system during the application ofchlorine in such proportions that the chlorine dose applied to the water entering the pipe shall be atleast 40 to 50 parts per million.5.5 Treated water shall be retained in the system long enough to destroy all non-sporeforming bacteria. This period shall be at least three hours. A longer chlorine contact time may berequested by the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.5.6 After the chlorine treated water has been retained for the required time, the chlorineresidual at the pipe extremities and at other representative points shall be at least five parts permillions.5.7 Following chlorination all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the system at itsextremities until the replacement water throughout its length shall, upon test, be equal to the waterquality served from the water supply system.5.8 Should the initial treatment in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, proveineffective, the chlorination procedure shall be repeated until confirmed tests show that watersampled from the system conforms to the requirements.6. BALANCING6.1 All equipment required for balancing over and above those shown on the Drawings shallbe installed during construction at no additional cost to the Owner.6.1.1 Enlistment of the cooperation of equipment manufacturer where needed to obtain properequipment performances.Project #: 3894 15975 - 2
6.1.2 Instruct the building maintenance employees during the adjusting and balancing period.Signed statement shall be obtained from each employee verifying he has received this instruction.6.2 The following work shall be included as part of the balancing work6.3 After the completion of the installation of all hot water system piping, circuit settersand flushing of the system, operate the system and make all required adjustments and alterations todeliver the flows indicated. The contractor shall provide the necessary gauge connections,temperature connections, flow fittings, test equipment, etc. to secure the data required.6.3.1 Check and set system operating controls. Check, adjust and record the flow ratesand delta pressures at each circuit setter. Check and record the inlet water temperature, flow andoutlet temperatures at heating and mixing control valves. Check and record the pump suction anddischarge pressures, total dynamic head, system flows and zone flows.6.4 Check and record the inlet water temperature, flow and outlet temperatures at allthermostatic mixing valves.6.4.1 Set up each valve in accordance with the manufactures recommendations. Setmixing valves to supply domestic hot water temperatures listed. Engage theservices of the valve manufacture representative to confirm proper setup and systemflows6.5 The Contractor shall carry out the "start-up" of the various systems.6.5.1 Compressed air system including start-up of all source equipment.6.5.2 Motor oil dispensing system.6.5.3 Chassis grease dispensing system.6.6 In addition to the above work, the Contractor shall check the operation of all water heaterthermostat setpoints and operations.6.7 Equipment manufacturer shall furnish and replace all parts, which prove to have faileddue to original manufacturing defect during first year.7. TESTING AND CLEANING OF COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM7.1 Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressedair piping, valving, fittings and outlets in accordance with ANSI B31.1.7.2 Repair or replace compressed air piping, valving, fittings and outlets as required toeliminate leaks and retest to demonstrate compliance.7.3 Cap (seal) ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment.Project #: 3894 15975 - 3
8. TESTING AND CLEANING OF GAS SYSTEM8.1 All gas piping, fittings, valving and outlets shall be tested and cleaned for service inaccordance with NFPA 54 and all local requirements.---oOo---Project #: 3894 15975 - 4
SECTION 16000ELECTRICALGENERAL1. GENERAL1.1 Applicable requirements of the Contract Documents, preceding the TechnicalSpecifications, apply to this Section. In the event of conflict between the Specifications, the moststringent shall apply.1.2 Separation of these Specifications into Divisions and Sections is for convenience onlyand is not intended to establish limits of work.1.3 Consult index to be certain that set of Documents and Specifications is complete. Reportomissions or discrepancies to the Owner's Representative.1.4 The Contractor shall employ high standards of good workmanship and shall pay specialattention to the safety of personnel and equipment. The installation of material and equipment shallbe in conformance with the latest edition of all codes and standards, as adopted by the local authorityhaving jurisdiction, including those listed in Paragraph: STANDARDS. The agency having the moststringent requirements shall be adhered to.1.5 The Contractor shall make a thorough examination of the site and shall make dueallowances for difficulties and contingencies to be encountered. All dimensions shall be checkedand verified by the Contractor at the site.1.6 The Contractor and all Sub-Contractors shall have a minimum of three years provenexperience on projects with similar levels of complexity and magnitude. Experience shall be basedon the experience as a company and not on the experience as individuals.1.7 The Drawings and Specifications are intended to function as a common set of documents.Anything shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications, or mentioned in theSpecifications and not shown on the Drawings, shall be equally binding as if both noted on theDrawings and called for in the Specifications.1.8 Owner's Representative1.8.1 The Owner's Representative is the person appointed by the Owner. The Owner'sRepresentative will advise and consult with the Owner during construction and until final payment isdue. The Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded through the Owner'sRepresentative.Project #: 3894 16000 - 1
2. SCOPE2.1 The work covered by and included in these Specifications consists of the furnishing of allmaterials, all equipment, labor, tools and supervision and performing all operations necessary for theproper and complete execution of the Electrical work in strict accordance with the Specifications andthe Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.2.2 Unless noted otherwise, this Contractor shall furnish and install all control devicestogether with control wiring, conduit and all appurtenances and accessories necessary to perform theoperating functions as specified. Control devices shall include, but not be limited to, thermostats,switching relays, control relays and transformers. Wiring materials and installation shall conform tothe National Electric Code. All control system wiring shall be 14 AWG minimum installed in 1/2inch diameter minimum conduit.2.3 It is the intent of these Drawings and Specifications to provide complete and fullyfunctional systems unless otherwise indicated. The Contractor shall provide all incidentalcomponents (locknuts, screws, washers, etc.) required to accomplish this intent. This shall includefurnishing devices which are obviously required by the design intent such as the second three-wayswitch where one such switch is shown, fuses for fused disconnect switches, etc.3. DEFINITIONS3.1 The term "Contractor" or "Electrical Contractor" when used in this Specification refers tothe Contractor responsible for all work under this Section.3.2 The term "Provide" refers to this Contractor purchasing, delivering and installing as apart of this Contract.4. STANDARDS4.1 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)4.2 NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code4.3 NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures4.4 Pennsylvania Act 45, Uniform <strong>Construction</strong> Code (UCC)4.5 Underwriters Laboratories Electrical <strong>Construction</strong> Materials Directory4.6 International Building Code (IBC)4.7 Public Law 101-336, The Americans with Disabilities Act of 19904.8 Guidelines for <strong>Construction</strong> and Equipment of Hospitals and Medical Facilities asprepared by AIA & USDHHS.Project #: 3894 16000 - 2
4.9 ASTM B-8 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,Medium Hard, or Soft4.10 ASTM B-496 Specification for Compact Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded CopperConductors4.11 ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded 0-2 KV Cables5. NOTIFICATION5.1 Trades that have work connected with the Electrical work and trades that do preparatorywork for electrical equipment shall be notified for installation requirements and scheduling.5.2 The Owner's Representative shall be informed of the installation schedule to allowsufficient time for inspection without any work delay.5.3 All work shall be coordinated to avoid cutting of work in place and interfering with otheroperations.5.4 In compliance with state law, contact individual companies to have utility locationsmarked in the field and to otherwise locate underground objects as may be necessary prior to thestart of construction. Pennsylvania law requires three working days notice for the constructionphase and ten working days in design stage. Call Pennsylvania One Call System, <strong>Inc</strong>. (1-800-242-1776, as of this writing).6. CONTRACT DRAWINGS6.1 The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate relation of conduits, connectionsand equipment. Vendor catalog numbers do not necessarily indicate trim and fitting requirements.Drawings do not indicate all boxes and fittings that may be required. Therefore, the Contractor shallcarefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting work. The Contractor shall furnish allboxes, fittings, hangers and accessories as may be required to meet these conditions at no additionalcost to the Owner.6.2 Do not scale the Drawings. The Contractor shall check conditions at the site fordimensions and sizes pertaining to the structure.6.3 Do not deviate from the Drawings without prior written approval.7. LINES, GRADES AND SURVEYS7.1 All necessary surveys, lines, grades and measurements are the responsibility of theContractor desiring the information for the proper installation of his work. The Contractor isresponsible for the proper installation of the work with respect to other Contractors.Project #: 3894 16000 - 3
7.2 Grades, elevations and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and theContractor shall check all such information on the site before proceeding with the work.8. WORKMANSHIP8.1 All equipment, conduit, fixtures, etc. shall be installed in a workmanlike manner meetingthe accepted standards of the representative industry.8.2 All work to be performed shall be done by qualified mechanics. All mechanics in theemploy of this Contractor on this project shall be skilled in the phases of the work to which they areused. The mechanic’s affiliation with labor organizations shall be acceptable to all trades employedon the project.9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES9.1 Transmit each submittal with an Engineer accepted form. <strong>Inc</strong>lude one copy each for theOwner and the Owner's Representative in addition to copies required by the Contractor.9.2 Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with analphabetic suffix.9.3 Identify Project, Contractor, Sub-Contractor or Supplier; pertinent drawing sheet anddetail number and specification section number, as appropriate.9.4 Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification ofProducts required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work and coordination of information isin accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.9.5 <strong>Inc</strong>omplete submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of providing a complete andfunctional system.9.6 Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Coordinate submission of related items.9.7 Submittals by the Contractor must be in complete compliance with the ContractDocuments unless exceptions are identified. Exceptions to the Contract Documents may only bemade to improve the project. Exceptions cannot be taken which would provide an incomplete and/ornonfunctional system.9.7.1 Exceptions must be included in/on the submittal in a separate paragraph or drawing blocklocated below the Contractor's stamp identified by the title "Exception to Contract Documents."Exceptions cannot be part of the standard Contractor's stamp.9.8 Provide space for Contractor and Owner's Representative review stamps.9.9 The Engineer will return shop drawings with the following designations:Project #: 3894 16000 - 4
A. Reviewed: Further submission not required.B. Reviewed as Noted: Corrections must be incorporated in final installation.Further submission not required unless specifically noted.C. Review Not Required: Placed in project files for information only.D. Revise and Resubmit: Make necessary changes and resubmit prior to fabricationor purchase.E. Rejected: Does not meet project requirements. Resubmit in accordance withContract Documents.9.10 Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previoussubmittal.9.11 Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties topromptly report any inability to comply with provisions.10. SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA10.1 Submit shop drawings and/or catalog cuts for all specified materials and equipment.10.2 Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of relatedsystems, products and accessories in a single submittal.10.3 Mark dimensions and values in <strong>unit</strong>s to match those specified.10.4 Show equipment sizes and dimensions.10.5 <strong>Inc</strong>lude wiring diagrams, hole location and sizes, and other data that could affect work byother trades.10.6 Show manufacturer's names, trade names, catalog numbers, accessories, special featuresand rating data.10.7 Indicate required clearances for operating parts, for removal and for servicing.10.8 Show all applicable performance data.10.9 Show sound power levels of all rotating equipment.11. CUTTING AND PATCHING11.1 In new construction, the Contractor shall give the General Contractor completeinformation as to size of openings required in floors and walls, etc., so that such openings may beProject #: 3894 16000 - 5
provided as the project progresses. In existing construction, the Contractor shall do his own cuttingand patching required for the installation of his work.11.2 If openings are omitted or are incorrect through failure of the Contractor to follow theseinstructions, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, engage the trade, which originally installed thework, to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.11.3 All cutting and patching of every nature required in connection with this Contract shallbe done by the Contractor with mechanics experienced in their respective lines of work. Allpatching shall match adjacent finishes.11.4 All cutting in building shall be done with great care so as not to leave an unsightlysurface, which may not be concealed by plates, escutcheons, or other normal concealingconstruction. If such unsightly conditions occur the Contractor shall be required at his own expense,to engage the General Contractor to replace the damaged materials with new materials.11.5 Any penetrations of a roof shall be done in accordance with the roof manufacturer'srecommended details for that type of roof and per industry recognized good practices. Thepenetration methods shall not invalidate any existing warranties.12. SUBSTITUTIONS12.1 Any bidder wishing to substitute "or equal" equipment may request a substitution.Manufacturer's which are submitted as substitutions for approved equal status are considered to haveequipment of similar quality, however, the Contractor shall not assume that a piece of equipment bya manufacturer submitted as a "substitution" will be automatically accepted. Compliance with theDrawings and Specifications is still required. If the substituted material is considered to beunacceptable, the Contractor shall provide the equipment as originally specified.12.2 Substitutions are encouraged when there is significant cost savings or improvement to theproject. Submit reasons for changes with any requests for substitution. All requests for substitutionsmust be made within 30 days of contract award unless stated otherwise in the General Conditions.12.3 Bid alternates shall be clearly defined in order to be evaluated during the bidding process.12.4 By submitting an alternate or substitution, the Contractor automatically agrees to thefollowing:A. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any additional costsincurred by the Owner's Representative to review the substituted materials, inaccordance with the then current Owner's Representative's hourly rate.B. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any additional costsincurred by the Owner's Representative field or office conferences caused by thesubstituted materials in accordance with the then current Owner'sRepresentative's hourly rate.Project #: 3894 16000 - 6
C. The consideration of alternates/substitutions does not obligate the Owner'sRepresentative to accept same.D. In the event a brand is approved and substituted, it is the responsibility of theContractor to so coordinate his substituted material into the original work at noextra cost to the Owner or any other Contractor.13. CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORK13.1 Unless otherwise noted, all concrete bases, reinforcing, etc. and masonry work requiredto install the respective Contract Work shall be furnished and installed by the respective Contractor.13.2 Provide a 3-1/2 inch high housekeeping pad for all substations, switchboards, motorcontrol centers and other floor mounted equipment. Pads shall extend one inch in all directionsbeyond the edge of the equipment.13.3 The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and tools necessary tocomplete concrete and cement work.13.4 All concrete work shall comply with the requirements of the ACI Building Code (ACI318), the ACI Detailing Manual (ACI 315) and the Specifications for Structural Concrete forBuildings (ACI 301).13.5 All reinforcing steel shall be manufactured from high strength billet steel conforming toASTM Designation A-615 Grade 60. Welded-wire fabric shall comply with ASTM A-185.14. MATERIALS14.1 All materials and equipment provided by this Contractor shall be new, withoutimperfections and blemishes and shall be protected from the elements prior to installation inbuilding.14.2 All equipment shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70 and, in addition, shall be tested,listed and labeled by an approved authority (UL) and shall be installed in accordance with its listing.The Owner's Representative shall have full authority to reject any equipment, material orinstallation of same, showing defects of manufacture or workmanship.14.3 All equipment subject to specific requirements of the Owner's insurance company (firealarm system, security system, etc.) shall meet the insurance company's requirements.15. METHODS15.1 The Electrical Contractor shall confer with all other Contractors and shall apply fordetailed and specific information regarding the location of all equipment as the final location maydiffer from that indicated on the Drawings. Outlets, equipment or wiring improperly placed becauseProject #: 3894 16000 - 7
of the Electrical Contractor's failure to obtain this information shall be relocated and reinstalled bythe Electrical Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.15.2 Each Contractor, upon request of the Owner's Representative, shall expedite the work ofa specific area, section or part of the project to permit the installation of another part of the work.15.3 All conduits, wire, cable, wiring devices and equipment shall be installed in such amanner as to preserve access with sufficient space provided for proper operation and maintenance toany existing equipment or to any new equipment installed under this Specification or under otherSpecifications or Contracts for this building.15.4 This Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of other trades so that all work maybe installed in the most direct manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, equipment,architectural or structural features will be avoided. If an interference results, the Owner'sRepresentative shall decide which work is to be relocated, regardless of which was first installed.Such relocation shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.15.5 All materials and equipment installed by the Contractor shall be firmly supported andsecured to the building construction where required.15.6 All items of labor, material and equipment not specified in detail or shown on theDrawings but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete and proper installation and properoperation of the work described herein or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall befurnished as if called for in detail by the Specifications or Drawings.15.7 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendationsand installation instructions. The manufacturer's installation recommendations and instructions shallbe considered part of the Contract.15.8 The equipment installation shall also adhere to the installation recommendations andinstructions of other building components such as wall and roof materials which the installationimpacts.15.9 Any questions regarding means or methods of construction shall be addressed during thebidding phase of the project.16. SCHEDULING OF WORK16.1 The Contractor shall attend all planning meetings, provide scheduling information andwork with all trades to obtain a workable project schedule that meets the Owner's requirements.17. PROTECTION17.1 Each Contractor shall effectively protect his work and materials with tarpaulins or heavyplastic material against dirt, water, chemicals, plaster, or damage during the entire period ofinstallation or until he is directed to remove the coverings by the Owner's Representative. AnyProject #: 3894 16000 - 8
damaged material must be removed and replaced by the Contractor without additional costregardless of the cause of the damage. All openings in conduit, fittings, etc., must be effectivelysealed to exclude dirt, sand and other foreign substances.18. PROTECTION OF OWNER'S EQUIPMENT18.1 The Contractor shall provide any temporary work required to protect the Owner'sequipment and to contain the dust generated during construction. Any measures taken by theContractor for the protection of equipment shall be installed to the satisfaction of the Owner orOwner’s Representative, which may include any and all provisions listed in DIVISION-1 GeneralRequirements and/or in accordance with the appropriate technical specifications for wood andplastics in DIVISION-6. An approved protection material is nylon reinforced flame retardant andanti-static Griffolyn T-55 ASFR 6 mil film (1-800-231-6074 - as of this writing).19. WORK IN THE EXISTING BUILDING19.1 The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly surveying the existingbuilding to determine the extent and cost of installing new equipment and materials in the existingbuilding.19.2 All new equipment and materials shall be installed in existing building as hereinspecified.19.3 All Contractors before starting any cutting in the existing building must first obtainapproval from the Owner's Representative on the site before cutting at each location. ThisContractor shall provide any temporary work required to retain the dust generated by his work asmay be directed by the Owner's Representative. All dust found, which has escaped the area ofcutting shall be properly removed by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.19.4 All openings cut into the exterior of the existing structure must be completely sealed andwaterproofed before leaving the job site each day. This shall be done by the Contractor responsiblefor the cutting.19.5 Contractor should not assume utilities can be installed as shown. Drawings arediagrammatic and utilities may need to shift to accommodate existing conditions. It is believed thatin general the project can be constructed with utilities in approximately the locations as shown.20. INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES20.1 The Contractor shall schedule his work to avoid any interruption of any utility services tothe operating areas of the building during normal working hours. Interruption of services shall bedone during off hours at no additional cost to the Owner.20.2 The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Owner's Representative at least three daysprior to any interruption of services. The scheduling of all interruptions shall be approved by theOwner.Project #: 3894 16000 - 9
21. RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP21.1 Each Contractor is responsible for periodic removal of all rubbish resulting from hiswork. All surplus material, refuse, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the job site at the completionof the Contract. The Owner's Representative must be satisfied with the removal and clean up.21.2 All rubbish shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor. Rubbish removed from thesite shall become the responsibility of the Contractor.21.3 Any hazardous materials discovered which are not included in the contract shall bebrought to the Owner's attention prior to removal from the site.22. DELIVERING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT22.1 Deliver accessories, small unmarked parts, adhesives, sealants and incidental items to sitein manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers.22.2 Store materials and equipment to prevent damage and injury. Store ferrous materials toprevent rusting. Store equipment and lighting fixtures to prevent staining and discoloring.23. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS23.1 During construction, the Contractor shall maintain a record set of "red-lined" installationprints. He shall record on these prints, all deviations from the Contract Drawings in conduit andelectrical conductor sizing, equipment sizing, location and details.23.2 At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer this information neatly ontosepias and forward these sepias and the as-built prints to the Owner's Representative.24. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS24.1 Prior to completion of this project, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner'sRepresentative for approval three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual consisting ofitems outlined hereinafter.24.2 The purpose of this manual is to assist the Owner in routine operation, maintenance,servicing, troubleshooting and procurement of replacement parts. All information in the manualshall be as-built and only material pertinent to the project shall be included.24.3 The manual shall include the following:24.3.1 Manuals shall be bound, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages and set in three-ring binders withdurable covers.Project #: 3894 16000 - 10
24.3.2 Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS," title of project and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.All subject matter shall be in typewritten format.24.3.3 Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logicallyorganized as described below; with tab labeling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastictabs.24.3.3.1 Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume with product or systemdescription identified, type on white paper.24.3.3.2 Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of Owner'sRepresentative, Contractor, Sub-Contractors and major equipment suppliers.24.3.3.3 Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided byspecification section. For each category, identify names, addresses and telephone numbers of Sub-Contractors and suppliers. Operating and start-up instructions shall be written in a concise step-bystepmanner. Maintenance instructions shall include maintenance schedules, procedures,adjustments and trouble-shooting techniques. Identify the following:A. List of equipmentB. Parts list for each componentC. Operating instructionsD. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems24.3.3.4 Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:A. Shop drawings and product dataB. Control wiring diagramsC. CertificatesD. Photocopies of warrantiesE. Electrical inspection certificateF. Copy of panelboard directory24.3.3.5 Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 30 days prior to final inspection.This copy will be returned after final inspection, with the Owner's Representative comments. Revisecontent of documents as required prior to final submittal.24.3.3.6 Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after the Owner's review.25. IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT25.1 All panels, combination motor starters, safety switches, motor operated time switches,junction and pull boxes, in-panel sub-feeders and similar items installed under this project shall beidentified by name, function and/or control. <strong>Inc</strong>luded on nameplates shall be the voltage of theinvolved circuits. Nameplates shall be at least one by three inch with characters not less than 1/4Project #: 3894 16000 - 11
inch high. They shall be made up of two laminated black plastic sheets bonded with a middle sheetof white plastic and characters engraved in one black sheet to the depth of the white plastic.25.2 The Contractor shall provide a typewritten indexed directory in each panelboardindicating the item or items controlled by each circuit.25.3 Directories in any existing panelboards shall be updated in typewritten format showingall circuit changes.25.4 All circuits shall be identified in outlet boxes as to the specific circuit connection. Allcircuit conductors shall also be identified as to the voltage of the circuit.25.5 Color coding shall be as listed in Section "WIRING" of these Specifications.25.6 A typewritten list of nameplates shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative forapproval before ordering.26. PAINTING26.1 Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified; allmarred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished to a smooth and uniform finish.Provide one-pint quantity of factory finish touch-up paint to the Owner.26.2 All exposed ferrous metalwork, pipe, supports, hangers, insulation and other surfaces notfactory painted shall be painted with one prime and two finish coats. Paint, surface preparation andapplication shall be as specified in the Architectural Section: PAINTING. Colors shall matchexisting work or shall be as selected by the Owner's Representative.26.3 A quantity of touch-up paint (minimum size - one pint) shall be provided for each colorused by the Contractor. Touch-up paint shall be delivered to the Owner.27. LAWS, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS27.1 All systems in all and/or part shall conform to all pertinent laws, ordinances, andregulations of ALL bodies having jurisdiction, at all governing levels. In case of conflict betweengoverning levels, the more stringent law shall apply. As a minimum, all work shall comply withIBC, NFPA, OSHA and USBC requirements.27.2 The Contractor shall pay all fees and prepare and submit all utility applications andobtain and pay for all permits, inspections, and certifications required with his work.27.3 All electrical work shall be inspected and certified by the local authorities; if no localauthority inspection is available an independent inspection agency such as the Middle DepartmentInspection Agency (MDIA) shall be hired by the Contractor.Project #: 3894 16000 - 12
27.4 The Contractor shall make the Owner’s Representative aware of any and all codevariances that may apply to the electrical equipment/systems. Application for said variances shall bethe responsibility of the Owner’s Representative.28. BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS AND FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES28.1 Provide expansion joints in conduits where they cross building expansion joints.28.2 Where cables or conduits pass through fire rated portion of the structure, the annularspace between them and the structure shall be filled with an approved fireproof material.28.3 Meet all requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories and all applicable codes formaintaining the integrity of all fire rated assemblies.29. FASTENINGS, SUPPORTS, AND HANGERS29.1 Fastenings, supports, hangers, miscellaneous steel, clamps, and anchors shall be made forpurpose for which they are to be used. Toggle bolts or machine bolt fastenings shall be used forhollow tile, terra cotta or lath construction; machine screws for structural steel fastenings; leadexpansion shields, and machine screws or lag screws for solid masonry fastening; lag screws forwood fastening. All equipment and conduit shall be rigidly and firmly installed to prevent swaying,vibrating or sagging by malleable or wrought steel hangers of standard design, pipe clamps orfabricated steel supports of approved design. Hangers of horizontal conduit runs shall be adjustableclevis type. Perforated strap iron hangers and caddy clips are not permissible.30. SOUND PARTITIONS30.1 Contractor shall be responsible to identify all sound partitions indicated on thearchitectural plans. Contractor shall seal all penetrations through the wall to maintain the soundabsorption integrity of the partition.31. CONCRETE INSERTS31.1 The Electrical Contractor shall provide concrete inserts of an approved carbon steelwedge type for all hangers. Where two or more parallel conduits are installed continuous insertsmay be used. Where required to distribute the load on the inserts, a piece of reinforcing steel ofsufficient length shall be passed through the insert. Each insert shall include a knockout piece.Concrete inserts shall have a minimum safety factor of five.32. SLEEVES32.1 The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install sleeves where required to protectequipment or facilities in the installation. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wall,or partition and shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise required.Project #: 3894 16000 - 13
32.2 Sleeves in bearing and masonry walls, floors and partitions shall be of standard weightsteel pipe finished with smooth edges. For other masonry partitions, through suspended ceilings andfor concealed vertical piping, sleeves shall be No. 22 U.S.G. galvanized iron.32.3 All sleeves shall be properly installed and securely cemented in place.32.4 Floor sleeves shall extend one inch above the finished floor. Space between floor sleevesand passing conduit shall be caulked with an approved graphite packing and/or waterproof caulkingcompound.32.5 Where conduits pass through waterproofed floors or walls, design of sleeves shall besuch that waterproofing can be flashed into and around the sleeves.32.6 Where sleeves pass through fire-rated walls or floors, a fire barrier protection systemshall be used.32.7 See architectural drawings for fire ratings of building components.33. FIRE STOPPING33.1 The contractor shall be responsible to provide and install fire-stopping materials and/orsystems where his work penetrates fire and/or smoke rated portions of the building and non-fireresistance-rated assemblies. All materials used shall be manufactured such that they are intended toresist the spread of fire and the passage of smoke. This includes but is not limited to rated walls,floors, shafts, ceilings, and non-fire resistance-rated horizontal assemblies. All fire stoppingmaterials used shall have a fire resistance rating equal to or greater than the rated assembly forwhich they are installed.33.2 For locations where the installed fire stopping material is exposed to normal view, thecontractor shall conceal the material with chrome-plated escutcheon plates or other materials thathave a flame-spread value of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, asdetermined per ASTM E 84. The concealing device shall be approved by the owner'srepresentative prior to installation. Provide shop drawings for each device.33.3 The contractor shall provide components/accessories for each fire-stopping system thatare needed to install fill materials and to comply with all system performance requirements asrecommended by the fire stopping material manufacturer. Accessories include but are not limited to:mineral wool insulation, ceramic fiber, sealants used to aid in the formation of the fire stoppingmaterials, fire-rated formboard, joint fillers and sealers, collars and steel sleeves.33.4 Fire stopping materials and systems shall include, but are not limited to, the following:fire barrier caulk and sealants, intumescent caulk, intumescent putty, intumescent wrap strips,silicone foams and sealants, fire barrier composite sheets and cast-in-place fire barrier systems.33.5 Fire stopping materials and systems shall be as manufactured by 3M Fire ProtectionProducts, Hilti Corporation, or ProSet Systems <strong>Inc</strong>.Project #: 3894 16000 - 14
34. ANCHOR BOLTS34.1 The Contractor shall provide and set in place, at the time of pouring of concretefoundations, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the equipment called for in thesespecifications. Anchor bolts shall be of the hook type, of proper size and length to suit theequipment. Anchor bolts shall be set in pipe sleeves of approximately twice the bolt diameter andone half the embedded length of the bolt. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for propercoordination and placement of the bolts. Upon completion of equipment installation, pipe sleevesshall be caulked in accordance with Section, "SLEEVES" of these Specifications.35. HOODS AND SHIELDS35.1 Hoods and shields shall be installed to protect important electrical equipment fromsprinkler system discharge. Hoods and shields shall be constructed of non-combustible material andshall be sized to present direct contact of the discharging water and the important electricalequipment. The local authority having jurisdiction shall determine what electrical equipment will beclassified "important electrical equipment."36. DEMOLITION36.1 The Contractor shall perform all demolition work as indicated on the Drawings as part ofthis Contract.36.2 The Contractor shall cut and patch as required to perform the demolition work. Allopenings created must be repaired to match existing conditions.36.3 All cutting and patching shall be performed by mechanics experienced in their respectiveline of work. If the Owner's Representative is not satisfied with the quality of work, the Contractorshall be required, at his own expense, to engage the General Contractor to replace the damagedmaterials with new materials.36.4 Contractor shall re-establish circuit continuity to wiring devices that may be affected bythe demolition process.36.5 Demolition shall be accomplished in accordance with the construction phasing schedule.Where necessary the Contractor shall provide temporary circuits, supports, equipment, etc. asneeded to keep equipment, building area, etc. operational or to allow relocation of the same duringdemolition of adjacent areas.36.6 Abandoned wire, conduit, devices, and circuits in the area of demolition or individuallyidentified shall be removed in their entirety.36.7 The Owner shall be given the opport<strong>unit</strong>y to retain ownership of all removed materialsand equipment. All such items shall be carefully handled and protected and shall be stored by thisContractor on site as directed by the Owner. Any such materials and equipment not desired by theProject #: 3894 16000 - 15
Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed promptly from the projectsite. Disposal shall be in accordance with the regulations of the authorities at the disposal site.36.8 Discovery of any equipment and/or material which is scheduled for removal and which issuspected of containing asbestos shall require termination of demolition until the Owner is informedand proper testing can be conducted to ensure the material does not contain asbestos. Equipmentand/or material found to contain asbestos shall undergo asbestos remediation by others at the cost ofthe Owner prior to completion of demolition.36.9 Any equipment scheduled for removal found to contain PCB’s shall be disposed of inaccordance with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements. All disposal documentationshall be delivered to the Owner. Costs of said services shall be the responsibility of the Owner.36.10 Fluorescent lamps shall be recycled and/or legally disposed of in accordance with EPArules. Contractor shall provide documentation of legal disposal when requested. The cost ofdisposal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.37. WARRANTY37.1 The systems specified herein shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanshipand material under normal use and service for a period of one year from acceptance by the Owner orOwner’s Representative.37.2 If, within the aforementioned warranty period, any of the materials specified herein isproven to be defective in any way, it shall be replaced or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.The warranty shall include the providing of all labor and materials necessary for repair orreplacement of any defective components. The Contractor is responsible for the costs of anyservices required by equipment suppliers that are not included in the suppliers' warranties.37.3 The Contractor shall, after acceptance of the installation by the Owner or the Owner'sRepresentative, provide any service incidental to the proper performance of the system under thewarranties outlined above for the time periods listed above.37.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that his work does not invalidate eitherwholly or partially any existing warranties or the warranties of material or work performed byothers. The Contractor is responsible for the costs to repair damaged work and to re-establish thewarranty.38. OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT38.1 The Contractor shall install all equipment designated to be Owner furnished.38.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to receive, store and enforce warranty on the Ownerfurnished equipment as if it were originally furnished by the Contractor.Project #: 3894 16000 - 16
38.3 The Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the Owner furnished equipment upon receipt.The Contractor shall have 24 hours after receipt to note any damage to the Owner furnishedequipment. After that time, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the condition of the Ownerfurnished equipment.39. TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL POWER39.1 Electrical power from the Owner’s existing system shall be used without metering andwithout payment of use charges.39.2 The Contractor must make arrangements with the Owner for power and provideinstallation of equipment, wiring, switches and outlets necessary to provide adequate supply forlighting and power for construction purposes as well as power for construction site offices and othertemporary storage and construction buildings.39.3 The Contractor must provide and maintain lights and signs to prevent damage or injuryand must illuminate all hazardous areas. Safety lights must be illuminated during all periods ofoccupancy.39.4 Materials used for temporary electrical power may be new or used but must be adequatein capacity for the purpose intended and must not create unsafe conditions or violate therequirements of applicable codes.39.5 The Contractor shall install all work to have a neat and orderly appearance and to make itstructurally sound throughout. The Contractor must maintain all temporary electrical systems togive continuous service and provide safe working conditions.39.6 The Contractor must modify the service as required by the progress of this job.39.7 The Contractor shall remove all temporary equipment and materials upon completion ofconstruction, repair all damage caused by the installation and restore the area to satisfactoryconstruction.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16000 - 17
SECTION 16100ELECTRICALINTERIOR ELECTRICAL WORK1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 16000 - ELECTRICAL, GENERAL shall apply tothis entire section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipmentand services necessary for and incidental to the installation of all electrical equipment in thisbuilding.3. MOUNTING HEIGHTS3.1 Unless otherwise noted, all mounting heights indicated on the Drawings shall be to thecenterline of the wall box or device indicated except that devices with operable componentsincluding receptacles above and/or below the center line shall be adjusted as necessary so that themost extreme portion of the operable component for all operating positions is below 48 inches andabove 18 inches. All device mounting heights shall be ADA compliant for front approach. Deviceswhich protrude more than four-inches from the wall in any part of the means of egress shall bemounted such that the bottom of the device is 80 inches above finished floor.4. LOCATION OF OUTLETS4.1 The Contractor shall verify location of all outlets before roughing in for same. TheOwner or the Owner's Representative shall have the right to relocate any outlet on the project tenfeet from the location indicated on the plans, prior to roughing in for same.4.2 Maintain a minimum horizontal spacing of 24 inches between all outlets on oppositesides of fire rated walls.4.3 No back-to-back outlets.5. WIRING IN EXISTING BUILDING5.1 The Contractor shall disconnect and remove all existing wiring and electrical equipmentin the existing building as indicated on the Drawings.5.2 Where devices and wiring are removed from existing junction boxes, the Contractor shallprovide blank cover plates on boxes and knockout snap-in blanks in any open knockout holes.Project #: 3894 16100 - 1
5.3 Where existing flush mounted panelboards are indicated to be removed, they shall havetheir interiors and covers removed. This Contractor shall provide a new blank cover on the backbox.5.4 It is the intent of this project to provide the Owner with a complete new wiring andconduit system. No existing conduit or wiring shall be retained or re-used unless shown otherwiseor approved by the Owner's Representative.6. CONDUIT & RACEWAY6.1 Wherever the terms "conduit" or "raceways" appear, it shall be understood to mean anyone, or combination of, the following types:6.1.1 Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS)6.1.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)6.1.3 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC)6.1.4 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)6.1.5 Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)6.1.6 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit6.1.7 Surface Metal Raceway (where specifically called for)6.1.8 Factory Wiring Assembly Systems (for use in concealed, above slab, areas only)6.1.9 Other conduits (where specifically called for)6.2 <strong>Us</strong>e of conduit smaller than 3/4 inch trade size is not permitted unless part of a factorywiring assembly system or specifically called for.6.3 RGS, IMC or EMT shall be steel piping, zinc galvanized. It shall be of sufficient weightand toughness to withstand cracking and peeling during bending. RGS, IMC or EMT protectedsolely by enamel shall not be used.6.4 Only non-flexible types of "conduit" such as RGS, IMC, PVC, or EMT shall be permittedfor installations for future wiring or wiring by others.6.5 Each piece of conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut squareand taper reamed and shall be furnished in ten foot lengths, threaded at each end. Couplings shall besupplied at one end with a protective sleeve at the other end. All threads shall be cleanly cut. Eachlength shall bear the Underwriters' label.Project #: 3894 16100 - 2
6.6 All conduit shall be manufactured to UL-6, UL-1242 or UL-797 and ANSI C80.1, ANSIC80.6 or ANSI C80.3 standards.7. RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT7.1 The Contractor shall provide RGS conduit for the following applications:7.1.1 In gravel or other sub-base floor fills7.1.2 Horizontal runs in concrete floor slabs7.1.3 In masonry walls below grade7.1.4 Vertical or horizontal runs in poured concrete walls7.1.5 Areas subject to severe physical damage, such as, but not limited to, mechanicalequipment rooms/spaces or corridors with fork truck traffic7.1.6 Hazardous areas7.1.7 Areas with corrosive atmosphere7.1.8 For support of fixtures or other equipment7.1.9 On exposed exterior pipe bridges7.1.10 Where RGS is called for on the Drawings7.1.11 Where other types of conduit are not specifically required or permitted in thesespecifications7.2 RGS conduit may be supplied in lieu of IMC, PVC or EMT for all applications.7.3 RGS shall not be used:7.3.1 Where other types of conduit are called for on the Drawings7.3.2 For short sections where FMC is required for vibration isolation8. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT8.1 The Contractor may provide IMC in lieu of RGS for the following:8.1.1 Horizontal runs in concrete floor slabs8.1.2 In masonry walls below gradeProject #: 3894 16100 - 3
8.1.3 Vertical or horizontal runs in poured concrete walls8.1.4 Hazardous areas8.1.5 Areas with corrosive atmosphere8.1.6 On exposed exterior pipe bridges8.1.7 For support of fixtures or other equipment8.1.8 Areas subject to severe physical damage, such as, but not limited to, mechanicalequipment rooms/spaces or corridors with fork truck traffic9. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)9.1 PVC conduit shall be provided for direct burial or encasement in concrete duct banks.9.2 PVC conduit shall be composed of High Impact PVC, shall conform to industry standardsand be UL listed for underground and exposed use.9.3 Direct buried PVC conduit shall be Schedule 40. Concrete encased PVC conduit used forduct banks may be Schedule EB.9.4 PVC conduit shall not be used for interior applications unless called for on the Drawings.10. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING10.1 EMT shall be provided for the following applications, except where RGS, IMC, or PVCare required.10.1.1 In masonry walls above grade10.1.2 Concealed locations except in masonry walls below grade and in poured concrete wallsand floors.10.1.3 Exposed interior locations10.1.4 Exposed exterior locations if RGS or IMC are not required by these specifications10.1.5 Higher than ten feet in corridors with fork truck traffic10.2 EMT shall not be used for the following applications:10.2.1 Where RGS, IMC or PVC are requiredProject #: 3894 16100 - 4
10.2.2 Areas subject to severe physical abuse10.2.3 Direct burial including burial in cinder fill10.2.4 Applications subject to galvanic action10.3 RGS or IMC shall be provided for any applications where EMT is prohibited.10.4 EMT applications shall have short lengths of FMC as required for vibration isolation andto allow movement of lighting fixtures.10.5 Concealed conduit shall be EMT except where factory wiring assembly systems arepermitted.11. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT11.1 Flexible metallic steel conduit shall be provided for connection to motors, transformers,and other equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement and to recessed lightingfixtures as short whips. This flexible conduit, unless otherwise noted, shall be of the same size asthe conduit to which it is connected and shall be bonded. Connection to motors, transformers andother high vibration producing equipment shall not exceed 18 inches in length. Half inch flexiblemetallic conduit may be used for "fixture whip" final connections to lighting fixtures. Fixture whipsshall not exceed 72 inches in length. Where used at wet or damp locations, the flexible conduit shallhave an outer, listed liquid-tight, corrosion resistant, plastic coating.11.2 All flexible metallic steel conduits shall be terminated in squeeze type connectors withinsulated throats. Connectors shall use two-screw tightening configuration on conduit one inch andabove. Where liquid-tight flexible conduit is used, connector shall include screw-in metal ferrulesand insulated throats.11.3 Flexible metallic conduit shall not be utilized as part of the "Grounding System." Aninsulated grounding conductor shall be used at all locations where flexible metallic conduit isinstalled.12. SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS (if required)12.1 Only where called for, surface metal raceways may be utilized in the existing building toextend wiring from a surface mounted electrical device to locations specifically approved by theOwner's Representative. Where new construction in the existing building will allow recessedmounting of electrical items, such items shall be wired as herein specified. Where existingconstruction allows walls or ceilings to be fished, MC cable wiring shall be installed concealed. TheContractor shall extend the raceways along baseboards and doorframes or as directed by the Owner'sRepresentative.12.2 Surface metal raceways shall be of steel and consist of galvanized base strip secured tothe building construction by the use of supporting clips and straps and an overall cover finished withProject #: 3894 16100 - 5
uff colored paint and entirely rust-proofed. The Contractor shall provide all fittings, adaptors,device boxes, covers and special fittings as required for a complete installation utilizing 90 degreeangles installed with the lines of the building in areas in which it is to be provided. Surface metalraceways shall not be provided in sizes smaller than Wiremold #500 or approved equal.12.3 Surface metal raceways shall be adequately secured to building structures and shall beanchored on three foot centers (maximum).12.4 Surface metal raceway shall be painted. Factory painted raceway shall be providedwhere possible. Color shall be approved by the Owner prior to start of work.13. FACTORY WIRING ASSEMBLY SYSTEMS13.1 Factory wiring assembly systems, such as Type MC cable, are a factory assembly of oneor more conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlockingtape or smooth or corrugated tube.13.2 The Contractor may provide factory wiring assembly systems for all interior wiringAWG #8 and smaller which is concealed in non-masonry walls above slab and concealed aboveceilings, unless otherwise required to be run in RGS, EMT or other raceway. Type MC AWG #12shall be the minimum size wiring used.13.3 Factory wiring assembly systems (MC cable) shall not be used for exposed applications.13.4 MC cable shall be rated 600V and shall have galvanized steel interlocking armor, copperTHHN insulated conductors and a green insulated grounding conductor. MC cable shall be providedwith UL listed MC cable fittings and connectors.13.5 Type MC cable shall be supported and secured at intervals not exceeding six feet andshall be secured within 12 inches from every outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. MC cableshall not be supported from the ceiling system or wires nor shall it rest on or drape over the ceilingtiles.13.6 MC cable shall be permitted to be fished into walls and ceilings of existing finishedbuildings without being supported.14. CONDUIT INSTALLATION - STEEL14.1 The conduit system shall be concealed in the construction except in rooms usedexclusively to house mechanical and electrical equipment or in portions of the building where it isimpractical. However, at these locations the conduit shall be installed as inconspicuously as possibleand in a manner as approved by the Owner's Representative.14.2 Conduits in masonry walls shall be run in core of blocks. The Contractor shall cooperateand coordinate his work with the Masonry Contractor to prevent any cutting or chasing afterinstallation of the masonry walls.Project #: 3894 16100 - 6
14.3 In the existing building, the Contractor shall cut and patch as required to conceal theconduits to new equipment installed.14.4 Conduits shall be installed in such a manner that wires may be removed and replaced at alater date.14.5 All conduits shall be run as straight and direct as possible to hold the number of bends oroffsets to a minimum. All conduits shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls,ceiling and structural members and with right angle turns utilizing condulets or symmetrical bends.14.6 There shall not be more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total)between pull points, e.g. conduit bodies and boxes.14.7 A separation of six inches shall be maintained between all conduit and hot water lines,steam lines and flues in the building. Where conduits and hot water lines and steam lines are closerthan six inches, an approved pipe covering shall be used over the conduit for the length of the run ofsuch exposure.14.8 Running threads shall not be permitted. Approved threaded couplings, such as Erikson ora suitable union shall be used where such construction is required. Support of conduit shall bespaced not more than ten feet apart and within three feet of outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets.Conduit runs shall be supported by approved straps or beam clamps.14.9 Where it is necessary to cross expansion joints in the building construction, conduit runsshall be provided with suitable expansion fittings and copper bonding jumpers.14.10 In exterior locations or interior locations subject to extreme temperature fluctuations,long continuous straight runs of conduit shall be provided with suitable expansion fittings andcopper bonding jumpers every 200 feet.14.11 All couplings shall be tightened to provide an electrical bond throughout the entireconduit system.14.12 Each end of every conduit run shall terminate with a galvanized locknut and bushinginside and a locknut outside of the terminating box or in an approved hub.14.13 All conduit fittings shall be separate from the conduit and shall be an approved type.Couplings and connections shall be compression type for exterior EMT and threaded type for IMCor RGS. Indenter type fittings or set screw type conduit fittings may only be used for interior EMTapplications other than those in masonry walls.14.14 Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt or trash form lodgingin conduits. Free clogged conduits of all obstructions.Project #: 3894 16100 - 7
14.15 No horizontal conduit runs shall be made in tile or masonry walls. Conduits shall not beinstalled in cinder fills unless encased in concrete.14.16 All conduits, which are to remain empty for future introduction of conductors, shall beprovided with a 200# test nylon line. Spare conduits shall be tagged at both ends in an approvedmanner indicating destination and future use.14.17 All spare or future conduits shall be sealed with metal conduit seals (pennies) andsecured in place with a malleable conduit bushing.15. CONDUIT INSTALLATION - PVC15.1 In addition to the applicable portions of "CONDUIT INSTALLATION - STEEL," thefollowing additional requirements apply to the installation of PVC conduit:15.1.1 PVC shall be installed only at locations specifically approved by the Owner'sRepresentative. The Contractor shall obtain said approval for each location where it is desired toinstall PVC.15.1.2 PVC conduit runs shall transition to the appropriate metal conduit five feet prior to anybend which causes the conduit run to become exposed.15.1.3 PVC shall not be installed where subject to physical damage.15.1.4 PVC shall be cut square and deburred. PVC sections shall be joined using an approvedsolvent cement applied as recommended by the manufacturer. Each joint shall be completelywatertight.15.1.5 All field bends shall be made using an electric hot box bender designed to handle the sizeof PVC to be bent. The heating, forming and cooling of each bend and the minimum radius of thecurve of the inner edge shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and theminimum inner edge bending radius established by the NEC.15.1.6 PVC conduit shall not be used in return air plenum ceiling or fire-rated ceilingassemblies. The Contractor shall review the architectural and mechanical Drawings to determinethese locations.16. CONDUCTORS16.1 Unless otherwise directed, all conductors for lighting, power feeders and branch circuitwiring shall be American Wire Gauge, rated 600 volts and 98 percent conductivity copper withTHWN-THHN type insulation.16.2 All sizes shown on Drawings, unless noted otherwise, are based on copper. Aluminumconductors shall not be permitted.Project #: 3894 16100 - 8
16.3 Conductor size No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, except that No. 10 AWG orsmaller wiring used for motor branch circuit wiring may be stranded. Conductor size No. 8 AWGand larger shall be stranded.16.4 Unless otherwise called for, minimum size conductors for branch circuits shall be No. 12AWG, except that circuits over 100 feet shall use #10 AWG as the minimum size conductors; forClass 1 power-limited remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; and for Class 2 low-energyremote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.17. WIRING17.1 Great care shall be exercised in pulling wires into conduits so as not to damageinsulation. Only approved compounds shall be used to assist in the pulling of wires.17.2 Electrical conductors and cables shall be installed in such a manner as to permit futurereplacement.17.3 Multiple circuits in common conduit shall have individual neutrals unless otherwisenoted. Circuits to modular furniture whips shall have combined neutrals.17.4 Isolated ground receptacle circuits shall have two equipment ground conductors sized perNEC. One conductor shall be connected to the receptacle yoke and the other shall be connected tothe green ground screw. Both conductors shall be connected to the same ground bus in thepanelboard. Isolated ground receptacle circuits for modular furniture whips shall have a ground wireseparate from the normal ground conductor but the receptacles and the integral furniture wiring busshall be connected according to the manufacturer's wiring diagrams and each individual receptacleneed not have two grounds.17.5 The feeder circuits to panelboards with a 200 percent neutral shall have two neutralconductors sized the same as the phase conductors or a single conductor of equivalent ampacity.17.6 Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made exceptwithin outlet or junction boxes. Where called for, branch circuit wiring may be run as a multi-wirecircuit to the extent of three different phases and one neutral per conduit, maximum.17.7 For convenience in maintenance and testing, no painting or taping for identification ofcables will be permitted on a permanent basis, except as noted below:17.8 Color coding shall be as follows:17.8.1 120 Volt, Two Wire Circuit: Grounded neutral - white; ungrounded leg - black.17.8.2 208Y/120 Volt, Three Phase, Four Wire: Grounded neutral - white; one hot leg - black;one hot leg - red; one hot leg - blue.Project #: 3894 16100 - 9
17.8.3 240/120 Volt, Single Phase, Three Wire: Grounded neutral - white; one hot leg - black;one hot leg - red.17.8.4 480Y/277 Volt, Three Phase, Four Wire: Grounded neutral - white; one hot leg - brown;one hot leg - orange; one hot leg - yellow.17.8.5 All ground wires shall be green.17.9 Color coding shall be factory applied to the entire length of the conductors by one of thefollowing methods, except as noted and limited below:17.9.1 Solid color compound.17.9.2 Solid color coating.17.10 Field applied color coding may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger thanNo. 8 AWG, where allowed by the NEC.17.11 Colored, pressure sensitive plastic or vinyl tape shall be applied in half overlapping turnsfor a distance of six inches for all terminal points and in all boxes in which conductors areaccessible. The last two laps of tape shall be applied with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.Tape shall be 3/4 inch wide, 0.004 inch thick and colors shall be as hereinbefore specified. Tapeshall be resistive to acids, alkalines, alcohol, chemicals and weathering. Cable identificationmarkings shall not be obliterated by taping and tape location may be adjusted slightly to preventobliteration of cable marking.17.12 In every pull or splice box and all other places where wires and cables may not be readilyidentified by nameplate markings on the equipment to which they connect, each circuit shall beidentified with a permanent identification tag securely fastened to the conductors with plastic ties.Identification tags shall have the number of conductors, gauge and circuit identification engravedthereon in 1/4 inch high letters. Tags shall be made on label-maker tape.18. SYSTEM BALANCING18.1 The system of feeder and branch circuits for power and lighting shall be connected topanelboard buses in a manner that loads connected thereto will be balanced on all phases as closelyas practicable (within ten percent). Should there be any unfavorable condition of balance on anypart of the electrical systems, Electrical Contractor shall make changes to remedy unbalancedcondition. Each circuit in a group of circuits having a common neutral wire shall be connected todifferent phases.19. SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS19.1 Splices and terminations in wires No. 6 AWG and larger shall be made with mechanicalsplicing or compression type devices and lugs. Mechanical splicing devices and lugs for wires No. 2AWG and larger shall be of a type in which the contact pressure on the wire is obtained by two orProject #: 3894 16100 - 10
more screws or bolts and so designed that the failure of any one screw bolt or nut will not result in atotal loss of contact pressure.19.2 Splices in conductors sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller may be made with pressureconnectors consisting of cone shaped coiled springs with insulating covers or, for strandedconductors, with crimped sleeve connectors having insulating covers and installed with propercompression tools.19.3 Splices and terminations in all equipment, material, etc. shall be rated for 75 degree Ctemperature to allow use of higher rated conductor.19.4 Compression tools shall be ratchet type. Proof of calibration shall be provided upon theOwner's Representative’s request.20. FUSES20.1 Provide, for every fuse clip to which a circuit has been connected, a nonrenewablecartridge fuse of the size indicated on the Drawings or as required in accordance with themanufacturer’s requirements. All fuses shall be dual element, time delay, unless noted otherwise.20.2 Unless otherwise specified, current limiting fuses shall be Class RK1 dual element orClass L as indicated on the Drawings. Sizes shall be as indicated. All fuse holders for R type fusesshall be provided with rejection clips.20.3 Provide the Owner with three spare fuses for each size and type used on this project.20.4 Fuses shall be manufactured by Buss, Gould, CEFCO or approved equal.21. CAST FITTINGS21.1 All cast fittings shall be provided with heavy threaded hubs to fit the conduit used. Ironcast fittings shall be cast malleable iron thoroughly coated inside and outside after all machinedwork is completed. Cast fittings shall be used on all conduit runs except at locations where it isimpractical. At these locations factory ells can be used. No factory ells shall be used on exterior ofbuilding. All conduits on exterior of buildings or locations where they will be subject to moistureshall be weatherproof.22. WIRING TROUGHS22.1 Wiring troughs shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings orwhere required by job conditions. Troughs up to six inches square shall be made of 16 gauge sheetsteel with larger sizes being made of 14 gauge sheet steel with factory or painted finish; havescrewed or hinged cover and insulated cross brackets to support conductors at three foot intervals.Troughs shall be of sufficient size to accommodate feeder conduits and cables and provide ampleroom for installation and training of conductors.Project #: 3894 16100 - 11
22.2 All troughs shall be supported from the building structure independent of the conduitsentering them. Feeders in troughs shall be identified by identification tag as hereinbefore specified.23. OUTLET BOXES23.1 At all locations shown on the Drawings, an outlet box of proper type and size to satisfythe intended requirement shall be provided. Boxes shall be rigidly secured in position, set true andsquare. Boxes shall be supported independent of conduits entering them.23.2 Outlet boxes shall be sheet steel, zinc coated and be of a class to satisfy the conditions foreach outlet.23.3 Concealed outlet boxes shall not be less than four inches square or rectangular andprovided with the proper size knockouts for the conduits used. All unused knockouts must remainclosed. Boxes in plaster construction shall be provided with approved covers or plaster rings.Where permitted by construction, depth of outlet boxes shall be 2-1/4 inch minimum.23.4 Where voltage between switches exceeds 300 volts, isolating barriers shall be providedbetween each gang of box. All ganged switches connected to 277 volts shall have isolating barriers.23.5 Where convenience outlets and data/communications outlets are installed in a commonbox, dividers coated with a foil shield for the isolation of EMI/RFI interference shall be providedbetween the power and signal sections.23.6 All outlets occurring in other than plaster construction and used for other than lights,shall be provided with flush, rectangular, square cornered boxes made for the purpose. No sectionalswitch boxes will be permitted and a box shall be installed for each single device. Where devicesare ganged, gang-type boxes shall be provided.23.7 Boxes shall be of <strong>unit</strong> construction and of size required for the number of devices shown.The shape of the box shall be such as to permit surfacing materials to be cut in straight lines and tofit closely around the box. The box shall be so placed that the cover plate will be flush with thefinished wall surface.23.8 All boxes for lighting outlets shall be round or octagonal and provided with fixture studsof a size suitable for the weight of the fixture to be supported.23.9 Outlet boxes used for exposed interior conduit runs shall be of cast rust-resisting metal.Gasketed covers shall be provided where the outlet is exposed to weather or moisture, or whereindicated on the Drawings. At all locations where boxes are provided for special systems the boxesshall be the type and size recommended by the special system manufacturer.24. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND TERMINAL BOXES24.1 Junction boxes of ample size shall be provided as required by the construction. Boxesshall be constructed of cast rust-resisting metal or of 14 gauge galvanized steel with riveted orProject #: 3894 16100 - 12
welded joints and provided with covers of the same material which shall be screwed or hinged to thebox. Boxes shall be flanged and tapped to receive machine screws. Holes in covers shall be inalignment with tapped holes in box. Where no sizes are given on the Drawings, boxes shall be nosmaller than the minimum size allowed by NEC. Where feeders of different systems or voltagespass through the same box, barriers shall be provided for proper separation.24.2 Flush mounted boxes shall be fitted with a cover, which overlaps the box one inch allaround. Boxes shall be installed every 100 feet in all major feeders.24.3 Boxes shall not be placed in locations made inaccessible by piping, ducts, conduits, orother equipment. Attached to all junction and pull boxes shall be the manufacturer's label,Underwriter's label, and an indication of the metal gauge. Each junction box and pull box shallcontain an identification plate on the cover indicating the characteristics of the service therein.Boxes shall be rigidly secured to building construction in position, set true and square. Boxes shallbe supported independent of conduits entering them.24.4 Terminal boxes shall be used in all cases where splices are required in cables orconductors for control wiring or for the telephone and communications systems. All terminal boxesshall include an interior mounting panel and have a hinged cover. For communication system, useterminal block type as recommended by equipment manufacturer.25. LOCAL SWITCHES25.1 Switches shall be provided in the quantities and at the locations shown on Drawings.Unless otherwise noted, switches for control of lighting and appliance branch circuits shall begeneral purpose AC snap switches of "quiet" design with toggle handles and shall be rated 20 amp,120/277 volts. Switch type and number of poles shall be as indicated on the Drawings. All switchesshall have terminals for side wiring only. Spring clip type ("push in") termination is not allowed.25.2 All switches shall be specification grade and shall be marked to indicate that they complywith the requirements of the current revision of Federal Specification W-S-896. Switch handle colorand coverplate color shall be as directed by the Owner's Representative.25.3 Where more than one switch is installed in an outlet, they shall be covered by a commonwall plate.25.4 Unless otherwise shown, mount wall switches (including dimmers) 48 inches abovefinished floor.25.5 Switches shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or approved equal.26. FLUORESCENT DIMMER SWITCHES26.1 Unless otherwise called for, fluorescent dimmer switches shall be UL listed, linear slidetype, single pole, 1280 watt, rated 120 volts AC for control of up to forty 32 watt fluorescent lampsusing only electronic dimming. The dimmer switch shall be matched to the dimming ballast. UnitProject #: 3894 16100 - 13
shall have a positive "off" switch and necessary filters to protect against radio frequencyinterference. Dimmer switch and coverplate color shall be as directed by the Owner’sRepresentative.26.2 All dimmers and switches shall provide power failure memory. Should power beinterrupted and subsequently returned, the lights will come back on to the same levels set prior to thepower interruption. Restoration to some other default level is not acceptable.26.3 Dimmers and switches shall withstand voltage surges of up to 6000V and current surgesof up to 200A without damage.26.4 Dimmers and switches shall meet the UL 20 limited short circuit test requirement forsnap switches.26.5 Dimmer shall be voltage regulated so the +10 percent variation in line voltage shall causenot more than a plus five percent variation in load voltage when dimmer is operating at 40V (fivepercent light output).26.6 Dimmers shall utilize an LC filtering network to minimize interference with properlyinstalled radio, audio and video equipment.26.7 Faceplate shall snap on to device with no visible means of attachment. Heat-fins shallnot be visible on front of device. At locations with multiple devices, one seamless, multi-gangfaceplate shall be provided. Contractor is responsible for coordination of proper backbox size andfaceplate type.26.8 Fluorescent dimmer switches shall be Lutron, Catalog No. NTF-10-120 or approvedequal.27. DECORATOR AUTOMATIC WALL SWITCHES27.1 Decorator automatic wall switches shall mount in a standard wall box and fit behind astandard decorator wall plate. Wall switches shall use advance passive infrared technology to detectoccupancy.27.2 Wall switches shall use a four level Fresnel lens, provide 180 degrees detection coverageand up to 1000 square feet (35 feet long by 30 feet wide) of walking (major) motion and 300 squarefeet (20 feet long by 15 feet wide) for desktop (minor) motion.27.3 Wall switches shall automatically turn on when occupancy is detected and shallautomatically turn "off" after a predetermined period of time after occupancy is no longer detected.Unit shall be field settable for Manual-ON or Auto-ON operation.27.4 Wall switches shall have an overridable built-in light level sensor, which shall holdlighting systems "off" in the Auto mode when natural light levels are above the pre-set adjustablelevel. Once lights are switched "on", the light level sensor shall not switch them "off" even ifProject #: 3894 16100 - 14
daylight levels increase. Set light level sensor to override unless otherwise noted. Wall switchesshall have digital time delay settings of 15 seconds up to 30 minutes.27.5 Wall switches shall be compatible with electronic and PL lamp ballasts, have nominimum load requirement, and include voltage drop protection, zero volts cross over circuit(switches at or near zero volts) and no leakage to load fixture.27.6 Wall switches shall operate at 120/277 VAC and shall accommodate an electrical load of800 watts at 120 volts or 1200 watts at 277 volts.27.7 Unit shall be Watt Stopper PW-200 and/or PW-300 for dual switching or approved equal.Only occupancy sensors with equal or greater coverage dimensions will be an approved equal.28. DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY SENSORS28.1 Unless otherwise noted, occupancy sensors shall be dual technology type sensors.28.2 Dual technology occupancy sensors shall have combined passive infrared technology andultrasonic technology.28.2.1 The ultrasonic occupancy sensor shall be capable of detecting presence, in the controlarea, by detecting sonic shifts in transmitted ultrasound.28.2.2 The passive infrared sensors shall be capable of detecting presence, in control area, bydetecting changes in infrared energy.28.3 Sensor shall be low profile, ceiling mounted with a coverage area of 1,000 square feet (32feet square) in a 360 degree pattern. Sensor shall be mounted within 16 feet of the area entrance(s).Sensors shall have an unobstructed line of sight to the entrance(s). Locate sensors such that surfaceor pendant mounted lighting fixtures, projectors and other devices do not interfere with sensoroperation.28.4 Occupancy sensors shall not interfere with each other when two or more are placed in thesame area.28.5 Lighting shall come on when either of the technologies senses occupancy (occupancyoption 1). Once lighting is on, detection by either technology shall hold lighting on.28.6 Each sensor shall contain a shunt provision, which will enable bypass of the sensor in theevent of failure. Each sensor shall be able to be field set so that only one or both technologies areneeded to trigger lighting on. Sensor shall be temperature and humidity resistant with less than a 6dB shift in the temperature range of -4 degrees F to 140 degrees F.28.7 Time delay range shall be adjustable from five to 30 minutes and sensitivity adjustmentshall range from zero to a maximum of 10.Project #: 3894 16100 - 15
28.8 Sensors shall operate on 24 volts DC provided from a system compatible Power Pack anddraw a maximum of 43 milliamps.28.9 Where indicated on the Drawings sensors in the same room shall be linked via the 24VDC control wiring using the manufacturers installation wiring schematic such that all power packsand/or relay packs along with the lighting fixtures they control operate together such that detectionof occupancy by any one sensor causes all lighting fixtures to be on.28.10 Sensors shall be Watt Stopper Model DT-300 and DT-200 or equal. Proposedsubstitutions shall have the same coverage length and width as the comparable Watt Stopper modelor the Contractor will be required to provide additional sensors to provide the same coverage.29. SENSOR POWER PACK29.1 Power packs shall be a self-contained transformer designed with a 1/2 inch snap-in nipplefor mounting in 1/2 inch knock-out on a surface mount type mounting box.29.2 Power packs shall be dual rated 120/277V and shall have one dry contact capable ofswitching a 20 ampere ballast load at 120 or 277 VAC and provide 24 VDC at 150ma output capableof controlling up to six WPIR, three Ultrasonic occupancy sensors or three Dual Technologyoccupancy sensors.29.3 Power pack shall be Watt Stopper Catalog No. BZ-100 or approved equal.29.4 Where additional switching poles are required provide additional power packs wired inparallel.30. CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES30.1 Convenience receptacles, either duplex or simplex, shall be Specification grade 20 amp,two pole, three wire, 125 volts, NEMA 5-20R, be listed under FED SPEC WC-596 and shall beconstructed of heavy duty high impact nylon with brass triple wipe contacts, side wired and designedto accommodate up to and including #10 solid or stranded copper wire. Mounting bracket andscrews shall be steel zinc plated. Spring clip type ("Push In") termination is not allowed.30.2 All receptacles shall have green grounding screws. Receptacle and cover plate colorshall be as directed by the Owner's Representative except that receptacles powered from theemergency generator shall have a red face unless otherwise directed by the Owner.30.3 Unless otherwise shown, mount wall receptacles 18 inches above finished floor.30.4 Convenience receptacles shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or approvedequal.31. GFCI RECEPTACLESProject #: 3894 16100 - 16
31.1 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles (GFCI) shall be provided at the locationsshown on the Drawings and at all other locations where required by the NEC. Where shown, theyshall be wired in a "non-feed-through" manner. These devices shall be Specification grade and belisted under UL Standard 943, Class A, Group 1, rated 20 amp, 125 volts, 60 Hz and provided with a20 amp NEMA 5-20R rectangular duplex receptacle face. Receptacle face and cover plate colorshall be as directed by the Owner's Representative.31.2 GFCI receptacles shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or approved equal.32. WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES32.1 Outdoor receptacles shall be listed as weather resistant, be protected by a GFCI, and haveweatherproof covers, which retain their rating while in use.32.2 Weatherproof covers shall be manufactured by Bell, Mulberry, Leviton or approvedequal.33. SPECIAL RECEPTACLES33.1.1 Special receptacles shall be surface mounting type, with voltage and NEMAconfiguration as indicated on the Drawing and shall be constructed of arc-resistant, black urea withtin plated, heavy-duty double wipe contacts.34. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES34.1 Isolated ground receptacles shall be identified by an orange triangle on the face of thereceptacle.34.2 Isolated ground receptacles shall be molded of high impact, chemical-resistant, lockedin-placeon a nickel and brass double-plated steel yoke. Size and NEMA configuration shall be asnoted on the Drawings.34.3 Isolated ground receptacles shall use #10 brass binding head terminal screws approvedfor use of up to #10 copper wire. Contacts shall be one-piece triple-wipe brass.34.4 Isolated ground receptacles shall be UL listed in accordance with File #E2258-Guide#RTRT and comply with performance requirements of Federal Specification WC596F and NEMAStandards WD-1, WD-6, UL498 and CSA Standards.35. WALL PLATES35.1 All local control switches, telephone outlets, receptacles, blank outlets and similardevices shall be provided with a specification grade, UL listed, smooth, thermoplastic wall platewith beveled edges. Where more than one switch or device is installed in an outlet box, gang platesshall be used. Wall plate color shall be as directed by the Owner's Representative. Screws shallmatch color of plates.Project #: 3894 16100 - 17
35.2 Finished wall plates shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or approvedequal.35.3 At locations where FS and FD device boxes are used for switches and receptacle outlets,a stainless steel plate shall be used. Plate shall fit flush with all sides of the box.35.4 Stainless steel plates shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or approvedequal.35.5 Device plates for use on surface metal raceway shall be metal furnished by the racewaymanufacturer with the same finish and color as the raceway.35.6 Provide labels on all switch, receptacle, telephone and data outlet wall plates with blackletters on clear plastic adhesive using a Panduit LS7 laminated tape system or equal indicating thecircuit source with the same identification numbers used to label the circuit at the source panelboard,patch panel or punch down board.36. DISCONNECT SWITCHES36.1 Disconnect switches shall be of the rating indicated on Drawings. Disconnect switchesshall be heavy-duty type, fused or non-fused, as indicated, with positive quick-make and quick-breakoperating mechanism with external operating handle. Switches for indoor use shall be containedwithin a general purpose, NEMA Type 1 enclosure and for outdoor use, in a NEMA 3R enclosure,unless otherwise indicated. Switch shall be painted gray inside and outside. Each switch shall beequipped to accommodate size wire indicated on the Drawings. Where used as service entranceequipment, disconnect switches shall be provided with service entrance labels.36.2 Unless otherwise called for, the switches shall disconnect each phase and shall contain asolid neutral bar where a neutral is indicated, and a ground bar. The enclosure shall be providedwith openings in the proper location to permit installation of the conduit and wiring system indicatedon the Drawings. Disconnect switches provided with "R" type fuses shall have rejection clips.36.3 All switches shall be of proper horsepower rating as applicable and have dual coverinterlocks designed to prevent opening of the switch door when the handle is in the "ON" positionand to prevent closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. The handle position shallindicate whether the switch is "ON" or "OFF." Unit cover shall be provided with a suitable meansof interlock release. Provisions shall be made for locking the operating handle in the "OFF"position.36.4 Approved type NEMA enclosures shall be supplied for switches exposed to weather. Atlocations where special enclosures are provided, conduit sealing fittings shall be installed for conduitentering the enclosure.36.5 Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric orapproved equal.Project #: 3894 16100 - 18
37. ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS37.1 Enclosed circuit breakers shall be of the rating indicated on Drawings. Enclosed circuitbreakers for indoor use shall be contained within a general purpose, NEMA Type 1 enclosure andfor outdoor use, in a NEMA 3R enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. At locations where specialenclosures are provided, conduit sealing fittings shall be installed for conduit entering the enclosure.Enclosed circuit breakers shall be painted gray inside and outside. Each enclosed circuit breakershall be equipped to accommodate size wire indicated on the Drawings. Where used as serviceentrance equipment, enclosed circuit breakers shall be provided with service entrance labels.37.2 Unless otherwise called for, the enclosed circuit breakers shall contain a solid neutral barwhere a neutral is indicated, and a ground bar. Lugs shall be rated to allow use of 75 degree C ratedconductors. The enclosure shall be provided with openings in the proper location to permitinstallation of the conduit and wiring system indicated on the Drawings.37.3 Circuit breakers shall have a short circuit rating equal to the short circuit rating of thenext upstream protective device unless otherwise noted. The handle position shall indicate whetherthe breaker is "ON" or "OFF." Provisions shall be made for locking the operating handle in the"OFF" position.37.4 Provide 120 VAC shunt tripping device where indicated on the Drawings.37.5 Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric orapproved equal.38. PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE38.1 All panelboards shall be of the dead front type, shall be manufactured in accordance withUL 67 and shall have branch circuit protectors in the quantity and of ratings indicated on theDrawings. Panelboards shall be provided with a neutral bar insulated from the cabinet and a groundbar bonded to the steel cabinet. Isolated ground panelboards shall have a second ground bar isolatedfrom the cabinet and the normal ground bar. Panelboards shall be sequence phased.38.2 Bus bars and all current carrying parts of panelboards, exclusive of circuit breakers, shallbe tin or silver plated copper, sized in accordance with the requirements of the Underwriter'sLaboratories, <strong>Inc</strong>.38.3 Branch circuit protectors of each panelboard shall be interchangeable, bolt-on, thermalmagnetic type; single or multiple pole with a voltage rating as indicated on the Drawings. All circuitbreakers within each panelboard (unless approved otherwise by the Owner’s Representative) shall beby the same manufacturer as that of the panelboard.38.4 Branch circuit breakers shall have short circuit interrupting capacities as indicated, notless than 22,000 amperes symmetrical for 208/120 volt system. Service and feeder circuit breakersin main distribution panels shall have short circuit interrupting capacities as indicated or not lessProject #: 3894 16100 - 19
than 22,000 amperes symmetrical. Series rating of circuit breakers to achieve the required shortcircuit interrupting ratings is acceptable only if written documentation of the required UL testing ofthe specific circuit breaker combination is submitted. Series rated panelboards shall be labeled toindicate that "Identified Replacement Components are Required". (Electrical Contractor shall beresponsible for coordinating the main distribution panelboard equipment AIC rating with availableshort circuit value as provided by the utility.)38.5 Circuit breakers shall be readily removable from front of panelboard without disturbingadjacent <strong>unit</strong>s. Circuit breakers shall have their ampere rating engraved on the breaker handle. Theyshall have quick-make and quick-break toggle mechanisms, non-fusible contacts, with inverse timecurrentcharacteristics. Breakers shall trip free on overload and shall indicate clearly whether theyare in open, tripped or closed position. Multiple pole <strong>unit</strong>s shall have a thermal element in each poleand a single handle. Closely grouped circuit breakers and thermal tripping devices mounted in acommon cabinet shall be derated when necessary in accordance with NEMA standard recommendedpractices for high ambient temperatures. All circuit breakers for lighting circuits shall be "SWD"rated or "HID" rated for HID lighting fixtures, "HM" rated for lighting fixture circuits with inherenthigh inrush current or individual dimmer applications and "HACR" rated for heating, airconditioning and refrigeration. Provide arc-fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) circuit breakers for allsingle-phase circuits to dwelling <strong>unit</strong> bedrooms.38.6 Circuit breakers shown on the Drawings to be installed in existing panelboards shall be ofthe same manufacturer, type and configuration as the existing panel circuit breaker.38.7 All lugs installed in panelboards shall be copper or high percentage copper alloy rated foruse with 75 degree C wiring. Any lug with screws or bolts, which, after installation, operates at ahigher temperature than the cable it connects, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additionalcost to the Owner.38.8 All bus contact surfaces shall be plated. The bus bars shall be hard drawn tin or silverplated copper of at least 98 percent conductivity, in continuous lengths and of such size and currentdensity so that when carrying the full rated capacity they shall not have a temperature rise of morethan 30 degrees C above that of the surrounding atmosphere. Each panel shall have a neutral busunless otherwise noted. Provide a neutral bus with 200 percent current capacity where indicated.Provisions for future breakers shall include all bus and hardware for the future breakers.38.9 Panelboards shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric, or approvedequal.39. PANELBOARD CABINETS39.1 All panelboards shall be mounted in a sheet steel enclosing cabinet designed for surfaceor flush mounting as indicated on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be fabricated of code-gauge,galvanized sheet steel and, unless otherwise specified, shall be furnished with manufacturer'sstandard gray finish. The rear of the cabinets shall be provided with a suitable means of supportingthe panelboard in such a manner that adjustments may be made in all directions.Project #: 3894 16100 - 20
39.2 Cabinets shall have suitable lugs for mounting and be provided with steel trims anddoors. Doors shall be hung on trim with heavy flush butt hinges. Doors and trims shall be ofintegral single-door construction and so designed that doors will close without a rabbet. Doors 48inches high or less shall be equipped with spring locks and catches. Doors larger than 48 inches inheight shall be provided with a vault type handle.39.3 Panelboards located indoors shall be rated NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. Panelboardslocated outdoors shall be rated NEMA 3R unless otherwise noted.39.4 Unless otherwise shown, panelboards shall be installed so that the operating handle of thetop branch circuit protector does not exceed 72 inches above finished floor and the bottom of thecabinet is not less than 18 inches above finished floor.39.5 All cabinets shall have wiring gutters at top, bottom and sides of sufficient size toadequately accommodate the conduits, wires and cables entering and leaving same and havingminimum depth of 5-3/4 inches and a minimum width of 20 inches. Cabinets shall be manufacturedin accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, <strong>Inc</strong>. standard for Cabinets and Boxes (UL 50).Unless otherwise called for, no splicing of wires shall be allowed in panelboard backboxes.39.6 Fronts of all cabinets shall have adjustable indicating type clamps and angle iron rest nearthe bottom to aid in installation and removal. All two-section panelboards shall have split covers.39.7 All cabinets shall be provided with the proper number and size openings for conduitsinstalled. No openings will be permitted which are not to be utilized.39.8 Circuit directory holders shall be metal frames welded to inside of each cabinet and havetransparent cover under which shall be placed neatly typewritten schedules identifying circuitcontrol.39.9 All panelboards in areas exposed to other than authorized personnel shall be providedwith lockable covers with all locks keyed alike.39.10 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two keys for each panelboard.40. CIRCUIT BREAKER "LOCK-ON" DEVICES40.1 Provide, install and connect handle "Lock-On" devices on the circuit breakers indicatedon the schedules. "Lock-On" devices shall prevent accidental turning "off" of critical circuits.These devices shall be "trip-free" and permit the circuit breaker to trip automatically on overload.Lock-on devices shall be of the type recommended by the panelboard and circuit breakermanufacturer.41. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS41.1 Full voltage manual starters for single phase, single speed, non-reversing motors up toone horsepower shall be horsepower rated and operated by means of an OFF/ON toggle mechanism.Project #: 3894 16100 - 21
The toggle mechanism shall be positive acting quick-make and break, toggle action with doublebreaksilver alloy contacts.41.2 A "trip-free" current sensing overload mechanism with inverse time limit features shallbe an integral part of the starter and it shall be so designed as to open the contacts if the motor isoverloaded. Provide overload heater of the proper size based on the horsepower, voltage and RPMof the motor, or on motor full load current.41.3 Manual motor starters shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric orapproved equal.42. MOTOR STARTER RELAYS42.1 Motor starter relays for single phase, single speed, non-reversing motors up to onehorsepower shall be horsepower rated with one N.O. contact.42.2 Motor starter relays shall be controlled by a continuous rated coil of AC or DC voltage asrequired by the ATC Contractor. Coordinate requirements with the ATC Contractor prior topurchase. For installation not controlled by the ATC system, provide 120 VAC coils.42.3 Indoor installations shall be provided in the available NEMA 1 enclosure. Outdoorinstallations shall be an open relay mounted in a separate NEMA 3R or 4 box.42.4 Motor starter relays shall be Class 8501 Type C manufactured by Square D or equal.43. MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS43.1 Unless otherwise specified, motor starters shall be of the magnetic type, NEMA class,size and type as indicated on the Drawings with red indicating light, HAND-OFF-AUTOMATICselector switch, four auxiliary contacts (two N.O. and two N.C.) and fused control powertransformer to provide 120 volts AC control voltage. Surge protection shall be provided for themotor starting coil.43.2 Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatorycontrol devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position. All safety controldevices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts and motor overloadprotective devices shall be connected in the motor control circuit in both the “hand” and the"automatic" positions. Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motorwindings, be of the solid state type which also provide phase loss protection and include a manualresettype pushbutton on the outside of the case.43.3 Motor starters and contactors shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, GeneralElectric or approved equal.44. COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERSProject #: 3894 16100 - 22
44.1 Unless otherwise specified, combination motor starters shall be of the fused disconnectswitch type complete with dual element, current limiting fuses. Unit shall be of the NEMA Classand size as noted on the Drawings, with overload protection in each pole. Overload elements shallbe of the proper size to protect the motor. Unless otherwise noted, <strong>unit</strong>s shall be equipped with redindicating light, HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch, four auxiliary contacts (two N.O. andtwo N.C.) and fused control power transformer to provide 120 volts A.C. control voltage. Surgeprotection shall be provided for the motor starting coil.44.2 Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the normal automaticregulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position. All safetycontrol devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts and motor overloadprotective devices shall be connected in the motor control circuit in both the “hand” and the"automatic" positions. Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motorwindings, be of the solid state type which also provide phase loss protection and include a manualresettype pushbutton on the outside of the case.44.3 Disconnect operating handle shall be interlocked with the door so that the door cannot beopened with the switch in the "ON" position, except through an interlock release mechanism knownonly to authorized personnel. The operating handle shall be arranged for padlocking in the "OFFf"position with up to three padlocks.44.4 Combination motor starters shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, GeneralElectric or approved equal.45. GROUNDING45.1 All electrical systems shall be suitably grounded, including all non-current carryingcomponents of all equipment and metallic conduits. Grounding shall be accomplished by means ofthe following grounding systems and shall be in complete accordance with the latest issue of theNational Electrical Code.45.2 The grounding electrode conductor system shall comprise a common ground conductorinterconnected to an acceptable coldwater service pipe. Grounded conductor shall be continuousthroughout its length without any splices. The water pipe connection shall be made with amechanical clamp type ground fitting that bonds both conduit and cable to the water pipe ahead ofmeter. Provide jumper around water meter and hot water heaters. Unless otherwise specified,conductor shall be installed in exposed conduit with conductor securely bonded to the conduit whereit enters and leaves the raceway.45.3 Contractor shall install a water stop for each grounding conductor, which passes througha foundation wall.45.4 Unless otherwise specified, the grounding system shall be augmented by the following:45.4.1 Extend grounding electrode conductor to steel frame of building where steel buildingframe or grounded water pipe does not exist, install grounding counterpoise.Project #: 3894 16100 - 23
45.4.2 Grounding counterpoise shall consist of three 3/4 inch x 10 foot copper clad steel groundrods spaced 10 feet zero inches (minimum) on center. Rods shall be installed with top of rod 12inches below finished grade. Rods shall be interconnected by means of a #2 (minimum) copperground wire. Ground conductor shall be bonded to ground rods with exothermic bond type groundconnectors.45.5 A code size ground conductor shall be extended in each conduit. Where parallel conduitsare indicated a full code size ground conductor shall be extended in each parallel conduit.45.6 All connections to equipment and conduits shall be made with an approved typesolderless connector. Connectors shall be securely bolted or clamped to the equipment. All contactsurfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and bright before connections are made in order to insure agood metal-to-metal contact.45.7 All connections to ground conductors shall be made accessible for visual inspection. Theresistance between the grounding system and absolute earth shall not exceed 10 ohms and shall bemeasured by the Electrical Contractor in the presence of the Owner or the Owner's Representativeprior to placing equipment in operation.45.8 All grounding conductors shall be identified by green color insulation unless indicated tobe bare.46. CONTROL RELAYS46.1 Control relays shall be industrial electro-mechanical type, UL listed with standardcartridge-type contact assemblies to allow individual removal of cartridge without disturbingadjacent cartridges. Unless otherwise noted, relay shall be provided with two normally opencontacts and two normally closed contacts and a control coil rated for operation at 120 volts A.C.Control relay shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure and shall be manufactured in accordancewith NEMA standard ICS2.46.2 Control relays shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric orapproved equal.47. MOTOR OPERATED TIME SWITCH47.1 Unless otherwise shown, motor operated time switch shall have seven day dial withcontacts rated 40 amp at 120 volts. Switch shall be DPST, NEMA-1, complete with 120-volt clockmotor, skip-a-day feature, manual on-off bypass switch and a 12-hour spring driven reserve powerfeature. Provide astronomical dial for time switches which control outdoor lighting.47.2 Motor operated time switch shall be manufactured by Tork, Intermatic, Paragon orapproved equal.48. AUTOMATIC TIMER SWITCHProject #: 3894 16100 - 24
48.1 Automatic Timer Switch shall be a solid-state interval time switch with backlit LCDdisplay. The timing intervals shall be able to be preset using a series of tamper resistant dipswitches. Any manual scroll up mode provided shall be able to be overridden by a tamper resistantdip switch, thereby providing a fixed interval timer. The automatic timer switch shall be capable ofproviding user selectable audible and/or visual warning indications beginning two minutes prior totimeout. The switch shall provide zero power switching to extend contact life. The switch shallaccept 120VAC or 277VAC power. A white decorator wall plate shall be included with the switch.48.2 When used in conjunction with a time clock and contactor providing scheduled time ofday lighting shutoff, the automatic timer switch shall be wired in parallel with the contact of thecontactor such that operation of the automatic timer switch shall override the time of day contactorand cause the lights to be on for a pre-determined period of time. The automatic timer switch shallbe able to be reset to the maximum interval by operation of a pushbutton on the face of the switchand shall be able to be turned "off" by a pushbutton on the face of the switch.48.3 The automatic timer switch shall have selectable timing intervals of 10 minutes, 20minutes, 40 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, two hours, four hours, or eight hours. Alteration of thetiming period shall not be user accessible. The timing interval switch shall be set to four [two] hoursto correspond with the ASHRAE [International] Energy Conservation Code.48.4 The automatic timer switch shall have a tamper resistant selectable "flicker option" whichwill cause the lights to blink two minutes prior to timeout. Unless otherwise noted the flicker optionshall be set to the "ON" position.48.5 The automatic timer switch shall have a tamper resistant selectable "beeper option"which will cause a horn to sound two minutes prior to timeout. Unless otherwise noted the beeperoption shall be set to the "OFF" position.49. The automatic timer switch shall be a Tork Model SSA200 or equal.50. PHOTOELECTRIC CELLS50.1 Photoelectric cells shall be weatherproof and where self-contained, shall be designed tomount to outdoor junction box, outdoor lighting pole or conduit. Units shall be unaffected bymoisture, vibration or changes of temperature and shall be contained within a weatherproof housing.Units shall be of the proper voltage rating.50.2 Unless otherwise shown, photoelectric cells shall feature:A. Capacity: 2000 watt tungsten at 120/277 volts.B. Contacts: SPST normally closed snap action.C. Delay: Adjustable up to two minutes to minimize nuisance switching.50.3 Photoelectric cells shall be manufactured by Tork, Intermatic, Ideal or approved equal.51. LIGHTING CONTACTORProject #: 3894 16100 - 25
51.1 Unless otherwise specified, lighting contactor shall be electrically held type for operationfrom a two wire, maintained contact input device. Lighting contactor shall have contacts rated 30amps ballast lighting rating, 20 amp tungsten lighting rating and shall have three poles minimum.Unless otherwise specified, coil voltage for contactors shall be 120 volts. Contactor shall bemounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.51.2 Where indicated provide mechanically held type lighting contactor for operation from athree wire, pulsed contact input device with separate connections for the latch and unlatch functions.Lighting contactor shall have contacts rated 30 amps ballast lighting rating, 20 amp tungstenlighting rating and shall have three poles minimum. Unless otherwise specified, coil voltage forcontactors shall be 120 volts. Contactor shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.51.3 Lighting contactor shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric orapproved equal.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16100 - 26
SECTION 16200ELECTRICALSERVICES AND UNDERGROUND WORK1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL shall applyto this entire section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This section of the specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials andaccessories necessary for, but not necessarily limited to, the installation of the power,communications and cable television services for this project.2.2 Provide a complete system of conduit, pull wires and metering provisions for the revisionof the existing 208/120 volt, three phase, four wire secondary service for this project by Met Ed.2.3 Provide a complete system of conduit and pull wires for the extension of the existingtelephone service cables. Splice and extend the existing service cable if approved by the utility.Otherwise replace the cable to the nearest street-side connection point.3. ELECTRICAL SERVICE3.1 The Contractor shall contact the power company for specific instructions regarding theirservice regulations and requirements before beginning this phase of his work. All service work shallbe in complete compliance with these requirements.3.2 Shop drawings for equipment and materials provided for the utility and in accordancewith utility specifications shall be submitted to and approved by the utility prior to submission forapproval by the Engineer.3.3 Instrument transformer cabinet (if required) shall be provided by the Contractor and shallbe sized as required by the power company. Instrument transformers shall be furnished by thepower company but shall be installed by the Contractor with line and load wiring connections madeby the Contractor.3.4 Meter base will be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shallprovide a 1-1/4 inch rigid steel conduit between the meter base and the instrument transformercabinet. All conductors for metering will be provided by the power company.3.5 The Contractor shall include in his base price the power utility costs for service that arethe Owner’s responsibilities as defined in the power utility's company rules and regulations.Project #: 3894 16200 - 1
4. TELEPHONE SERVICE4.1 The Contractor shall contact the telephone company for specific instructions regardingtheir service requirements before beginning this phase of his work.4.2 Shop drawings for equipment and materials provided for the utility and in accordancewith utility specifications shall be submitted to and approved by the utility prior to submission forapproval by the Engineer.4.3 The Contractor shall provide any conduit needed to extend telephone company servicecables to the new equipment backboard.4.4 The Contractor shall include in his base price the telephone company costs for servicethat are the Owner’s responsibilities as defined in the telephone utility’s company rules andregulations.5. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING5.1 Underground work shall include all excavating, raceways, cables and backfilling requiredunder this Contract. Excavation and backfilling for utility services shall be in accordance withpower utility specifications and/or the following whichever is more stringent. The ElectricalContractor shall be responsible for missing all new and/or existing retained underground servicelines such as electric, communications, gas, water service, sanitary and storm water piping. Allexcavation shall be unclassified.5.2 Items of work to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, clearing and grubbing,stripping and storage of top soil, removal of underground obstructions, backfilling, fill compaction,and rough and finished grading of entire area affected by the work to be installed under thisContract.5.3 Where adjacent ground surface areas within the project site are disturbed as a result ofbuilding operations or storage of materials under this Contract, they shall be cleaned of all debrisand restored to original grades and conditions. Disturbed off-site areas shall be similarly treated.5.4 The Contractor shall conform to all requirements for notification of Public Utilities priorto commencing any excavation.5.5 Trenches shall be dug to uniform width to provide a free working space on each side ofthe conduit. To the extent practical, trenches shall be graded so that raceways will have a fall of atleast three inches per 100 feet away from the building.5.6 The Contractor shall pump out or otherwise remove any water, which may be found inthe excavation, and he shall provide pumping equipment, as necessary, to keep the excavationentirely clear of water.Project #: 3894 16200 - 2
5.7 Pipes shall be installed on solid, level undisturbed earth in bottom of trench. No slopingof bearing will be permitted.5.8 Excavation for conduit laying shall be conducted in a manner to cause the leastinterruption to traffic. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitablebridges. The Contractor shall erect, maintain and, when no longer needed, remove guardrails,fences, warning lights and other protection required for safety of all persons at excavations.5.9 The depth of trenches shall be such as to allow the top of conduits to be a minimum of 30inches below finished grade. Trenches shall be filled with clean earth fill, installed in eight inchlayers and tamped in order to prevent settlement. Care shall be taken to avoid breaking of joints ofconduits. All joints shall be individually supported.5.10 All materials excavated shall be deposited on the side of trenches and beyond the reach ofslides. Excavated material shall not be piled where it will interfere with traffic.5.11 The banks of the excavations shall be gradually sloped as required to prevent slides orcave-ins. Where rock formations are encountered and the earth and/or rock is stable, the sides maybe cut vertically, or nearly so, consistent with normal and safe practice for excavating the materialencountered. The Contractor shall provide and maintain sheathing, shoring and bracing as necessaryto protect this project, adjacent structures, workers and other personnel. It is also the Contractor'sresponsibility to remove temporary sheathing, shoring, bracing, and protection when no longerrequired by adjacent conditions and completion of backfill and rough grading as determined andapproved by the Owner's Representative.5.12 Surplus excavated material not required for backfill shall be removed from the buildingsite or distributed on the premises as directed by the Owner's Representative.5.13 Additional earth for backfill required in excess of acceptable material from excavationson the site shall be provided by the Contractor from a source as approved by the Owner'sRepresentative.5.14 Backfill material shall consist of clean dry earth, clay, fine gravel or sand and shall befree of organic materials and stones larger than two inches in any direction or stones having sharpedges. Frozen lumps or clods, soggy or wet materials, clumps or other foreign matter shall not beused as backfill.5.15 Fill to required levels any sub-grades which settle. Any trenches improperly backfilledor where settlement occurs shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, thenrefilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and compaction mounded overand smoothed.5.16 Finish grades which are not indicated shall be uniform slopes or levels between pointswhere elevations are noted, or between such noted points and existing grades, without pockets ordepressions which might collect surface water.Project #: 3894 16200 - 3
5.17 The Contractor shall restore the surface of all excavations to their original conditions,including paved or unpaved streets, gutters, walls and sidewalks. Contractor shall furnish all laborand material required.5.18 A six inch wide plastic marker tape shall be provided for the entire length of allunderground conduit runs and shall be installed 12 inches below finished grade. Marker tape shallbe red and shall have printed on it in a continuous fashion "Caution - Buried Electric Line Below" inblack letters a minimum of 1-1/2 inches high. [An orange tape printed on in a continuous fashion"Caution - Buried Communications Line Below" in black letters a minimum of 1-1/2 inches highshall be installed over communication, alarm, or signal lines, cables or conduits.]5.19 Where excavations go under new or existing paved areas, they shall be backfilled in sixinch layers with each layer firmly compacted to 95 percent. Excavations shall be backfilled towithin six inches of finished paved surface. Install five inches of satisfactory limestone and compactto within four inches of finished paved surface. Apply a 1-1/2 inch base course followed by a 1/2inch surface course of asphalt concrete paving.6. CONCRETE6.1 This Contractor shall provide all concrete work as called for herein and as required forhis phase of the work.6.2 All concrete shall be obtained from a commercial supplier and shall be ready mixed,conforming to ASTM C94 having a strength of 4000 pounds at 28 days. No strength test shall berequired. However, the Contractor shall turn batch plant concrete mix slip over to the Owner'sRepresentative.6.3 All concrete shall be six percent (+/- one percent) air entrained and the slump of concreteshall not exceed three inches. All concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by the use of mechanicalvibrators.6.4 All work associated with the handling, placing and curing of the concrete shall conformto current specifications of the American Concrete Institute.6.5 To insure adequate curing, do not remove forms from vertical surfaces for five days aftercasting unless other approved means are taken to prevent premature drying of the concrete. Keep allhorizontal surfaces continuously wet for seven days with mechanical sprinklers or coat with animpervious sealer, applied in atomized form at a rate of not less than one gallon per 250 square feetafter surface water has entirely disappeared, but while surfaces are still moist. This compound shallform an effective seal, which will prevent evaporation of moisture from concrete for the full curingperiod and shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations.6.6 Provide adequate equipment for heating the concrete and protecting the concrete duringfreezing or near freezing weather. All concrete materials, reinforcement, forms, fillers and groundwith which the concrete will come in contact shall be free from frost.Project #: 3894 16200 - 4
6.7 After the first frost and until the mean daily temperature at the site falls below 40 degreesF for more than one day, protect concrete from freezing for not less than the first four hours after it isplaced. When the mean daily temperature falls below 40 degrees F for more than one day, placeconcrete thereafter at a temperature not lower than 55 degrees F and not higher than 70 degrees Fand maintained not lower than 55 degrees F for at least the first three days. During the next threedays, protect from freezing. When the mean daily temperatures arise above 40 degrees F for morethan three successive days, placement and maintenance of concrete for three days at or aboverequired minimum temperatures may be discontinued, but concrete should not be exposed tofreezing temperatures for at least 48 hours after placing.7. UTILITIES7.1 Any piping and/or conduit encountered shall be temporarily supported and maintaineduntil permanent support is restored.8. STRIPPING TOPSOIL8.1 Before starting excavation, remove topsoil to its full depths and stockpile at suitablelocations where directed for use in future finish grading.9. SERVICE RACEWAYS9.1 All service raceways shall have a minimum trade size as indicated on the Drawings. Allservice raceways within the building and to five feet beyond the exterior wall shall be IMC conduit.Underground electrical raceways shall be Schedule 40 PVC as hereinafter specified and as indicatedon the Drawings.9.2 All raceways shall be standard manufacture. Joints or couplings shall be madewatertight. Raceways shall be mandreled after installation to insure against any possibleobstructions, which may have become lodged therein.9.3 All ells installed in the underground raceway system shall be large radius sweep ells andshall be PVC coated IMC or rigid conduit. Minimum radius shall be 36 inches.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16200 - 5
SECTION 16300ELECTRICALEQUIPMENT WIRING1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL shall applyto this entire section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, andaccessories necessary for, but not necessarily limited to, the installation of a complete, approvedpower wiring system for electrical equipment supplied by others on this Project.3. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OTHERS3.1 Unless indicated otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all required control equipmentincluding motor starters and relays, control wiring, conduit, and all other items necessary forsatisfactory operation of all equipment provided on this project. The Contractor shall review theGeneral <strong>Construction</strong>, Mechanical, and Plumbing Sections of these Specifications for equipmentprovided by others and wired by this Contractor.3.2 The Contractor shall sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate withinstallation schedule of equipment.3.3 The Contractor shall furnish and install disconnect switches for all equipment unlessotherwise noted.3.4 The Contractor shall complete all power wiring for equipment, through the disconnectswitch and/or the thermal cutouts and local control stations to the equipment as required or asspecified in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.5 The Contractor shall provide a 120-volt, 20 amp circuit (2#12 & 1#12G, 3/4 inch CNDand a 20A, 1P circuit breaker) from the nearest panelboard with spare capacity for each buildingautomation control panel, PC, and printer.3.6 The Contractor shall maintain proper phase rotation sequence and shall be responsible forproper rotation of all electrical equipment.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16300 - 1
SECTION 16400ELECTRICALLIGHTING FIXTURES1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL, GENERAL applyto this entire Section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing and installation of all lightingfixtures, lamps, supports and miscellaneous materials necessary for the installation of all lightingfixtures on this Project2.2 The contractor shall also supply all additional wiring and/or conductors required forlighting control, including that required for switched receptacles, even though not specificallyshown on the Drawings. This shall include wiring for dual switching, three-way switching,unswitched conductors for emergency lighting and exit signs, occupancy sensing conductorsincluding low voltage conductors, etc. Control wiring shall be the same size as shown on thehome run wiring.3. LIGHTING FIXTURES3.1 The Contractor shall furnish a complete complement of fixtures and requiredassociated appurtenances including all lamps and accessory wiring. The Contractor shallprovide all labor and materials necessary to assemble, install and test the specified equipment inthe manner indicated3.2 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with suspension accessories, canopies, hickeys,casings, sockets, holders, reflectors, ballasts, diffusing material, louvers, plaster frames,recessing boxes, etc., all wired and assembled.3.3 The Contractor shall provide lighting fixtures with accessories as described in thelighting fixture schedule on the drawings and shall not rely solely on the fixture catalog numberas these numbers may change over time or vary between catalogs.3.4 The fixture manufacturer's catalog numbers scheduled on the drawings describing thevarious types of fixtures do not include all the required accessories or hardware that may be requiredfor a complete installation.3.5 Every lighting outlet shall have a lighting fixture unless otherwise directed. In instanceswhere a specific type of fixture has not been assigned to an outlet, provide a complete fixture of thetype and wattage as directed by the Owner's Representative.Project #: 3894 16400 - 1
3.6 Fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately supportthe complete weight of the fixture. Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to afixture stud in the outlet box. Hickeys or extension pieces shall be installed where required tofacilitate proper installation.3.7 Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate lightleakage between the frame and the finished surface. Fixture housing, frame or canopy shall providea suitable cover for the fixture outlet box or fixture opening.3.8 Lighting fixtures penetrating fire rated ceilings as noted on the Architectural Drawings,shall have the same fire rating as that of the ceiling. Fire rating shall be achieved by installing afactory manufactured fire rated lighting fixture and by installing a tent constructed of fire ratedmaterial completely encompassing the lighting fixture. Tent spacing shall be no less than threeinches all around the fixture.3.9 Surface mounted fixtures shall be designed and installed so as to completely eliminatelight leakage at corners, between frame and door, and between adjacent <strong>unit</strong>s.3.10 Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be of weatherproof construction, gasketedand installed with non-ferrous metal screws finished to match the fixture.3.11 Lighting fixtures with an emergency ballast battery backup shall have a battery similar toabove and shall be connected to the lighting circuit such that the ballast and lamps may be switchedand/or dimmed but the battery is connected to an unswitched hot leg of the fixture circuit such thatthe lamps are caused to be illuminated to approximately full brightness on loss of power to thecircuit. The backup ballast shall be wired to two lamps.3.12 Lighting fixtures with a generator transfer device shall be wired similar to and operate thesame as fixtures with an emergency battery back-up.3.13 Fixtures indicated on the Drawings to have either dual switching or to have separateemergency and normal circuits shall be provided with multiple ballasts as required for proper fixtureoperation.3.14 The Contractor shall consult the room finish schedule as to the type of ceilingconstruction. He shall be responsible for ordering the proper fixtures with hardware for installationin or on the ceiling specified. The Contractor is responsible for verifying that the grid suspensionsystem is capable of supporting the loads imposed by the lighting fixtures. The Contractor shallcontact the Owner’s Representative if the ceiling support system is in question.3.15 The Contractor shall furnish all necessary auxiliary supporting steel for fixtures notmounted on building framework, and where necessary, to span the ceiling channels of suspendedceiling construction. Fixtures supported by ceiling framing members shall be securely attached tothe framing members in a manner approved in accordance with the National Electrical Code.Project #: 3894 16400 - 2
3.16 Where plastic diffusers are specified, the Contractor shall submit a certification fromeach lighting fixture manufacturer stating that the diffusers are 100 percent virgin acrylic.3.17 Unless otherwise noted, all fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving, instant start type.Lamps shall be 32 watt (T-8), 2950 lumens (minimum), 3500K as manufactured by Sylvania, Philipsor General Electric.3.18 Where noted for two foot fixtures, fluorescent lamps shall be (U-shape) energy saving,instant start type. Lamps shall be 32 watt (T-8), 2850 lumens (minimum), 3500K as manufacturedby Sylvania, Philips or General Electric.3.19 Unless otherwise noted, all compact fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving, instantstart type. Lamps shall match the fixture base, shall be the type and wattage and have initial lumensspecified on the lighting fixture schedule and be 3500K as manufactured by Sylvania, Philips orGeneral Electric unless otherwise noted.3.20 Unless otherwise noted, all T-5 standard output fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving,instant start type. Lamps shall be 29 watt, 2900 lumens, 3500K as manufactured by Sylvania,Philips or General Electric.3.21 Unless otherwise noted, all T-5 high output fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving,instant start type. Lamps shall be 54 watt, 5000 lumens, 3500K as manufactured by Sylvania,Philips or General Electric.3.22 Interior metal halide lamps shall be pulse start type lamps of the wattage specified on thedrawings.3.23 HID ballasts shall be regulator type with minimum operating power factor of 90 percentwith a 1.4/1.5 crest factor and a two to four minute hot restrike time. Ballasts for interior metalhalide fixtures shall be pulse start type.3.24 Fluorescent downlight lamps shall be instant start type which match the fixture in whichthey are used and as listed on the lighting fixture schedule. Lamps shall be 3500K as manufacturedby Sylvania, Philips or General Electric.3.25 In all lighting fixtures designated to remain, Electrical Contractor shall remove existinglamps replacing same with energy efficient lamps compatible with the existing lighting fixtureballast. Electrical Contractor shall also clean the reflector and lens prior to completing therelamping.3.26 All inoperable lamps shall be replaced with new lamps during the course of construction,up to and including the date of final acceptance of the project by the Owner.3.27 Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as shown on the Fixture Schedule.Project #: 3894 16400 - 3
3.28 Contractor shall provide Owner with two each of any special tools required for relampinglighting fixtures. They shall be new and shall be turned over to Owner when project is completed.3.29 All lamps shall be furnished by this Contractor3.30 All fixtures specified in the Fixture Schedule shall be of the manufacturer's catalognumber as specified or approved equal. No substitutions shall be made without approval. Words"approved equal" and "equal" shall mean equal in all respects in the opinion of the Owner'sRepresentative.3.31 The Contractor shall provide all bases, poles and foundations for all exterior fixtures asrequired. They shall be as detailed on the drawings or as called for in the specific fixturespecifications. All fixtures shall be complete with mounting bolts as recommended by themanufacturer of the fixture, unless otherwise specified.4. LIGHTING FIXTURE BALLASTS4.1 Each ballast for fluorescent lighting fixtures shall have a disconnecting means internal tothe fixture, which disconnects all conductors to the ballast to allow servicing the ballast in place.4.2 Electronic Ballasts4.2.1 All fluorescent fixtures withT-4, T-5 or T-8 lamps shall be furnished with ballasts havinga power factor greater than 97 percent and a 0.875 to 0.90 ballast factor. They shall operate lamps ata frequency of 20 KHZ or higher without visible flicker. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than20 percent with a crest factor of less than 1.7. Ballasts shall have internal thermal protection(automatic resetting type) and shall be "Class A" sound rated. All ballasts shall be CBM certified,UL listed, ETL approved and meet applicable requirements of the FCC Rules and Regulations Part18 for Non-Consumer Equipment. All electronic ballasts shall be grounded in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations and carry a five-year warranty. High efficiency, energy savingelectronic ballasts shall be Advance Standard Electronic, Magnetek or Osram/Sylvania. Voltageshall be as indicated in the Fixture Schedule.4.3 Dimming Ballast4.3.1 All fluorescent fixtures with T-4, T-5 or T-8 lamps shall be furnished with ballasts havinga power factor greater than 95 percent. Ballast shall have a dimming range of 100 to 10 percent ofthe lamps full lighting capacity unless otherwise noted. They shall operate lamps at a frequency of25 KHZ or higher without visible flicker. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than ten percentwith a crest factor of less than or equal to 1.6. Ballasts shall have internal thermal protection(automatic resetting type) and shall be "Class A" sound rated. All ballasts shall be ISO 9001 qualitycertified, UL listed and meet applicable requirements of the FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18 forNon-Consumer Equipment. All ballasts shall be inaudible in a 27 dB ambient environmentthroughout the dimming range. All ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 50 degreesF. Ballasts shall be free of polychlorinated biphnyls (PCBs). Ballast inrush current shall not exceedthree amps at 277 volts. Ballasts shall have protected control wire input, which is not damaged byProject #: 3894 16400 - 4
miswire. All electronic ballasts shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations and carry a five-year warranty. High efficiency, energy saving electronic ballastsshall be Lutron, Hi-lume or ECO-10 (ECO Series) or approved equal. Voltage shall be as indicatedin the Fixture Schedule. Ballast shall be matched to the florescent dimmer switch.4.4 All outdoor fixtures and fixtures in unheated spaces shall be provided with a 0 degreeminimum starting temperature ballast.4.5 For all lighting fixtures designated to remain, Electrical Contractor shall replace nonfunctionalballasts and replace broken lenses prior to relamping.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16400 - 5
SECTION 16450ELECTRICALEMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL, GENERAL apply tothis entire section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH2.1 Each automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer module and a controlmodule, interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The automatic transfer switchshall be mechanically held and electrically operated by a single solenoid mechanism energized fromthe source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be four pole, double throw, ratedfor continuous duty and mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure. The switch shall be mechanicallyinterlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions: normal or emergency. The automatictransfer switch shall be suitable for transfer of load to emergency sources such as an enginegenerator source while maintaining isolation from the utility.2.2 All main contacts shall be of silver composition. The operating transfer time in eitherdirection shall not exceed 1/6 of a second.2.3 All contacts, coils, springs, and control elements shall be conveniently removable fromthe front of the transfer switch without major disassembly or disconnection of power conductors.2.4 Control module shall be supplied with protective cover and mounted separately from thetransfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing the control logic shall be solid-state and mountedon plug-in printed circuit boards. Printed circuit boards shall be keyed to prevent incorrectinstallation. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade, plug-in type with dust covers andlocking clips.2.5 Automatic transfer switches utilizing components of molded case circuit breakers,contactors of parts thereof which have not been intended for continuous duty or repetitive loadtransfer switching are not acceptable.2.6 The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS2-447 and Underwriters Laboratories UL-1008 and shall be UL listed for use in emergency systemsin accordance with Articles 517 and 700 of the National Electrical Code. The automatic transferswitch shall have a full five year comprehensive warranty.2.7 The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the RMS symmetrical shortcircuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals for the voltage required withoutrelying on any upstream current limiting device unless otherwise noted. If the short circuit ratingProject #: 3894 16450 - 1
cannot be achieved by the switch with the current rating shown on the drawings, the switch ratingshall be increased to provide a switch which can achieve the short circuit rating. Where currentlimiting devices are used to boost short circuit ratings, the vendor shall provide written proof of ULtesting and series rating. Short circuit current rating shall be as indicated on the drawings or aminimum of 22,000 AIC at 208 volt.2.8 Automatic transfer switches shall be provided with the following accessories:2.8.1 A time delay to ignore momentary outages. It shall delay closing of the engine start forcontacts for a fixed time of three seconds.2.8.2 A time delay on transfer from normal to emergency, field adjustable from 0.6 to 60seconds.2.8.3 A time delay on retransfer from emergency to normal, field adjustable from one to 30minutes. The time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and thenormal source is available.2.8.4 Gold-plated contacts rated 10 amps, 32 volts DC, which close when the normal sourcefails, shall be provided to initiate engine starting.2.8.5 Two auxiliary contacts (one for each source) rated at 10 A continuous and 250 VACmaximum.2.8.6 Provide one additional isolated auxiliary N.C. Contact for connect to and control of a 120VAC relay which will allow operation of HVAC compressors under normal operation but which willonly allow operation of HVAC fans under emergency operation.2.9 The retransfer from emergency to the normal source shall be an Open Transition of load.For automatic transfer switches rated less than 1000A, the type of transition shall be field selectable.2.10 Certified laboratory test data on an Automatic Transfer Switch of the same design andrating shall be provided to confirm the following switching abilities:2.10.1 Overload and endurance per Tables 21.2 and 23.2 of UL-1008.2.10.2 Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the ability of thetransfer switches to carry their rated current within the allowable temperature limits of the insulationin contact with current-carrying parts.2.10.3 Withstand current tests per Paragraph 25 of UL-1008.2.10.4 No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be operable to alternate source after thewithstand current test.2.10.5 Dielectric tests of 1960 volts, RMS, minimum after the withstand current test.Project #: 3894 16450 - 2
2.11 All production <strong>unit</strong>s should be subjected to the following factory tests:2.11.1 The complete automatic transfer switch shall be tested to ensure proper operation of theindividual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operatingtransfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specificationrequirements.2.11.2 The complete automatic transfer switch shall be subjected to dielectric strength test perNEMA Standard ICS1.109.05.2.12 The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability inaccordance with ANSI C37.90a-1978 and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance withNEMA Standard ICS 1-109.2.12.1 All phases of the normal source shall be monitored line-to-line. Close differentialvoltage sensing shall be provided. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 72 percent to 100percent of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 70 percent to 98 percent of thepickup value. The transfer to emergency will be initiated upon reduction of normal source to 85percent of nominal voltage and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to 95percent of nominal.2.12.2 Harnessing between transfer switch and control panel shall be built-in disconnect forroutine maintenance.2.12.3 All movable parts of the operating mechanism shall remain in positive mechanicalcontact with the main contacts during the transfer operation without the use of separate mechanicalinterlocks. Automatic operation of the switch shall not require power from any source other thanline-to-line voltage of the source to which the switch is transferring.2.12.4 Automatic transfer switch shall be provided with a test switch to momentarily simulatenormal source failure.2.13 Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCEAVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, SWITCH POSITION.2.14 Return Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer fromalternate to normal source.2.15 In-Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within 15 electrical degrees.2.16 Time Delay Before Engine Shut-Down: Zero to 30 minutes, adjustable, of unloadedoperation.2.17 Ratings:Project #: 3894 16450 - 3
2.17.1 Voltage: 208 volts, three phase, five wire, 60 hertz.2.17.2 Switched Poles: Three.2.17.3 Load Inrush Rating: Combination load.2.17.4 Continuous Rating: 150 amperes for ATS-S.40 amperes for ATS-E2.17.5 Interrupting Capacity: 100 percent of continuous rating.2.17.6 Withstand Current Rating: 22,000 RMS symmetrical amperes (minimum) without use ofany upstream current limiting device.3. ENCLOSURE3.1 Enclosure shall conform to ICS 6 Type 1 and be painted the manufacturer’s standardcolor enamel.3.2 Install transfer switch in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and provideengraved plastic nameplates.3.3 The Contractor shall provide the services of a Manufacturer’s Representative to providethe Owner with demonstration and start-up service.4. MANUFACTURERS4.1 Automatic Switch Company4.2 Onan4.3 Kohler Co.4.4 Caterpillar, <strong>Inc</strong>.5. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR5.1 The engine generator system shall be a packaged outdoor <strong>unit</strong> operating on No. 2 dieselfuel with a radiator cooled engine. Unit standby ratings are 40KW/50 KVA at 208 volts, 139 Amps,three phase, four wire, 60 HZ. Minimum operating altitude before derating shall be 2300 feet andmaximum intake air temperature before derating shall be 85 degrees F. The next larger standardsized <strong>unit</strong> shall be provided if derating exceeds five percent of the KW rating.Location of Installation: Reading, PA5.2 An integral 175A line circuit breaker shall be furnished with the generator.Project #: 3894 16450 - 4
5.3 Generator operating principle shall be in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 99 and applicableNEMA and IEEE standards. Generator shall accept 100 percent of nameplate KW rating in onestep, in compliance with NFPA 110. The generator shall comply with EPA Tier 3 exhaust emissionlimits.5.4 Generator manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years documented experiencespecializing in package engine generator systems. Package engine generator system suppliers shallhave service facilities within 50 miles of the project site. Package engine generator system shallcarry a full five-year comprehensive warranty.5.5 The engine shall be a four-cylinder, inline, four-cycle, 272 cubic inches displacement,with a compression ratio of 17.3:1, a bore and stroke of 4.21 x 4.88 inch, operate at 1800 RPM anduse 247 CFM of combustion air.5.6 The governor shall be the electronic isochronous type and shall maintain engine speedwithin +/-0.5 percent of mean value for constant loads from zero to full load. Voltage variation forconstant loads from zero to full load shall not exceed +/- one percent of mean value. Transientrecovery to steady state shall occur within two seconds following sudden load changes. Thegovernor shall be equipped with a means for manual operation and adjustment.5.7 Fuel consumption shall be 4.5 gallons per hour at full load.5.8 The engine exhaust system shall operate at a maximum allowable back pressure of 10inches H 2 O.5.9 The engine electrical system shall employ PMG excitation, with a negative ground andoperate at 12 VDC.5.10 The electrical generator shall provide for full single phase output and shall be a 2/3 pitch,rotating field type 125 degrees C temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient, use a solid statevoltage regulator, have Class H temperature rise insulation with vacuum impregnated, fungusresistant, epoxy varnish, employ a brushless exciter and a 100 ampere battery charging winding.5.11 The maximum voltage dip for the engine alternator combination shall be 30 percent. Thealternator shall provide a minimum 142 KVA peak motor starting capacity at the maximum voltagedip.5.12 The engine generator shall be skid mounted with vibration isolation. Indoor generatorsets and/or sets 200KW and larger shall have spring type vibration isolators.5.13 The engine generator package shall have the following control features:5.13.1 Emergency stop5.13.2 Low battery voltage warningProject #: 3894 16450 - 5
5.13.3 Over-cranking safety shutdown and red indicating lamp5.13.4 High-engine temperature safety shutdown and red indicating lamp5.13.5 Low oil pressure safety shutdown and red indicating lamp5.13.6 Overspeed safety shutdown and red indicating lamp5.13.7 Running time meter5.13.8 Run-Off/Reset-Auto Switch for engine start5.13.9 Low coolant temperature warning5.13.10 Meter Kit - <strong>Inc</strong>ludes AC Voltmeter, Ammeter, Frequency Meter, Phase SelectorSwitch5.13.11 Battery charger ammeter5.13.12 Oil pressure gauge5.13.13 Two customer selectable fault lights5.13.14 Low fuel warning lightPower for the generator controls shall be provided from the control power transformer inthe Automatic Transfer Switch.5.14 A remote annunciator panel shall be provided in the electrical room.5.15 The exhaust system shall use a residential exhaust silencer with a flexible, stainless steelexhaust connector and insulated exhaust pipe (see piping specifications). The exhaust silencer shallbe inside the weatherproof enclosure with the exhaust directed upward. Provide rain cap.5.16 Provide an outdoor skin-tight weatherproof enclosure with ventilation louvers.5.17 The engine shall have a 1500 watt, 120 volt coolant heater with temperature controller.5.18 The generator set shall have a 24 hours at full load (minimum), in-skid, double-walledtank and integral mechanical fuel pump.5.19 The engine generator battery system shall be 12 volt with 1,000 cold cranking ampsperformance, mounted on an internal battery rack and charged by a trickle-type battery charger.5.20 All coolant, filters, lube oil, etc. required for start-up shall be provided with the <strong>unit</strong>.Project #: 3894 16450 - 6
5.21 Manufacturers:5.21.1 Kohler Company5.21.2 Onan/Cummins5.21.3 Caterpillar, <strong>Inc</strong>.6. INSTALLATION6.1 Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructionsand in conformance with all codes and good practices.6.2 Provide a 3-1/2 inch minimum housekeeping pad for all generators. Confer with theproject Structural Engineer for depth of outdoor pads.6.3 Provide 2#12, 3/4" conduit from an auxiliary contact of ATS-S to the A/C ShutdownRelay. The relay shall be energized and have closed output contacts when the ATS is in normalconfiguration and shall have open contacts when the ATS is in emergency configuration.6.4 Provide all wiring and conduit identified as field installation work in the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions. As a minimum provide a one-inch control conduit and a 3/4-inch powerconduit in addition to the output power conduit.6.5 Provide a 20A, 120V circuit from the emergency power system for the battery charger(2#12 and 1#12G with 20A, 1P circuit breaker).6.6 Provide a 20A, 120V circuit for the coolant heater (2#12 and 1#12G with 20A, 1P circuitbreaker).6.7 Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative to supervise installation, toperform final commissioning and start-up, [to conduct a load bank test,] and to conduct training.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16450 - 7
SECTION 16500ELECTRICALFIRE ALARM SYSTEM1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of Section 16000 - ELECTRICAL, GENERAL andSECTION 16100 - INTERIOR ELECTRICAL WORK shall apply to this entire Section and shallhave the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, components and accessoriesnecessary for, but not necessarily limited to, the installation of a fully functional Siemens, SilentKnight, or Edwards Systems Technology fire alarm system as listed herein and as shown on theDrawings. It shall also be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to provide mounting boxes andstub conduits with pull wires for all detection and alarm devices and system enclosures as shown onthe Drawings and to provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's representative who willprovide shop drawings of the required new interconnecting wiring, fire alarm panel, modules andcomponents, supervise the wiring terminations, oversee start-up, conduct training, testing and finaldemonstration for the fire marshal, program the new addresses into the system and be responsible forthe warranty of the full system.3. PERFORMANCE OF EQUIPMENT3.1 All materials, equipment and appurtenances of any kind, shown on the Drawings,hereinafter specified or required for the completion of the work in accordance with the intent ofthese Specifications, shall be completely satisfactory and acceptable in operation, performance andcapacity. No approval either written or verbal of any drawing, descriptive data or samples of suchmaterial, equipment and/or appurtenances shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to turnover the same to the Owner in perfect working order at the completion of the work.3.2 Any material, equipment or appurtenances, the operation, capacity or performance ofwhich does not comply with the Drawings and/or Specification requirements or which is not new orwhich is damaged prior to acceptance by the Owner will be held to be defective material and shall beremoved and replaced with proper acceptable materials, equipment and/or appurtenance or put inproper acceptable working order, satisfactory to the Owner's Representative without additional costto the Owner.4. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN4.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a complete functional fire alarmsystem as listed herein and shown on the Drawings. This shall include programming by theProject #: 3894 16500 - 1
manufacturer's representative of the control panel(s) both initially and a second time six months afteracceptance to correct Owner perceived deficiencies.4.2 The fire alarm system circuits shall be Class B unless otherwise noted on the drawings.4.3 The Contractor shall provide shop drawings prepared by a qualified equipmentmanufacturer's representative which shall include the following:A. A system riser diagram showing all individual initiation and indicating deviceswith a device address which is cross-coordinated with the plan and displayschedule and showing all required 120 VAC power sources.B. A device schedule showing all system addresses with the alphanumeric displaywhich will be annunciated at the control panel, for approval by the Owner.C. Fire alarm plans showing all initiation and indicating device locations with thedevice address and the wiring type, quantity, size and location. AutoCADbackgrounds will be provided.D. Equipment catalog specification sheets for all fire alarm system components.E. Battery sizing calculations.F. Voltage drop calculations based on the plans.4.4 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have the equipment manufacturer'srepresentative review the fire alarm system design in the light of his equipment capabilities for thefield conditions and to provide additional detection and/or alarm indicating devices, which may berequired including sub-panels, amplifiers, power supplies, etc. to ensure code compliance.4.5 The system as furnished and installed shall be in compliance with the requirements of theUCC, IBC, NFPA Section 70 (National Electrical Code), NFPA 72 and 101 and any other regulatoryagencies affecting this project.4.6 System Operation: System shall be a complete, electrically supervised, non-coded,manual and automatic, addressable, annunciated fire alarm system as described herein, and as shownon the Drawings. Operation shall be such that actuation of any manual station, automatic firesuppression system, automatic heat detector or automatic smoke detector shall cause all buildingevacuation alarm devices to sound a "Code 3" type alarm, the annunciator to properly register at thelocal panels, release of all doors being held open, a contact closure to occur in the fire alarm controlpanel which shall be monitored by an off-site fire alarm monitoring company and mechanicalequipment to shut down as specified in the HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIRCONDITIONING section of the Specifications. All operations shall remain in the alarm mode(except alarm signaling devices if manually silenced) until the control panel is restored to normal.Strobes that are located within sight of or are located in the same room with other strobes shall besynchronized at a flash rate of 1-2 hertz to all other strobes. System shall be electrically supervisedfor all signal initiating circuits, alarm signal sounding circuits, battery power supply circuits andtripping circuits. A ground fault condition which prevents the required operation of the system or asingle break or open condition in any of the above circuits shall result in activation of system audibletrouble signals. Loss of AC power shall also result in operation of system trouble signals. Audibleand visual equipment for supervision of the AC power supply shall be energized from the auxiliaryProject #: 3894 16500 - 2
DC power supply and vice versa. Trouble signals shall sound continuously until system has beenrestored to normal at the control panel or manually switched to a trouble indicating lamp. Uponcorrection of the trouble condition, trouble signals shall automatically resound until the control panelis restored to normal. Electrical supervision of wiring from duct smoke detectors for mechanicalequipment shutdown and for magnetic door holding circuits is not required.4.7 Primary power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two windingisolation type transformer and rectified to low voltage DC (24 volt) for operation of all signalinitiating, signal sounding, trouble signal and tripping circuits. Provide secondary DC power supplyfor operation of system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to emergencypower on restoration from emergency to normal power shall be fully automatic and shall not causetransmission of a false alarm. Loss of AC power shall not prevent transmission of a signal to the offsitemonitoring company upon operation of any signal initiating circuit.4.8 Auxiliary power shall consist of wet cell lead calcium rechargeable storage batteries andbattery charger.4.9 Wire for 120V circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. Wire for low voltage DCcircuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. Color code all wiring.5. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EQUIPMENT5.1 Fire alarm system equipment shall be the current design products of manufacturersregularly engaged in production of such equipment. All equipment shall have the manufacturer'sname, address and catalog number on a plate securely affixed in a convenient place. All equipmentfor fire alarm system shall be the product of one manufacturer or equivalent products of a number ofmanufacturers, which are suitable for use in a unified system. All equipment used shall be FactoryMutual (FM) and Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) approved for fire alarm use.5.2 Control panel shall be modular type, installed in a surface mounted steel cabinet unlessotherwise shown on the drawings with hinged door and cylinder lock. Control panel shall be a neat,compact, factory wired assembly containing all components and equipment required to provide allspecified operating and supervisory functions of the system. An area smoke detector shall beprovided in the vicinity of each control panel. Provide control panel with ten percent spare capacityof detection and alarm indication points. Finish panel cabinet on the inside and outside with enameland provide rigid plastic or metal identification plates for all lamps and switches. Provide separatealarm and trouble lamps and an alphanumeric display for each alarm initiating device located insidethe cabinet visible through the cabinet door. Panel shall be provided with the following switches:A. Trouble silencing switch, which transfers trouble signals to an indicating lamp.The silencing switch may be a momentary action, self-resetting type.B. Evacuation alarm silencing switch which when activated will silence all alarmdevices and cause operation of system trouble signals.C. Individual device controls which when operated will disable the device but causea trouble signal.Project #: 3894 16500 - 3
Switches and any other circuits shall not be accessible without the use of a key. Access to controlsshall be by unlocking and opening control panel door.5.3 Storage batteries shall have proper ampere-hour ratings to operate the system undersupervisory conditions for 24 hours and then subsequently operate all alarm signaling devices underalarm conditions for five minutes. Batteries shall be located in a 16 gauge steel cabinet with a noncorrosivebase and cylinder lock and key feature and shall be finished on the inside and outside withenamel paint.5.4 Battery charger shall be of a type to provide completely automatic high/low charging rateand capable of recovery of the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or less.Ammeter for recording rate of charge and voltmeter to indicate the state of battery charge shall beprovided. Charger shall be located in control panel or battery cabinet.5.5 Manual pull station shall be addressable, non-coded, single action type with mechanicalreset features. Stations shall be semi-flush mounted, interior type as indicated. When tripped,station handle shall protrude for ease of locating the activated station. Stations shall be a type notsubject to operation by jarring or vibration. Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however, apull lever break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Resetting shall be by means of a key, which unlocksthe station and allows the handle to be physically reset to the normal position. Station color shall bered.5.6 Heat detectors shall be addressable and designed for detection of fire by combinationfixed temperature rate-of-rise principle. Locate detectors in accordance with their listing by UL orFM and the requirements of NFPA 72, except at least two detectors shall be provided in all rooms of600 square feet or larger in area. Temperature rating of detectors shall be in accordance with NFPA72. No detector shall be located closer than 12 inches to any part of any lighting fixture nor closerthan two feet to any part of an air supply diffuser. Detectors, located in areas subject to moisture orexterior atmospheric conditions or hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70, shall be typesapproved for such locations. Provide with terminal screw type connections.5.6.1 Combination fixed temperature rate-of-rise detectors shall be provided with a reversibletype mounting plate, adaptable for outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiringconnections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Operationunder fixed temperature actuation shall result in an external indication. Detector <strong>unit</strong>s located inboiler rooms, showers or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on fixedtemperature principle only.5.6.2 Rate compensating detector shall be provided with a reversible type mounting plate,adaptable for outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Detectorsshall be hermetically sealed and automatically resetting type which will operate when ambient airtemperature reaches detector setting regardless of rate of temperature rise. Detector operation shallnot be subject to thermal time lag.5.7 Smoke detectors shall be addressable and designed for detection of abnormal smokedensities by the photoelectric principle. Provide necessary control and power modules required forProject #: 3894 16500 - 4
operation integral with main control panel. Detectors and associated modules shall be compatiblewith main control panel and shall be suitable for use in a supervised circuit. Detector circuits shallbe of two wire type whereby detector operating power is transmitted over same conductors asinitiating circuit. Malfunction of electrical circuit to detector or its control or power <strong>unit</strong>s shall resultin the operation of system trouble devices. Detector spacing and location shall be in accordancewith the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of NFPA 72. Detectors shall not beplaced closer than three feet from any air discharge grille, nor closer than 12 inches to any part ofany lighting fixture. Each detector shall contain a visible indicator lamp that shall show when thedetector is activated. Each detector shall be plug-in type in which detector base contains screwterminals for making all wiring connections. Each detector shall be screened to prevent entrance ofinsects into detection chamber(s).5.7.1 Photoelectric detectors shall operate on a multiple cell concept using a light-emittingdiode (LED) light source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition but shall operatethe detector trouble indicating lamp.5.7.2 Duct detectors required in ducts shall be addressable photoelectric type capable of beingreset at the fire alarm control panel and shall be listed by UL or FM for duct installation. Do notprovide non-addressable duct detectors with addressable monitoring modules unless approved by theOwner and unless a remote reset device is provided for each detector. Provide duct detectors withan approved duct housing, mounted exterior to the duct, with perforated sampling tubes extendingacross the width of the duct. Provide a remote status/alarm indicator and test station for each ductdetector. Activation of duct detectors shall cause shutdown of the associated air-handling <strong>unit</strong>,annunciation at the control panel and the remote status/alarm indicator, and sounding of buildingevacuation alarms. Detector shall have a test port or switch. Duct detectors shall be installed by thesupplier of the mechanical equipment and wired to the fire alarm system by the Contractor. Wiringfor the shutdown of the respective mechanical system equipment shall be by the supplier of themechanical equipment where the duct detector is within ten feet of mechanical equipment motorstarter. Where the duct detector is remote from the mechanical <strong>unit</strong> motor starters, addressablecontrol modules shall be provided and wired by the Contractor within ten feet of each mechanical<strong>unit</strong> motor starter. Wiring from the control module to the mechanical <strong>unit</strong> motor starter shall be bythe supplier of the mechanical equipment.5.8 Addressable device monitoring modules connected to the system via supervised wiringshall be provided at elevator control panels, fire suppression system control panels, flow and tamperswitches, fire pump controllers and any non-addressable devices being connected to the system.5.9 Addressable device control modules connected to the system via supervised wiring shallbe provided at elevator control panels, shunt trip circuit breakers, smoke door operators, mechanical<strong>unit</strong> ventilators, damper operators and any other devices to be controlled by the system.5.10 Alarm horns shall be recessed mounted, single projector with matching mounting backbox. Horns shall be of the vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Hornsshall produce a sound output rating of at least 91 dbA at ten feet.Project #: 3894 16500 - 5
5.11 Visual alarm devices shall be a recessed mounted lamp assembly suitable for use in anelectrically supervised circuit. The high intensity Xenon lamp shall be the flashing stroboscopictype and powered from the control panel alarm circuit. Visual alarms shall have the minimumphotometric properties and be located in accordance with the Visual Alarm Tables of NFPA 72-1993. Lamps shall be protected by a thermoplastic lens and labeled "FIRE" in letters at least 1/2inch high. Provide visual alarms as a part of an audio-visual alarm assembly.5.12 Combination audible and visual alarm devices shall meet the above requirements for theirrespective components.5.13 Provide remote power supplies, amplifier panels, signal extender panel, etc. as requiredto support the indicating and initiating devices shown on the Drawings. Provide each with 20A,120V circuit (including circuit breaker) from the nearest panelboard with spare capacity. Also,provide a smoke detector at each of these devices.5.14 Coordinate with the Fire Protection Contractor to provide a power source for the exteriorwater flow device. Provide a 20A, 120V circuit breaker (including circuit breaker) from the nearestpanelboard with spare capacity.5.15 Digital communicator shall be the four-zone type capable of reporting over ordinarytelephone lines and meet UL 864 and NFPA 71 requirements. The <strong>unit</strong> shall be capable ofmonitoring dry contact alarm and trouble outputs and transmit a separate code for each.5.15.1 The digital communicator shall be fully supervised and shall constantly monitor ACpower, standby battery zone inputs and telephone line connections. In the event of a fault condition,the <strong>unit</strong> shall sound a local trouble alarm and report the condition to the central station.5.15.2 The digital communicator shall accept and the Contractor shall provide two-pairtelephone line. Unit shall monitor each telephone line pair and, in the event of a fault exceeding 45seconds, shall automatically switch to the other line to report the failure. Communicators shallperform a self-test every 24 hours - at an Owner selected time of day - and send the report to thecentral station.5.16 The fire alarm system main annunciator shall be integral with the main control panel.Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps and alphanumeric annunciation for each alarm initiatingdevice as indicated below, located inside the cabinet visible through the cabinet door. Supervisionwill not be required provided a fault in the annunciator circuits results only in loss of annunciationand will not affect the normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Eachannunciation shall provide specific identification of the device. In no case shall identificationconsist of the words "Zone 1," "Zone 2," etc., but shall consist of the description of the area anddevice which will uniquely identify the initiating device.5.17 Provide a "Knox Box" where required by the Local Fire Marshall. Coordinate with thelocal fire department to determine if a box is needed, where the box is to be located and thetype/model of box required.Project #: 3894 16500 - 6
5.18 Conduit, Outlet Boxes, Conduit and Outlet Box Fittings and Wiring: As specified inSECTION 16100 - INTERIOR ELECTRICAL WORK.6. SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND TESTING6.1 Installation of all wiring for fire alarm systems shall be in cable tray, conduit, orelectrical metallic tubing except that open plenum rated cable may be used in concealed, accessibleareas. Open conductors shall be supported in accessible concealed areas through the use of J-hookswith closure ties. J-hooks shall be installed on four to five foot intervals. Conductor supportthrough the use of bridle rings, tie wraps, electrical tape, or "homemade" hangers is not permitted.Conductors shall not rest on suspended ceilings or be tied to ceiling wire supports. In existing wallswhich cannot be "fished," surface metal raceway may be used subject to the restrictions of otherspecification sections and paragraphs. All circuit conductors shall be identified within eachenclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made. Conductor identification shall be by plasticcoated self-sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type sleeves. The markers shall be attached ina manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Control circuit terminations shall be properlyidentified. Wiring for DC circuits shall not be permitted in the same conduit or tubing as wiring forAC circuits.6.2 Testing of the fire alarm system shall be performed after installation is totally completed.The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative when the system is ready for finalacceptance tests. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessarypreliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfactionof the equipment manufacturer's technical representative. The system shall be in service at least tendays prior to the scheduled final acceptance test. The Contractor shall notify the Owner'sRepresentative at least 15 days prior to the date the final acceptance test is to take place. TheContractor shall furnish all appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel for this test.The system shall be tested for approval in the presence of representatives of the local authorities, themanufacturer and the Owner. All necessary tests shall be made including the following, and anydeficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to the Owner.6.2.1 Testing6.2.1.1 All new and/or extended fire alarm systems for full building or partial building areasrequiring new, modified, or supplemental fire alarm control panels shall be tested in accordance withNFPA 72 Initial Acceptance Testing. All new components and circuits shall be tested. Testing of 10percent, up to a maximum of 50 devices, of the original initiating devices is also required.6.2.1.2 Extended fire alarm systems requiring only new indicating, initiating, control, and/ormonitoring devices shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 Reacceptance Testing. All newcomponents and circuits shall be tested. If new indicating devices are added to existing indicatingcircuits, the original indicating devices on that circuit shall be tested along with the new devices. Afinal test shall be conducted with all indicating devices operating to confirm power supply adequacy.6.2.1.3 Repairs to control equipment hardware shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72Reacceptance Testing. If a device is removed, one other device on the same circuit shall be tested.Project #: 3894 16500 - 7
6.2.1.4 Changes, upgrades, and repairs to fire alarm system software shall require testing inaccordance with NFPA 72 Reacceptance Testing including 100 percent testing of all functionsknown to be affected by the change and testing of 10 percent, up to a maximum of 50 devices, notaffected by the change.6.2.2 Necessary equipment to test smoke detectors shall be provided by the Contractor with noadditional expense to the Owner.6.2.3 The supervisory systems, including all trouble alarms, shall be operated.6.3 When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all furthertesting of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments, corrections or revision have beenmade to assure proper performance of the system. If these revisions require more than a nominaldelay, the Owner's Representative shall be notified when the additional work has been completed, toarrange a new inspection and test of the fire alarm system. All tests required shall be repeated priorto final acceptance, unless directed otherwise.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16500 - 8
SECTION 16600ELECTRICALAUXILIARY SYSTEMS1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL, GENERAL andSECTION 16100 - INTERIOR ELECTRICAL WORK shall apply to this entire Section and shallhave the same force and effect as if fully included herein.1.2 Provision and installation of conduits, outlet boxes and wiring necessary for systemsincluded in this Section, shall be as specified in SECTION 16100 - INTERIOR ELECTRICALWORK.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials andaccessories necessary for, but not necessarily limited to, the installation of complete, approvedauxiliary systems for this project.3. TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM3.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install a concealed outlet box and a 3/4-inch conduitfrom outlet box (including wireless access points) as shown on the Drawings to above suspendedceiling or other accessible space for installation of signal wiring. Where there is no accessible spacefor routing wiring from the outlet to the tele/data room, provide conduit for the full length.3.2 Telephone equipment backboard shall be eight feet high by four feet wide by 3/4-inchthick. Board shall be painted gray with one coat of primer and two coats of finish paint.3.3 The Contractor shall provide a 3/4-inch conduit for grounding conductor. Conduit shallextend from the telephone equipment backboard to within six inches of an electrical service systemground potential. Grounding conductor shall be bare copper, #6 AWG mechanically bound to thepoint of earth potential. Ground wire shall terminate on a four terminal multi-lug grounding strip,mounted to the telephone equipment backboard.3.4 Inside telephone wire shall be four unshielded, twisted pair, solid, annealed copper, 24AWG, individually insulated, high density, color coded CAT. 6 cable. Wire shall have a weatherresistantplenum rated outer jacket. Lengths shall be provided as required without splices.3.5 Inside data wire shall be four unshielded, twisted pair, solid, annealed copper, 24 AWG,individually insulated, high density, color coded CAT. 6 cable. Wire shall have a weather resistantplenum rated outer jacket. Length shall be provided as required without splices.Project #: 3894 16600 - 1
3.6 Provide one cable for each outlet type (i.e. two cables of the proper type for a duplex ordual jack, one data and one telephone cable for a combination jack, etc.).3.7 Provide wall plates which shall match others used in the same area and shall be blank orequipped with a bushed opening or cutout for jacks as directed by the Owner.3.8 All telephone and data system conductors shall be furnished and installed by theContractor. Jacks and wireless access points shall be provided by the Owner. Termination at bothends shall be by the Owner. Leave adequate spare conductor at both ends to terminate on the jackand to reach and be terminated on the racks in the tele/data room.3.9 Data cable length shall not exceed 300 feet.3.10 All telephones, computers and the computer hub shall be furnished by the Owner.3.11 Telephone and data conductors shall be supported in concealed areas through the use ofJ-hooks with closure ties. J-hooks shall be installed on four to five foot intervals. Conductorsupport through the use of bridle rings and tie wraps is not permitted. Conductors shall not rest onsuspended ceilings.4. TELEVISION SYSTEM4.1 The Contractor shall install a concealed outlet box with cover and 3/4-inch EMT conduitfrom outlet box to an accessible space for routing of open plenum rated wiring for cable television tothe Electrical Room. Wiring shall be approved by the local CATV utility.4.2 The television termination equipment shall be approved by the local CATV utility.4.3 The television termination equipment shall be mounted and grounded in accordance withthe local CATV utility requirements. The Contractor shall provide a 3/4-inch conduit and groundingconductor sized per CATV utility requirements.4.4 All television system conductors and splices will be furnished and installed by theContractor per the local CATV utility requirements.5. CARD ACCESS CONDUIT SYSTEM5.1 The Contractor shall provide the necessary outlet boxes, conduit and wiring for a cardaccess security system as shown on the Drawings.5.2 The security system equipment consisting of security control panel, magnetic doorswitches, card readers, exit sensors, software, etc. shall be provided by the Security Consultanthired by the Owner under separate contract. Berkshire Systems (610-374-1300) is the approvedvendor. Coordinate device size, location and material with the Security Consultant.5.3 Electric door strikes, hinges and power supplies for the security system are providedProject #: 3894 16600 - 2
y the Door Hardware Vendor. See the Architectural Specifications.5.4 All equipment conductors shall be installed in conduit. Wiring and connections shallbe in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.5.5 Coordinate installation schedule with the Security Consultant.5.6 After the system installation is completed, a representative of the equipment suppliershall test and demonstrate the system. The Contractor shall provide personnel to help test andtroubleshoot the system.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16600 - 3
SECTION 16700ELECTRICALCOMPLETION AND TESTING1. GENERAL1.1 All applicable requirements of SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL, GENERAL shallapply to this entire Section and shall have the same force and effect as if fully included herein.2. SCOPE2.1 This Section of the Specifications covers the furnishing of all labor, materials andaccessories necessary for, but not necessarily limited to, the completion of the contract and testing ofall electrical work performed on this project.3. SERVICE3.1 The Contractor shall, after acceptance, provide any service incidental to the properperformance of the systems during the warranty period outlined in SECTION 16000 -ELECTRICAL, GENERAL.4. FINAL ADJUSTMENTS4.1 Panelboard covers shall be adjusted to be plumb and level with all cover catches engagedand tight.4.2 Doors of all panelboards, switchgear, junction boxes, enclosures, etc. shall swing free for90 degrees or greater and be adjusted so that all locks, clasps and catches can be easily operated.4.3 Install plugs in any unused conduit opening in panelboards, switchboards and otherenclosures.4.4 Install space coverplates in any unused circuit breaker positions in all panelboards.5. FINAL CLEANING5.1 Remove soil, stain and adhered extraneous materials from adjacent surfaces.5.2 Clean all soil, extraneous materials, stains, fingerprints, etc. from all lighting fixtures,panels, plates and any other exposed portion of electrical work installed under this project so that nocleaning is required by the Owner.5.3 Remove and replace items or materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned.Project #: 3894 16700 - 1
5.4 Remove any remaining protective covers, tapes or packing materials.6. SYSTEM INSPECTION6.1 Upon completion of the work, all electrical work shall be inspected by an independentinspection agency such as the Middle Department Inspection Agency. All costs related to same shallbe paid for by the Electrical Contractor.6.2 The Contractor shall correct and reinspect, at no additional cost to the Owner, any workfailing to pass inspection.6.3 Final inspection certificates shall be issued in triplicate and shall be delivered to theOwner's Representative.7. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TESTING7.1 Upon completion of the work, all manually operable components of the electrical systemsuch as switches, control devices, circuit breakers, etc. shall be operated a minimum of three times.Operation of devices shall cause the appropriate function as herein specified. Testing shall beperformed in the presence of the Owner or his representative.7.2 Upon completion of the work, all wiring of the electrical installation shall be tested andproved free of unwarranted grounds and other defects. Final tests shall be accomplished by use of amegger or as covered in this Specification. The values of all secondary wiring insulation shall meetor exceed the aforementioned Regulatory Bodies. A complete report of this test shall be submittedto the Owner's Representative in triplicate, upon request.7.3 Upon completion of the work, test the grounding system to assure continuity and that theresistance to ground is not excessive. The maximum resistance to ground of the grounding systemshall not exceed 10 ohms under normally dry conditions. Test each ground rod for resistance toground before making any connections to the rod; then tie entire grounding system together and testfor resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to the Owner's Representative and indicatethe location of the rods as well as the resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurementswhere made.7.4 At the time of testing, all overload devices, including equipment furnished under othercontracts, shall be set and adjusted to suit the load conditions.7.4.1 Adjustable settings of molded case breakers shall be set per manufacturer'srecommendation. Devices with three poles shall be adjusted to the same setting.7.4.2 Relays and circuit breaker electrostatic trip <strong>unit</strong>s shall be tested and set using amanufacturer approved test set by an electrical test technician with five years continual experience.7.5 Megger all service cables and feeder cables #2 and larger before energizing.Project #: 3894 16700 - 2
7.6 All equipment and manpower required to perform testing shall be provided by theContractor at no additional cost to the Owner.7.7 Any devices, equipment or wiring failing to pass testing procedures shall be replaced andre-tested by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.7.8 Enlist the cooperation of the equipment manufacturer where needed to obtain properequipment test performances.8. TRAINING & SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION8.1 Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative to demonstratesystem functionality and to train the Owner's operators for all of the following equipment andsystems provided for the project:Fire Alarm SystemEmergency Generation System8.2 All training shall be scheduled with the Owner two weeks in advance.8.3 The length of each training session shall be as recommended by the manufacturer or aminimum of two hours unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner.9. COMPLETION9.1 Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all his excess materials,machinery and equipment from the premises.9.2 Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall return all keys, badges, passes orparking permits issued by the Owner for use during the project.---oOo---Project #: 3894 16700 - 3
Change language